(09001 - 09003) of the called subprogram shall be set by paramerers (tlo. 0240 UMMCDI - No . 0242 UMI'ICD3) ffi5p"Cram caff , E -maiirnuru of 3 among M03 - I'1255, except M30 and t"l code which does not buffer (parameter No. 0035,'0036 MBUFI, MBUF2) can be used.
(Note l) Sirnilarly to M98, signal MF and I"1 code are not output. (Note 2) Delivery of argument is not possible. (Note 3) Subprogram call M code used in the subprogram which is called by M or code does not,executes subprogram call but as an ordinal M code.
T
16.1.3 Subprogram call using T code
When parameter (No. 0040 TMCR) is set beforehand, subprogram (09000) can be called using T code. T
i/I49 =
common
variable
/10149_as
j1"_:ryIsrrl.
(Note 1) It is not possible to command with a same block as that. of subprogram call using I'1 code. (Note 2) Subprogram call T code used in the subprogram which is called by M or T code does not executds subprogram call but as an ordinal T code. 16.1.4 G66 (Modal call) The command format
is as follows: G66P : L Called.macro body program No. The above command selects the macr.o modal call mode for NC. In other words, every time each block subsequent to the above command is executed, the macro designated by P is called. A1so, an argument can be designated by a block subsequent Eo the above command. For this argument, refer to 16.1.3. The macro modal call mode is cancelted by the command below. G67 ;
-
r50 -
s re,.
Gt Gr
&:.
*g 1
& g
16.
CUSTOM MACRO A
il ti
Request
Machine tools builders are requested to attach your custom macro program tape or program list to the CNC unit without fai1. If. it is necessary to replace part program. storage memory due to a failure, FANUC sert'icemen or end users operators in charge of maintenance should know the contents of custom ruacro for the purp-o-56-oTElTiring the trouble immedi-
li
i :
i
ately.
A function covering a group of instructions is stored in menory lhe same as a subprogram. The stored function is represented by one instructiori, so that only the representative instruction need be specified to execute the function. This group of registered instructions is ca11ed a "custom macro bodytl_ and the representativeinstructionisca11eda''cuStom'""'ffiThecustommacro body may simply be cal1ed a macro. And the custom nacro instruction may be ca11ed a macro eall command.
Custom macro body
A group of instructions for a certain function Custom macro
instruction
Programmers need only remember representative macrg i.pslructiong to remember all the instructions in a euEEom-EEEi6-6oty
\
without having
The three most significant points on custom macros are that [yg!Se? can be used in the custom macro body, .$!'Ei?ITin$ can be performed on-EiiaLles and actual values\ can be asslgned to cne vartabl-es in custom macro instructions. '1
-r49-
Table 16.1.5
Variable
number
(value)
(b)
correspondence between group number of G code and variabre numbers
Variable number (flag)
G code group
Remarks
number
#8030
#8130
00
One shot and others
#803
#8131
01
G00, G0l, c02, c03
#8032
tt8t32
o2
Gl7, cl8, cig
#803
3
#8133
03
c90,
#8035
#8135
05
G94
#803 6
#8136
06
c20,
#8037
#8137
o7
G40, G4l,
#8038
#8i38
08
G43, G44, c4g
#8039
#8
r39
09
c73, G74, G76, c80
#8040
#8 140
t0
coR vtvt
coa v//
#804 r
"?18141
l1
G66,
G67
#8045
#8 145
I5
G6I, G62, c63,
8046
tt8L46
16
c68,
#
1
c9
l
G2
I G42
-
c8g
G64
c69
//8I00rs variables are flags to indicaEe whetehr an argument has been speci f ied or not every call. These variables are I if an argument is specified, and 0 if no argumenE is specified. #8000's variables show a specified value, if an argument is specified. However, they become as specified below, j-f no argument is specified. i) Reference in NC command The address itself is neglected. 2) Reference in macro command (G65 block) This value is undefined. Use it after confirming 8f00's numbers. If plural G codes are specified a arguments in the same block, a value is input to variables in each group as shovrn in Table L6.1 .2 (b). In rhis case, /18010 is the smallest group nuuber out of the numbers specified at a time. No value can institute into //8100's and 8000f s variables.
-L52-
16.1.5 Argument specification
An argument means an actual value given to a variable employed in a salled dll V. can be specified at all addresses employable'in this CNC llldLr 5u ^- 4!^-^"ment except for 0. The format of argument specification is f-he same as in normal CNC command. The llmitation at each address as a normal CNC command, such as decimal point, sign, maximum number of digits, etc., is also applicable t.o the format. The following table indicates the correspondence between argument specification addresses and variable numbers. Table 16.1.5
Variable
number
(a)
Correspondence between addresses and variable numbers
Vari.able
number
(flag)
Address
#8004
#8104
I
#800s
#8105
J
#8006
#8 106
K
#800
9
#8 109
-f
#80 r0
#8i10
#80rr
#8llt
H
#8013
#81
l3
M
#80r4
#8r14
N
#80r6
#8rl6
P
#8017
#81i7
a
#8018
#8IIB
R
#8019
#8rl9
J
#8020
#8120
T
{t8024
tt8l24
#80 25
#8125
I
8026
{t8r26
Z
(value)
tf
- l5l -
Remarks
16.22 Kind of variables Variables are sort.ed into
conmon vari-ab1es
and system
variable_s according to variab1enumbers,andtheiram;,,d"h'...i:.'"romeachother. 1) Common variable //100 to ilt49 and //SO0 to ii 531 Common variables are cornmon to main programs and each macro called from these main programs. That is, i/i in a macro is equal to /li in another macro. Common variables //L00 co--_il_I49 are cleared when the power is turned off, and reset to "0" jusr after por6Fw66 turned on. Cbninon v-arial tEslSOO ro rI53l
clea:9{,= _:ygl
2)
"jg_,r'-otunchanged 51'stem variable
_ i{"."._poy_er
is turned ,- of f ,-- and - thJii--vaiu-eF:-ena-in
The system variables are defined as variables whose appllcati-ons remain f ixed a) Tool of f set amounr #L - 1199, IIZOOO - llZ2OO The offset amount can be known by reading system variable //l to ll99 values for tool offset amounts, and these values can be changed by substituting them into system variables llL to 1199. Among these offset numbers I to 99, those which are not used as offset amounts can be treated as hold tvDe cofftron variables (#500 to ilS:t) . The system variables il200L to ll22O0 correspond to the tool offset numbers 1 to 200. They can be read and substituted as the same as /ll to 1199. b) Inrerface inpur signals i/1000 to /ll0I5, llLo3z Interface input signals can be known, by reading system variables //1000 to #1015 for reading interface signals.
zrs 2r4 DI
UI
2r2
":
I5 UI14 UI13 UI I2 UI1
#1014 #1015
#
r1o 29 28
2rr 1
2l
26 25 24 23 22 2l
UIlO UI9 UI8 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1
zo UIC
| #ror2 I #roio liiroos llrrooo lltrdoa l+rooz llrr 000
1013
i/1009
10
Input signal
#L007
/l
l00s
#
1003
/i1001
Variable value
Contact closed
I
Contact opened
0
By readi.ng system variable lt1032, all the lnput signals can be read at once.
l5
tt'L032: L /t(i000
-f t)
x I^1
i=0
(Note I) No .r"1rl. can be substituted into system bariables #1000 to llL032. (Note 2) System variables #1000 ro i/tOt5 can be
(Note 3)
uncti-on.
DGNOS No. i10 UlO to Ul7 DGNOS No. lll Ul8 to Ul5 System variables i/1000 to llLO32 can be used only when FANUC is comblned.
-154-
PMC
e
ss 3
L
16.2 Custom Macro
Body
]n the custom macro body, the CNC command, which uses ordinary ala command variables, calculation, and branch command can be used. The custom macro body starts from the program No. which irunediately follows 0 and ends at M99.
0
c6EoT-.
.
.
G90c00x/r 10 r
c65H82
, ,
De^^e^.. r
rl^
Calculation
command
t
CNC command
using variables
rvSr4ur
Branch
rrv.
command
End of custom Eacro Fig.
16.2 Construction of the custom macro body
16.2.1 Variables
Instead of dj,rectly providing a numeral to an address in the macro, a variable can be specified to make the macro flexible and versatile by applying the calculated variable when calling t,he macro or when executj-ng the macro itself. Multiple variables are identified from each other by variable numbers. I ) How te-exol:ss--lari-ablesVariables are exPressed by variable numbers following /l as shor^m below. ll_i (i = l, 2, 3, 4 ...... ) (Exarnple) !!5, tJQ-- #199:2) How to quote variables A numeral following an address can be repraced by a variable. Assume that //i or - /li is programmed, and it means that the variable value or its complement serves as the tommand value of the address. (Example)
: ]'i-fl?3:: il:i::::: :H: ;:;,;';":"Hilfi":n;il"11'li,J I'i,0.
. "G it139" indicates that G3 was commanded when /1130 = 3. When replacing a variable number with a variable, it is not expressed as tt//ill00tt, for example, but expressed astt//9100". That is, rrgtr rr.*t to ttlftj indicates the substitute of the variable number, while the lower number to be rep laced. (Example) If*/i 10O--=_._!_Q5- and /1105 = -500 , "Xi/9100" indicates that X-500 r^ras commanded, and "X-/19100" indicaCes that X500 \4ras conrmandJ.". g"
(Note 1) No variable can be quoted at address 0 and N. Neither 0#100 nor N//120 can be programured. (trtote 2) IT-Is not possible to command a value exceeding the maxi-mum comnand value set in each address. When #30 = I20, M/130 has exceeded the maximum command value.
3)
to display and set a variable value Tt is possible to display a variable value on the variable value to a variable by MDI key.
How
-r53-
CRT screen
or set
a
of necessary parts, number of machined parts It is possible to read and substitute the number of necessary parts number of machined parts by use of system variables.
e) Number
Kind
System
and
variable
Number
of machined parts
#390I
Number
of necessarv parts
#3902
(Note l) Do not substitute a negative value. f
) I'Iodel inf ormation /f400L - #4120 It is possible to know the current values of modal information (modal command given ti11 irnmediately preceding block) by reading values of system variables #4001 - li4120. Variab Ies
Model information
#400 r
G code (group 01) G code (group 02) G code (group 03)
114002
#4003 #4022 tt4L09 lf
4t13
tt4rt4 {t4IL5 tt4t19 ll4t20
G code (group 22)
F code
M code Sequence No. Program No. S code
T code
(Note l) The unit will be the one being used when .the
command
is given.
C) Position information //5001 to /15083 The position information can be known by reading system variables ii500I to #5083. The unit of position information is.0.001 mm in metric input and 0.000I inch in inch input.
-
156
-
c) Interf ace ourpur signals //t tOO to /l lll5, #t132, #I133 A value can be substituted into system variables sending the interface signals. 2r5 214 213 212 2Lt I 10 DO
J0l5 uo14 uol
3
u0l2
u01
28 27 26 25 24
29
I)
to u0l5) i5
I|LL3Z
= L
can
a
/11106
{trro7
I 109
Variable value
(uoo
I /il104 |
#1 105
#1 1
.,
23
l5 for
1n
2' 2'
2"
u01 uoc
#1102
#r103
i
#rro
111101
Output signal
I
Contact closed
0
Contact
opened
value into system variable Itll32, all be sent out. at once.
#(1100 -tr-)xz
to
uol0 uo9 uo8 u07 u06 u05 u04 uo3 u02
1
llLLr4 | llrrl2 I /t1110 l/tl108 I
By substituting
#1100
output signals
^I
r-v
32 interface signals
to
(UO100
U0131) can be sent out by
#II33 at
once.
^n JU
#ii33= r il(24*vi) i=0
Vi = 0 when Vl = 1 when
-z3L UO (100+i) is LOW. UO (100+i) is HIGH.
(Note 4) If
any other number than '0' or ' I ' is subsEituted into system variables #1100 to /ll1l5, it is treated as 'l'. (Note 5) It is possible to read the values of sysrem variables /llt00 ro /lll33. (Note 6) System variables /lll00 to #1115 and #1133 can be displayed by diagnostic function. DGNOS No. 126 UOO to UO7 No. 127 U08 to UOl5 No. 196 U0100 ro u0107 No. 197 u0108 ro U0ll5 No. I98 U0116 ro U0123 No. 199 UOl24 ro UOl3l (Note 7) System variables #1f00 to llll3z can be used only when FANUC PMC is combined.
d) Clock inf ormation /i 301I , ll3Ol2 It is possible to know the year,
mont.h, day, hour, minute, and second by
reading system variables #3011, ll30L2. Kind
Year, Month,
When i-t is May 20, #30 I 2 = 19870520,
#3Alz
Second
L98l 4: 17 5"
It30L2
=
variable
#3011
Day
Hour, Minute, (Example)
System
PM
16r705
-155-
(Meaning) i/i
=
(Exanple) p/l100 P#
i00
P# IOO
P# 100 P# 100
(Note
I)
(Examp
le)
(Note 2)
ttj @ #k I Operator Q#l0l
(
Speci f ied
Hm)
Rii 102
#
Q/i l0 r Q-100
RI5
#r00
R/i 102
# 100
Qr 20
R-50
#
100
R/i i 02
/r
I00
Q-# l0
I
100
= //l0I = //l0l = -100
= 120
t02 I5 l!r02
+ + +
#
en -JU
+
= -/1101
tno2
+
No decimal point can be put to variable values. Therefore, the meanlng of each vaLue is the same as that designated without decimal point when quoted in each address.
/1100 = i0 X#100 0.01 mm (metric input) Those indicating an angle must be expressed by degree, and the least input increment is 1/1000 degree.
(Example) 100 (Note 3) H code
0,1"
specified by G65 does not affect any selection of offset
amount
Table of macro i nstru ctions
G code
H code
Definition
Function
inition,
lti = lli
substitution
H0l
Def
HO2
Addition
tl
H03
Sub
tt
H04
Produc
tt
H05
ni.,i^i^-,,' uLv L>LwLL2/
ili=i/jx/lk
HII
Logical
{t1
il
Hl2
Logical product
#i = #j.AND.
tl
HI3
Exclusive
Iti = llj
H21
Snrrrro
ll
H22
Absolute value
#i = {tE //i = I/rjl
tl
H23
Remainder
#i = #j - rrunc (//j///k) x trunc: Discard fractions
tl
ili=#j+i/k li]-=#J-ilk
tract ion
lli=lll+tlk
s
t
sum
0R
rnnl-
= tij .0R. #k /lk
.xOR. #k
less than I
tl
tl
tl tl
H24
Conversion from BCD to binarl
/li = BrN (//j)
H25
Converslon from binarv to
/ii =
nzo
Cornbined
divislon
multiplic
aLion /
BCD
BDC
(#j)
lli=(#ix#j)+/ik
H27
Combined square
root I
*i = frjz-a16r
H28
.^-L-'*^r uurlutLlcu
root
tli='fr42-1;pz
>Yuot
g
2
-158-
llk
Q\/cl-pm rl ev-"'
variab #500
Re:d'ino
Position information
1e
I
while moving
Rl ne k end nni nl- n^q'i f i nn nf
X axis (ABSI0) Block end point position of
115002
Possible
Not considered. Position of tool nose (program command position)
Impossible
Considered.
Y awi q #500
Block end point position of
3
#5004
Block end point position of 4th axis
It502L tf 5022
X axis coordinate position Y axis coordinate posi.tion
#5023 {t5024
Z axis coordinate position 4th axis coordinate oosition
{t5041
Present position of X axis
#506
I frnnccl
Skip signal position of X axis Skip signal position of Y axis Skip si-gnal position of
I
#5062 #50 63 tf
h I a
Position of tool raFaranaa
nnini
as ABSOLUTE indication at POS) (Same
Possible
Considered.
Position of tool roforanno
Value of cutter compensation Value of tool length compensation (X axis) Value of tool length compensation (Y axis) Value of tool length compensation (Z axis)
#508 0
I
{t5082 #508
Considered.
nninf
Skip signal position of 4th axis
5064
#508
nninl-
(Machine coordinate)
Present position of Y axis Present position of Z axis Present position of 4th axis
#5043 {ts044
Position of tool roForanoo
(ABS0r)
tt5042
Cutter and tool length compensation
3
Possible
It is not possible to substitute any value into system variabtes /lS00l ro /15083. (Note o\ When the skip signal doesn't turn on, the skip signal position is the end point of that block.
(Note !.)
16.2.3 Macro instructions (G65)
Generar I orm G65 Hm e/i m
tti ltj Itk
i qili
n/ik;
Indicates macro functions at 01 to 99. Variable name to which arithmetic result is loaded. Variable name I to be operated. A constant is also acceptable. Variable name 2 to be operated. A constant is also acceptable.
-r57-
h) Exclusive 0R /fi G6s H13
(Ex.)
= //j .xoR. #k P#i Q/ij Rifk; c65 Hl3 P#l0l Q/i102 R#103; (#I0l = ttroT .XOR. #i03)
r) Square root /ii = /#j G65 H21 P/l j. Q//j; (Ex.) c6s H21 p/ll0r Q/i102; (#l0r = /#ro2)
j)
nUsolute value
(Ex.)
/i
i = l#j
I
G65 H22 P/li Q/13; G65 H22 p//10r Q//102;
(//l0r = l+rozl
k) Remainder lli- = ltj - trunc (/lj///k) x i/k trunc: Discard fractions less than (Ex.)
c6s H23 P/li Q/ij Rilk;
G65 H23 P//101 Q//102 R//103;
(//r0r = llt02 - rrunc(lfLOzlltrO3) x ilr03)
BCD to binary /li = G65 H24 P/lr. Q/li; G65 H24 p//l0l Q//102; (iil0r
BIN (//j)
f) Conversion from (Ex.)
= BrN (#102))
BCD i/i = BCD (#j) P#i Q#j; c65 H2s p//r01 Q//r02; (/ir0r = BCD (#102))
m) Conversion from binary to
(Ex.)
G65 H25
n) Conbined multiplication/division (/li x i/j) + //k G6s H26 e;[i Qili ni/k; (Ex.) G65 H26 p/lr0l Q#r02 R/i103; (//10r = (#101 x /i102) + o) combined square roor I lli = {iliT +-tl? G65 H27 P#i Q/ij R#k; (Ex. ) G65 H27 pill0l Q#102 R/i 103; (#101 n) rt
1l
Combined square root 2 11i = /142 - 1S1rz G65 H2B r/ll Q//5 ni/k; (Ex. ) c65 H28 p//r01 Q//102 R//103; (/i 101
= ltltoZ2 +
/1103)
1lLO32
= /llL022 - llLnz
Sine //i = //j . SIN (i/k) (degree unir) c65 H3r P#i q/li n/lk; (Ex.) G65 H31 p//r0r Q//r02 R//r03; (#r0L = llro2
SrN (#103))
r) Cosine lti = lli (Ex. J)
)
Tangent
(Ex.)
COS (#k) (degree unit) G65 H32 e//i qi/t n//r; c65 H32 p//r01 Q/i 102 R//103; (/lr0r
= llr02 cos
TAN (//k) (degree unit) cps H33 P//r Q/ii Ri/k; G65 H33 p/ii0r Q#102 R//103; (//l0r =
(#103) )
lli = ltj
#ro2
TAN (#103))
r) Arctangenr lti = ATAN (#j/#k) (degree unit) c65 H34 p//i Q/lj n/lk; (0"
(rx.;
(Note
(Note (Note
c65 H34 p/ll0l Q//102 R#103;
(#l0r = ArAN (llLozllll03))
1) Angle in (q) to (t) must be indicated by degree and the least f rrPu L increment is l/1000 degree. 2) If .either Q or R necessary for each arithmetic operation was not indicated, i-ts value is calculated as t0t. 3) A11 figures below decimal point are truncated if each arithmetic result includes decimal point.
-
160
-
._."_*4$ry
U LUUE
H code
Function
Definitlon
c65
H3l
Sine
tr
H32
Co
H33
Tangent
ttj-
tl
H34
Arctangent
/ii = ArAN (tti/#k)
tl
H80
Unconditional divergence
G0T0n
H8i
Conditional divereence
1
IF i/j = llk,
H82
Conditional divergence
2
rF #j + lfk, Go TO n
H83
Conditional di.vergence 3
rF
H84
Conditional divergence
4
rF #j < llk, G0 TO n
H85
Conditional divergence
5
rF /ij z /ik,
GO TO n
H86
Conditional divergence
6
IF /ij : /lk,
G0 T0 n
H99
P/S alarm occurrence
It
tl !l
It
sine
I) Variable arithmetic
lli = ,'Jlli
.
crN /ilr,\ ultl \rrN/
tli = ,,J ll:
.
(il1,\ nnc vvu vN/,
= ltj .
TAN (//k)
GO TO n
//j > {lk, Go ro n
P/S alarrn number 500 + oecurrence
command
a,, uer].n]-c1on ancl substitution of variable lli = #i c65 HOl P//i Q/ij; (Ex. ) c65 H0l p/tl0l Q1005; (/i 101 = 1005) c6s H01 P#101 Q//r10; (//101 = #110) c65 H01 p//101 Q_/i 112; (li 101 = _#LLz)
b) Addirion //i = #j + ttk . c6s H02 P//i Q/tj R//k; (Ex. ) c6s H02 pitlol Q/ir02 R15; (#101 = #L02 + 15) -€:-' c) Subtracrion //i = /li - +t< c6s H03 r/tt q//i n/tk; (Ex.
)
c65 H03 p//r01 Q#102 R//103;
d) Product i/i = #j x
(Ex.)
r = #102 -
#103)
(//l0l = #ro2 x
/1103)
(//10
#k
c65 H04 r/ti Q//5 n/ik; c6s H04 p#101 Q#102 R/t103;
e) Division /ii = /li + iik c65 H05 Pili Q/tj R//k; (Ex.
)
f) Logical (Ex. )
c6s H05 pii r0r Q#102 R#103; (i/101 = #r02 + i/r03) surn
c6s c65
/fi = //j .0R. #k Hll P/ti q//i n//k; Hr r p/ll0l Q//102 R//103;
(/t101 = #r02 .oR. #i03)
g) Logical product lti = lli .AND. #k c65 H12 P#i Q#j R//k; (Ex. ) c65 Hl2 p#l0l Q#102 R#103; (ttl01 = #to2 .AND.
-i59-
#103)
n
2)
Control command a) Unconditional branch G65 HBO Pn; n: Sequence number (Ex. ) c65 H80 PI20; (Diverge ro Nl20) b)
Conditional divergence I ilj EQ. #k (=) G65 H81 Pn Q/lj n/lk; n: Sequence number (Ex.) c6s H8l Pr000 Q/ll0l R/ti02; /lI0l = llt02, go ro N1000
#t0l I lll02, go ro nexr
Conditional divergence 2 //j . NE . #k (l)
(Ex.)
c65 H82 Pn Q//j R/lk; n: Sequence number c6s H82 P1000 Qillol R//102; IIIOL + llT02, go ro Nt000 lll0l = lllo2, go ro nexr
d) Conditi-onal divergence 3 ilj cT //k (>) c65 H83 Pn Qilj n/lk; n: Sequence number (Ex.) c6s H83 Pr000 Qllr0l R//102; /1101 > ltLO2, go ro N1000 #
I01 < ltLO2, go to nexr
Conditional divergence 4 /lj LT /lk (<) _q05--H9-4 Pn Qilj R/lk; n: Sequence number (Ex.) c6s H84 P1000 Q#lOi n/1102; #i0I < llL02, go ro N1000 #101 Z llL02, go ro nexr L)
Conditional divergence 5 /ij cE /ik (>) c65 H85 Pn Qilj R/lk; n: SequencE number (Ex. ) c6s H8s P1000 Qi/101 R//i02; //f 0l Z tlI02, go ro N1000 //101 < lll02, go ro nexr
C) Conditional divergence 6 /13 LE . #k (<) G65 H86
(Ex.
)
fn
Ql/5
h) P/S alarur occurrence c65 H99 Pi; i: (Ex. )
(Note
n/tt; n:
SequencE number
c65 H86 P1000 Q//iOl R//102; /1101 S lfloz, go ro N1000 # l0 i > ltI}z, go ro nexr Alarm No. +500
G65 H99 PI5;
P/S alarrn 515 occurrence
If positive numbers were designated as sequence numbers at branch designations, they are searched forward first and then, backward. If negative numbers were designated, they are searched backward first and then, forward. (Note 2) Sequence number can also be designated by variables. (Example) c65 H8l P#100 Q#l0l R//102; When conditions are satisfied, processing branches to the block having the sequence number designated with #100. I)
- 16l -
16.2.4 Notes on custom macro l) How to input "//"
key is depressed af ter address G, X, Y, Z, R, I, J, K, F, H, M, S, T, P or Q, i/ code is input. 2) It is also possible to give a macro instruction in the I'IDI mode. However, address data other than G65 are not displayed by keying operation. 3) Addresses H, P, Q and R of macro instruction must always be written after G65. Address 0 and N only are writable before G65. 4) Single block Generaliy, the macro instruction block does nor stop even if single block stop is turned on. However, by setting parameter SBKM of parameter No. 0011, it is possible to make single block effective. This is used for macro testing. 5) Variable values can be taken within a range of -232 to 232-t, but they are not displayed correctly, except for -99999999 to 99999999. If they exceed the above range, they are displayed as *ti*?k****. 6) it is possible to nest subprograms up to four tj-mes. 7) Since an integer only is employable as the variable value, in case the operati,on results with decirnal numbers, the figures below decinal point truncated, if an arithmetic result contains a fractj-on part. Particularly be carful with the arithmetic sequence, accordingly. (Ex.) When /1100 = 35, /ll0l = I0, lllo2 = 5 the followlngs results. //110 = /1100 + /lI0l (= 3) #l1l = #110 x #102 (= 15) llr20 = i/100 x /i I02 (: I75) ItL2I = //120 + /i101 (= tl) /tI11 = 15 ard lf L2I = 17 8) The execution time of macro instruction differs according to varj-ous conditions (for example, if the axis is under movement or not). It may be several when l#l
Eens msec. on an average.
9) When a custom macro is loaded from a paper tape in the EIA code, '&' code is treated as t'//tt, because there is in no "//t' code in the EIA code.
-162-
Examples of Custom Macro
$.3.1 Bolt hole circle Drill n pieces of, holes Y o) at the center of a circle. Set ref erence Point -(X-0, rtn?r on the circumference of the circle having radius (r), squally divlded.. bY
Jiartittg with angle (a).
Reference
point (X6, Ye)
(n- I )th
hole
\
Present position
Yn : Coordinate values at the reference point of bolt hole circle. X,,, U: Radius r : Starting angle a n : Number of holes I The following variables are used: #500 X coordinate value at reference point (Xo) ii 50r Y coordinate value at reference point (Yn) {t502 Radius (r) #503Starting angle (a) Itso4 Number of holes (n) However, when n > 0, counterclockwise (n pieces) when n < 3, clockwise (-n pieces) The following are used as r.rorks in custom macro: #f00 : Counter showing the drilling of the i-th hole in progress (i) Last value of counter (= l"ll (ie) #10r Angle of the i-th circle (ei) ItLO2 X axis value of rhe i-ch hole (Xi) #t03 Y axis value of the l-th hole (ti) It LOA U
-163-
Custom macro o90
t0;
instructions are
programmed
N100 c65 HOr P//100 Q0: c6s H22 P/t101 Qitsoa; N200 G65 H04 P//102 Q//100 R360000; G65 H05 PllLO2 Q/i 102 R/i504; G65 H02 Plfr}z Q#s03 Rillo2 i G65 H32 P//103 Qll502 R/1r02; c6s Ho2 P/1103 Q/1500 Ri/r03; c65 H31 P/1r04 Q/1s02 R/1i02; c6s H02 Pillo4 Q/1s01 R#104 t G90 H00 x#r03 Y/1104; M10;
c6s H02 P# 100 Q// 100 Rl ; c6s H84 P-200 Q#100 R/li0r;
as follows: {-n I_U
ie = l"l I
I I )
'l )
.360o x
tJ].=at-
1
n
Xi=Xo*rCOS (ei) Yi=Yo+rSIN(0i) Positioning to the i-t.h hole Output of hole machining M code r -
lr
l-
Wheni
to N200 to dri1l
M99;
The program to call thls custom macro, for example, will o00
r0;
G65 H01 P#500 Q100000; G65 HOl P#50I Q-200000; c65 HOI Plt502 Q100000; G65 Hol P/1503 Q20000 i c65 H01 P//504 Q12;
c92 X0 Y0 lI98 P9010'
;0"
;6f
be
as
follows:
Xn = 100 nrm Yo = -200 mm r = 100 nm
a=
20"
Counrerelockwise (n = t2)
Z0
Custom rnacro
.r
call
M02;
to i/504 can also be set by MDI operation. rn this case, blocks with G65 of the above program are not
i1500
necessary
16.3.2 Pocket machining
A pocket milling cycle to machine the area illustrated below can be programmed by custom macro. Area cutting is done with a certain depth and another area cutting is done after the tool is cut-in along the Z axis.
Rapid traverse
FeedrateSxe Feed r3le e or f (e : Z direction f : XY plane)
Starting point (x, y)
r
z I
I ---r-I
I I I
I
"l -164-
lil lii
Respect ive variables mean as follows: X axis absolute coordinate value #500
at left lower part of pocket, starting point (x). #50 I Y axls absoluLe coordinate value at left lower part of pocket, starting point (V). 11502 Z point absolute coordinate value (z) R point absolute coordinate value (r) #503 quantity at one time (q), positive number Cutting lls04 /150s Length of X axis direction in area (i), positive number Length of Y axis direction in area (j), posltive number {t506 11507 Finishing margin (k) #s08 tZ when machining width is set to cutter diameter x tZ TooI radius (d) # 509 #s l0 Feed rate in XY plane (f) #51 r Feed rate in Z axis (e) Tool is fed at a rate of 8 x e until it reaehes I mm before the starting point of cutting. /1100 to i1113: Used as a work for calculations. Custom macro instructions are programmed as follows: 09020;
c6s H02 P#100 Q#s09 R/1507; c65 H04 PltLO2 Q#509 R2; c65 H26 Pllro2 Q#508 R100; c6s H02 PllLO2 Qi/102 Rl; c65 H02 P#103 Q/1s00 R//100; c65 H02 PllLO4 Q//s01 R//r00; c6s H02 P//10s Q//s00 R//505; c65 H02 P//105 Q//10s Riir00; c6s H02 P/1r06 Q//s01 R//506; c6s H03 P#106 Qil106 R/i100; c6s H02 PitLOT Qilso2 R/1507; c 90 c00 x/l 103 Yil i 04 ; z{1503; c65 H0l P//108 Q//503; N 100 c6s H03 P# 108 Q# 108 Rit5 04 ; c65 H85 P110 Q#108 Ri/107; c6s H01 P#108 Qi/107; Nl10 c0l zllIoS F/t511; xlll0s F//510; c65 H01 P#109 Ql; N 120 G6s H04 P# I 10 Q# 109 R/l 102 ; c65 H02 P/tl l0 Q/t110 R//r04; c6s H86 Pr 30 Q# r l0 Ril i 06 ; c6s H01 P#1 t0 Q// r06 ; N 130 Y/l l 10; c65 H23 Pil I I I Qil109 R2 ; G65 H8l Pt40 Q#l ir R0; x//r03; c65 H80 P150; N 140 xi/ 105 ; Nl50 c65 n02 P#i09 Q#109 Rr; c6s H84 P-120 Q#l r0 R/l106; c00 zll503; x// 103 Yil r 04 ; c6s H86 P200 Q//108 u/107; c65 Ho2 PlltL2 Q/lr08 Rl000; c6s H04 P#t 13 Q//s l r R8; c0l zllLr2 Filrl3; c65 H80 P-100; N200
M99;
-165-
16.3.3 Interface signal Read signed BCD 3 Structure of DI
digirs by address swirching ln
zr5 zr4 2r3 2L2 zrl zlo z9 28
Used for
S
other
27
//100.
26 25 24 23
22
ign
Purpose -
Data send signal
Structure of
DO
zB 27 26
25
Used for purPose
instructions are
prograrnraed
c65 HT2
c65
H01
N20
c65
H8l P10
Address
Q//10r3
Address (7) send Address send signal
00 Q-/1100; I HI2 Pltrr3z Q//1132
ON
I^/aiting for data send BCD 3 digits read Conversion into binary number Addition of sign
R0;
P#r00 Q//r032 R4095; c65 H24 P//r00 Q//100; c65 H8l P20 Q/11012 R0; l MQQ.
20
as follows:
G65 H12 PllLr32 Q/11132 R480; G65 HIl PllLr32 Q/11 132 R23;
N10 G65
2r
Address send signal
u
Custom macro 09 I 00;
24 23 22
P// r
R495;
-166-
Address send signal
OFF
16.3.4 Shearing machine
I I
X axis
+ _---
I I I
I I I
Cutter Workpiece
(r) (o) First margin {t502 (Ax) Shearing width #503 (B) margin for grasping workpiece lf )u4 Distance from reference point Eo cutter (h) Custom mac ro instructions are programmed as follows: #
500
#50
I
Width of workpiece
091 10;
c65 H03 P#100 Q#s00 R//50i; N10 c65 H03 P#r01 Q//s04 R/l t00; c90 G00 x#l0l M?n.
c65
uo)
H03 H85
P#100
P-10
Q#
100
Q#r00
n/i502 ;
n/i
503;
M99;
0-n
h
-
//r00
X axis positioning
Cutting command ilr00 -A{ IF #100 : B, c0
TO N10
The macro call program, for example, will be as follows: 00009; (i1500 to ii504 are set by l"lDI operation.)
G92 M98
XO;
P9110;
rr v t
Mo?.
16.3.5 Program examples
Conversion from cartesian coordinate system (X-Y-Z) into cylindrical system (r-e-Z). r = tQr +l;20 = arcEan (y/x) (-180" < e < 180')
-167-
coordinate
Common
variable
=X ll5o2 = Y //505 = r //506 = e i1501
{1507
=
employed:
Sequence number at the /1120 = I,trork
#Ilo, //Ill, llrr2, 01000
c66
G90; P8000;
Nlr00 c92 X0 Y0 z0; N1200 s2000 M03 T02; NI300 G00; NI400 xl00.0 Y100.0; N1500 x200.0 Y-200.0;
N1600 x0
Y-I00.0;
call
cOmrnand
Absolute
command
08000 is called every block Coordinate system setting
in
(X, Y, Z) = (0, 0, 0) Point (r, e, Z) = (0,90.000,0)
(X, Y) = (100.0, 100.0) (r, e) = (141.42I, 45.000) (X, Y) = (200.0, -200.0)
(r, e) = (282.842, -45.000) (X, Y) = (0, -100.0) (r, €) - (100.0, -90.000)
N2000 c04 P1000;
hrell I
N8000 G67 i N9000 M02;
Modal
sec.
call
lm.0
-168-
node cancel
nodal cal,1 rnode.
O
poinr
point poinr
16.4
Pattern Data Input Function
This function is provided to enable users to make CNC programrning by taking numerj.c data (patcern data) only out of a drawing and setting thesd numerical values from CRT/MDI panel without any need of programming using an existing NC language.
With the aid of this function, a machine tool builder can freely prepare a hole machining cycle (boring cycle, tapping cycle, or the like), for example, by utilizing the custom macro function, and load the hole machining cycle lnto the program memory.
f) This cycle is designated as pattern names like BORI, TAP3, DRL2, .... An operator can select a desired pattern out of the menu of pattern names being displayed on CRT 2) A cycle should be prepared by using variables (pattern data) which are specified by the operator. The operator can identify these variables as depth, return relief, feed' blank, and other pattern data names. The operator gives values (pattern data) to these names. 16.4.1 Pattern menu display
ffi sl'l t"y again after selecting an offset or custom macro variable screen by depressing the m k"y, Ehe following pattern menu screen is Pr*'rl
When depressing
IJFS
displayed
: HOLE PATTERN 1. BOI-T F€LE 2. GRID 3. LIIE NFE.E 4. TNPPII€ 5. DRILLII.G 5. EmIfS ?. PMGT 8. PEG<
F€NJ
>.
OtW NLw
tESl
1O. BrcK SELECT =
title
HOLE PATTERN
Menu
BOLT HOLE
Pattern
name
EIT
An optional character string l2 characters. An optional character string l0 characters.
1S
settable within
1S
settable within
The machine tool builder should program the character strings of menu title and pattern name by the custom macro, and load it into the program memory as a subprogram of program number "9500". l) Macro instruction to describe the menu title Menu title
ci cz t3 c+ cs ce cl cg cg cto cii Cl, CZ ....
ctz CtZ : Characters of menu t.it.le (L2 characters)
-169-
l'lacro i-nstruction c65 H90 p
TJ H90P p Q q R UJNKi : Specifies the menu ri_11e : Assuure a, and a, be the codes of characters C, and C^, L Z' P=atx1O3+a, p CCO OOO
-L
a, of character c. Code a, of character C
Code
L
I
See 16.7.3
q
:
r
:
i
:
j
:
k
,
for character
codes.
or.lO aO be the codes of characters C, and C4, q=a3xl0-*aO Assume a. and a. be the codes of characters c. and c., )?b56 r="5x10-+aU Assume rr rld a, be the codes of characters C, and C' t=^7x10"*a, Assume ao and a.,.., be the t"t coqes codes or of cnaracters characters cg C^ ttd and L10' C , =;";";r-;.t'0^"A=".*l f.,' and 0" rhe codes of characrers c.. and'"12' n "'", rr ? ^. t="lrxl0'*^I2
Assume
(Example) Assume that
the rnenu title is "HOLE PATTERN", and the instruction is given as follows.
c6s H90 Po72 079 Q076 069 R032 080 1065 084 J0B4 o0g K082 078 HOLEL_IP ATTERN For codes corresponding to these characters, refer to item i6.8.3.
instruction to clescribe pattern Pattern name
2) Macro
ct t3 'z cl' c2 ""
to
f
name
tg tg tto
'4 'l cto Characters of pattern nane (10 characters) L1acro ins truct ion G65 Ii91 P n a qRrI iJiK H91 Specifies the pattern name n Specif ies the menu number of pattern name (n = I to I0) Assume a, Y ., be the codes of characters C., and C,r,
"lO
'q=atxl0-*a, r
Assume aa and ar, be J^a
the codes of characters C, and CO,
.=t3xl0-+aO f
Assurne
1
a_ and a)?b
be
the codes of characters C, and CU,
be
the codes of characters C7
t=u5xi0-+aU Assume a_ and t?d
a^
j=arxlo-'+au
k
Assume
"g
"rd
Cg,
uld r b. the codes of characters Cg rrd Cl0, l0
k="9x10"*r,,0
-
170
-
macro ;
(Example) Assume that the pattern name of menu No. I is "BOLT HOLE", and the macro instructlon ls glven by; G65 H9t pl Q066 079 R076 084 1032 072 JO79 076 K069 032 t
BOLTLJHO LEL-l (Note) If a part of characters are not specified by P, Q, R, I, J or K which designace character strings, but they are omitEed, the characters (two characters) at that part are regarded as space characters.
3) Pattern number selection Enter a desired pattern number by keying operation from the pattern nenu as fo11ows, for example.
CRT
Etr
The selected pattern number is set to system variable "//5900". The custou macro of the selected pattern can be started by starting a fixed program (external program number search) with an external signal and then, referring to system variable #5900 by the program.
4)
Menu title: 09500;
Example of custom mrcro to describe pattern names
Nl c65 H90
P072 079 Q076 059 R032 080 1065 084 J084 069 K082 078; N2 c65 H91 P1 Q066 079 R076 084 T032 072 J079 076 K069 032: N3 G65 H91 P2 Q071 082 R073 068; N4 c65 H9l P3 Q076 073 R078 069 1032 065 J078 071 K076 069; Ns c65 H91 P4 0084 065 R080 080 1073 078 J071 032; N6 C65 H91 P5 Q068 082 R073 076 T076 473 J078 071; N7 c65 H91 P6 Q066 079 R082 073 1078 07 1; N8 c65 H91 P7 Q0B0 079 R067 07s 1069 084; N9 c65 H9i P8 Q080 069 RO67 075; N10 c65 H9i P9 Q084 069 R083 084; Nit c65 H91 PrO Q066 065 R067 075;
Nl2
HOLE PATTERN
i. 2.
171
GRID
3. LINE
ANGLE
4. TAPPING 5. DRILLING I
M99;
-
BOLT HOLE
-
6.
BORING
7. 8.
POCKET PECK
q
TEST
IO.
BACK
16.4.2 Pattern data display When
a pattern
is selected, necessary pattern data are displayed
menu
t.,FRIABLE
}.tr.
qf'ENT
*E[LT Fg-E
X
Y 5A3 RADILF 5er s. $E56 l{-E. l.€ %a g7g 5@ KlJll.l
01@ N1@
DnTC
t*HE
5@ Tm-541 KIJIN
6
CIRCLET
A
SET
Z
DATA TO
UR. r'€,5@-585.
a
6 6
MTUL PCEITIO{ (RELCTII.,E)
x z
f.5. W=
@.w
Y
@.w
PRTTERN
@.m S
6T
MDI
: Pattern data title An optional character string
BOLT HOLE TOOL
is
settable within
12
l-s
settable within
10
characters.
: Variabl.e name An optional character string
....
characters. *BCLT HOLE CIRCLE* : Comnent statemelit A comment of an optional character string can be displayed up to 12 characters/line, and B lines. The machine tool bui,Lder should program t.he character strings of pattern data titler pattern name, and variable name by utilizing the custom macro A, and load them into the program memory as a subprogram of program number "9500 * pattern number" (O9501 - 09510). 1) I'lacro instruction to describe patlerrr data title
Pattern data title
ct cz t:
ts
"4 cLz'
" r' c2 "" Ilacro instructic.rn G65
H92 Y
q
r
Hq?pn
t6
te tto tr t 9n "t 'g Characters of nenu title (12 characters) qRr
t'
JjKk;
Specifies the uenrr title Assume a, @rlu a, be the codes of characters C, and Cr, I p = al 10" + ^z Assune .lU a be the codes of characiers C, and CO, ", O q = a^ x10-*aO J Assurne a anC a be the codes of characters C and C 6' 5 ? 6 5 r axI0-*a, .) D Assume a_ and a^ be the codes of characters C_ anci C^, 8' t 7 ^ B
-:-^ t - o7 xI0r+aU
r o and a ]n be the codes of character" Cg ,nd CI0, t.\
Assume
x 10" *.10
i-^
J*O
Assume
11
and a *;- L2be the
codes of characters C
and C 1r "^'- "12'
x l0'* a,^ LL For codes corresponding to these characters, refer to item 16.8.3. IN
-' -
^ dr
t
-
172
-
(Example) Assume that the pattern data title 1s ,,BOLT HOLE", and the maero instruction is given by; c6s Hez t99_q gp Q076 084 R032 072 r07s 076 J06e -f ! 032 , B o L L__,- H r o f i-_lL2) Macro instruction to describe varlable name
Variable
t,
name
t, t, au ,-, ag a, ',C2...- Cl0 'o t Variable
Cl'
a,.
o
name (10 characters)
Macro instruction
G65H93P n He3 n
Q
n
r r e : sp.lfri!" tllGri"rfGur"
t
i
j
J
K
Specifies the varlable number (n = 500 to 531) Assune al and a" be the codes of characters C, ^aL
and
c2'
codes
of characters C,
and
c4'
cod.es
of characters C,
and
c6'
codes
of characters C, and C'
9=arx10"*a, Assume a" and a, be the J?4
t="3x10"*aO Assume a. and a - be the )?6 t="5x10"*aU Assume a, and a. be the l^O
j=a7*IOJ+au
", "10."10 b" the eodes of characters cn "rd cl0, k="9x10-*"10 Assume that the variable name of variable No. 503 is ,,RA_Drusr,, the macro instruction is given by; p503 Assune
(Example)
c65 H93
(Note)
{l
Q082 065 R068 OZS rb8s 083
-R--T- -D-T
u
;
s
varlable names are designated by 32 co 'non varlables are not cleared by turning off power supply.
Macro instructlon to descrlbe a One comnent line
/1500
aro art Characters string of one
c6sH94_p_LQ q R r H94 : Specifies the couunenT p : Assume .lO a, be rhe ", p=alx10-*a,
T2
comment
Line (12 characters)
JjKk; codes of characters C, and C,,
q
Assume
a. and J^r1 q=a3xl0"*aO
a
, be the codes of characters C, and
CO,
r
Assume a_ and
a- be the codes of characters C, and
CU,
f
j k
).b r=.5x10'*aU
:
Assume
:
Assume
- lt53I which
comment
a,. ,, a, ,o a, a6 ,, aa an
CI, C2.... CIZ, Macro instructlon
., "lO a, be rhe codes of characters C, and CU, ,=^7x10-*a, : Assume g . " "lO ,0 b. the codes of character" C9 "rd Cl0, i="9x10r*"10
tr, ""X.r, 1=rlrxl0-*^12
and
bu the codes
-173-
of characters cll
"nd
cl2,
A comment can be displayed by 8 lines. The comment consists of the lst line to Sth line in the programmed sequence of G65H94 (Example) Assume that the corunent is "*BOLT HOLE", and the macro instruction is given bY; c65 H94 p042 066 Q079 076 R084 032 T072 079 J076 069 ; *BOLTL_]HOLE of the prerrious CRT Example macro 4) of custom o95Or;
Nl
c65 H92 P066 079 Q076 084 R032 072
ro79 076 J069 032:
N2 c65 H93 P500 Q084 079 R079 076; N3 c65 H93 P501 Q07s 073 R074 085 1078 032 J088 032: N4 c65 H93 P502 0075 073 R074 085 1078 032 J089 032; N5 c65 H93 P503 O0B2 065 R068 073 r085 083; N6 c65 H93 P504 Q083 046 R032 065 r07B 07 I J076 n?, . N7 G65 H93 P5 05 Q07 2 079 R076 069 r083 032 J07 8 079 K046 032; N8 G65 H94; N9 c65 H94 PO42 066 Q079 076 R084 032 IO72 079 J076 069; .. NlO G65 H94 R032 067 1073 AB2 J067 076 K069 042; Nll c65 H94 P083 069 Q084 032 R080 065 1084 084 J069 092 K078 032; N12 c65 H94 P068 06s Q084 065 R032 084 1079 032 J086 065 K082 n/,e. NI3 G65 H94 P078 079 Q046 0s3 R048 048 1045 053 J048 053 K046 0321' N14 I'199;
-
r74 -
VAR:
BOLT HOLE /1500 TOOL /1501 KIJUN X
#502 KIJUN
Y
#503 MNIUS #504
S.
ANGL
#505 HOLES Coroment
*BgLT
NO
instruction
H6LE
CIRCLE* SET PATTERN DATA NO VAR.
No. 500 -
505
16.4.3 Character.to-codes correspondence table
Character
Code
Character
Comment
065 066
7
C
067
8
D
068 069 070
IJ
E
F G
07r
H
072
I
057 032
t
033 034 035 036
Exclanation mark Quotation mark
037
Percent
038 039 040
Ampersand
1f
M
077
N P
078 079 080
o
+
081
K
082 083
,
T
084
T]
z
085 086 087 088 089 090 048 049 050
J a
o
w X Y Z
0
t
5
055 056
9
L
K
Conrmgnl
054
073 074 075 076
J
Code
) &
(
*
041
042 043 044 045
046 o47
058 059 060 061 062 ?
063
@
064
t
091
051
u
052 053
l
093 094 09s
-
175
-
092
Space
Sharp
Dollar
svmbol
ApostroDhe
Left parenthesis Right parenthesis Asterlsk PIus sign Comma
Minus sign Period Slash CoIon Semi-co1on
Left angle bracket Sign of equalitv Right angle bracket Question mark Commercial at mark left square bracket Yen syrnbol
Right square bracket
Underline
Subprograms employed in pattern data input function
Functlon
Subprogram No. o9500
Speclfies character string of pattern data menu display
o9s0 I
Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 1.
09502
Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to Dattern number 2.
o9503
Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 3.
o9504
Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 4.
o9505
Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 5.
o9506
Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 6.
o9507
Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to Dattern number 7.
o9508
Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to pattern number 8.
o9509
Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding pattern number 9.
o9510
Specifies character string of pattern data corresponding to Dattern number 10. Macro instruction employed in pattern data input function
G code
Function
H code
c65
H90
Specified menu title
c65
H91
Specifies pattern
G65
H92
Specifies pattern data title
c65
H93
Specifies variable
c65
H94
Specifies
name
name
comment
System variable employed in pattern data input function
Svstem variable
Meanlngs
"\.,1*.:
,,]:ts_i. :
#5900
Pattern number selected by user
r,.1,,. $i.l'
-
176
-
EO
17-
CUSTOM MACRO
B
Request:
Machine tools builders: You are requested to attach your custom macro program tape or program list to the CNC unit without fail. If it is necessary to replace part program storage memory due to a failure, FANUC servicemen or end user operators in charge of maintenance should know the contents of your custom macro for the purpose of repairing the trouble immediately.
A function covering a group of instructions is stored i.n memory.'the same as a subprogram. The stored function is represented by one instruction, so that only the representative instruction need be specified to execute the function. This group of registered instructions is ca1led a trcustom macro body" and the representative instruction is called a ttcustom macro instructionrr. The custom macro body rnay siurply be called a macro. And the custom macro instruction may be ca11ed a macro call command.
A group of instructions
for a certain function
Programmers need only remember representative macro instructions to remember all the instructions ln a custom macro body.
without having
The three most significant points on custom macros are that variables can be used in the custom macro body, operations can be performed on variables and actual values can be assigned to the variables ln custom macro instructions.
-
r77 -
)
(
G55P9011A101s: X=l I
Z = 4:
()
I I
I
l
l i
)/'
Calls custom macro body 9011 and defines variables =1 and
#4 10 and 5 respectively.
Variables ;1 and #4 can be used instead of the unknotsn traverse distance.
This enables the user to improve the CNC performance by themselves. Custom macro bodies may be cprovided by the machine tool builder, but they can be created by users, EOO.
Bolt hole circles as shown in the above figure can be rnade easily'. Once a custom macro body for the bolt hole circle is programned and registered, the CNC can operate as if it has the bolt hole circle cutting function. Programmers can use the bolt hole circle functj.on by using the following command only:
c65P Pr.R t A o B B r
r
Macro number Radius
k ; " of Em-hole circle
li
Start angle Angle between
k
Number
circles
of circles
-r78-
Address of the argument assignment I
Variable ln custom macro
body
#19 T
#20
U
#21
V
#22
In
1t
zJ
#24 I
#25
Z
#26
b) Argument assignment II ABCIJKIJ In addition to the fact that arguments can be addresses A, B, and C, a maximum of ten sets of arguments can be -ssigGE--in set for addresses I, J and K. When several numbers are assigned in the same address, they must be assigned in the determined sequence. Addresses not requj-red can be omitted. Addresses assigned jn argument assignment II and the number of the variable used in the macro corresDond as follows: Address of the argument assignment II
Variable in user macro lt L
B
1rL
1tJ
r1
Jt
tt5
Kt
#o
l^
tf/
I
,z
tt8
Kz
#9
T
#t0
T
tfll
{
K^
#12
T
lf L)
J
-4
-r80-
bodv
17.1
Macro Call Command (Custom Macro Command)
A macro can be called from a single block, or modally from each block in the call mode Note) A macro call command cannot be specified in the MDI rnode. 17 .1.1 Simple calls When the following command is executed, the custom macro body identified by P (program number) is ca11ed. G65 P(ptogr"* f(it.r.tio" ti*"")
asslgnment> can be specified. The argument menti-oned here is the actual numerical value assigned to a variable. (Note) G65 must be specified before arguments in the G65 block. The negative sign and the decimal point can be used regardless of addresses in
a) Argurnent assignment I
A-B-q
D
.
...
.z
An argument can be assigned for all addresses except G, L, N, 0, and P. Assignment need not be made in alphabetical order. Specification is made according to word address format. Addresses not required may be omitted. However, when I, J, and K are used, assignment must be made in the alphabetical order. pAn UdU. I K valid T B_A__q .....J ! . .. . . if -,.^-l trv4rlu .' 'l Addresses assigned in argument assignment I and the number of the variable in custom macro body correspond as follows: Address of the argument assignment I
Variable in qustom macro 4r
lt L
B 1tJ
L D
E
#8
F
tt9
H
#11
I lft
J
ltO
M
flJ
a
ttLT
R
//
-
r79 -
18
body
(Example) G65AI
.082.0r-3.014 .0D5.0Pi000;
;l?iT":-]-
It). )
n
{t3: ll4 z-3 i/5:
.
#6 tl7 :
)bt{
5.0
In this example, even if arguments I4.0 and D5.0 are specified to variable ll7 , rhe latter is effective. 17 .1.2 Modal call The macro call mode can be specified by executing the followlng command. G66P program number L repetitive count
G67 ;
(Note
rn a G66 block, G66 rnust be specified before any arguments. Decimal points and signs can be used in the arguments. G66 and G67 should rnake a pair in the same program.
1)
(Note 2)
During the macro call mode, the specified macro call instruction is called every tj-me a motion command is executed.. (Example l) Drilling Cyele At each positioning-point, the drilling cycle is operated. Auxiliary function
X move
Flow of program
ll ll 1l 1l
ll lr
li ll
Ir
U
U
Dwell
uoo P9082R(R X
,
M
)
point)X(Z point)X(Dwell); The drilling
cycle is performed at each the motion block in this region.
I
G67 ;
Macro is o 9082 t
as follows.
GOO Z
//tB;
GOI
Z
GO4
X
#26; #24:
GOO
Z- lROUND
Mqq.
Dwell
[/ilBl
(In case of incremental programming)
+ ROUND
ttt26));
-
182
-
end
of
Address
of the
argument assignment
II
Variable in user macro
body
ttr4
t4
It
1f
Jl1 / #1r)
T
{ttt
J.
5
#18
T.
#L9
I
ll2A
b o
K.
JI. lILL
Tl
1I
Jl
tt L)
K.t
tt24
I^at
ll2s
J^
It26
o
1
Jlaa LL
o 6
I^9
#28
J9
#29
K^
#30
rto
)l. 'IJI
Jto
ttJZ
Kto
#33
1
1
Suffixes I to l0 of I, J and K indicate the sequence of the assigned set. Coexistence of argument assignment I and II No alarm is generated even if arguments of both assignment I and II are specified in the same block with a G65 command. If an argument of type I and an argument of type II are specified to the same variable, the argument specified later is effective.
-181 -
'17.1.5 Subprogram call with M code
An M code can be set by a parameter to call a subprogram.
NGXY
That is, instead of
M98PAAAA;
tE;E-r ow i n g s i*pTJ-c o*tnf,T-tcan be specified. N G X .... Y ,*^-1^.,^'1 ^^ As f or ltg8, tt* 'i""Effiiort *^ro urDproJeq vrr the M codes are not transmit.ted. 1
program check screen, but I"IF and
The correspondence between the calling M code xx and the program number AAAA of the ealled subprogram must be set as a parameter. Up to three 11 codes can be used for a subprogram call. hrhen these M codes are specif ied in a macro called wit.h a G code or in a subprogram called with an M code or a T code, the subprogram is not ca1led, but these M codes are treated as ordinary M codes. Set the following parameters.
FI
M code used to call subprogram: 9001
i."f
M code used to call subprogras:1" 9002
F-t
M code used
to ."ff subprogram:
9003
17.1.6 Subprogram call with T code
A T code can be set by a parameter to call a subprogram.
N
G
,rffi--
X
Z
" .....T
t; is equivalent to the foltowing two blocks.
N G X Z M98P9OOO; r-coae t ir ETea-lT .n argument in comnon variable 1ll4g. The T code is displayed on the program check screen, but TF and T codes are not. transmitted. When this T code is specified in a macro called with a G code, or in a subprogram called with an M or T code the subprogram is not called; buE this T code is treated as ordinary T code. Set. the following parameter. 0
0
When parameter code.
0
No. 0040,
TMCR
TLICR
= 1, a subprogram is called in a block with a
17.1.7 Difference between M98 (subprogram call) and G65 (custom macro body a) G65 can include arguments; I,198 cannot.
T
calt)
b) ItgA is used to branch to a subprogram after executing a command other than M, P or L in the block; G65 is used to branch only. c) When a I'198 b'lock includes an address other than O, N, P and L, execution of the block stops as single block stop, a G65 block does not. d) COS changes the level of local variable; M98 does nor. That. is, /ll specified before G65 is one thing and /lI in the calling cusrom macro body is another. iil specified before M98 is the same as /i I in the calling subprogram. e). Up to four G65 calls, includ.ing G66, can be made in addition, M9B cal1s can be made up to eight calls rogether with calls by G65 and G66.
-
r84 -
!,.,':j
?r.
17.1.3 Macro call using G codes
A G code can be set by a parameter to call specifying N_G65PAAAA
t
macro. That is, instead of the following simple command
Gxx
Data No. G code used to call macro: 9010 G code used to call macro: 90il
G code used to call macro: 9019 17.1.4 Custom rnacro call with M code
Macro can be ca11ed with an M code set by a parameter, namely, the following a
command:
N G65 PAAAA
M code
to call macro:
9020
!1 code
to call macro:
9021
l{ code to call macro:
9029
(Note) These
ln{ codes are different from usual M codes and theY must be commanded at the star t of a block (just after the sequence No., if there is).
- lB3 -
Macro (Level I )
Main program
Macro
(Level 2)
Macro (Level 3)
o--
o
G65P
G65P
G65P
-
-
G65P
-
M99
Local rariable (Level 0)
(Leve1 1)
Macro (Level 4)
-
M99
(Level 2)
(Level 4)
l) The main program is provided with ill to /133 local variables (leve1 0). 2) When the macro (leve1 1) is called with G65, etc., the local variable (level 0) of the main program is stored, and llI to #33 local variables (level 1) for lihe macro (1evel l) are prepared. Argument transfer is possible for this purpose. (This also applies to (3) below). 3) The loca1 variables (level I, 2,3) are stored each time the macros (leve1 2,3,4) are ca11ed, and new local variables (level 2,3,4) are prepared. 4) When the operation returns from each macro with M99, the local varlables (1evel 0, l, 2,3) stored in (2) and (3) are set in the same conditions as when they were stored. 17.2 Creation of Custom Macro Bodv 17.2.'l
Custom macro tiody format
The format of a custom macro body is the same as that of a subprogram as
shown
belorv.
0
(Prograrn Number); Commands
(Variables, arithmecic operation and control '' instruction can be sPsLrr
rcu.
,l
Mqq. LL,2
,
Program numbers are determined as follows: 1) Or - 08999 for programs that can be freely registered, cancelled and
2) 09020
edited.
-.09899
for programs that cannot be registered, cancelled or edited without setting a parameter
-iB6-
n'i!k;i
.8 Multiplex calls l) Multiplex ca11s Similarly to a subprogram ca11ed from another subprogram, a macro can be called from another macro The multiplicity should be less than or equal to four including simple and modal calls. 2) Multiplex modal calls In modal calls, the specified macro is called each time a motion command is executed. When several modal macros are specified, the next macro is ca1led each time a motion command in the first macro is executed. Macros are successively called from those assigned later. 17.1
(Example 1) G66 P9i00;
z 10000; (1-r) G66 P9200; z i5000 t (L-2)
G67; G67;
:
z-zsooo; (l-3)
o
:
P9200 cancelled P9100 cancelled
9100;
X 5000; (2-L) Mao.
0
9200;
z 6000; (3-i) z 7000; (3-2)
MAO.
Sequence of execution (A block vrithout a motion command is omitted in
this chart. (1
(Note )
-
1)
) ft -?\
A rnodal macro is not called after (l-3), mode.
which is not in macro call
3) Custom macro level and local variable l^lhen a macro is called with G65, G66, or a G code which calls a macro, the level of t.he macro increases by one. As a result, the 1evel of the local variable also increases by one. Namely, t.he relationship between the macro call and loeal variable is as follows.
-185-
3) Undefined variables The value of a variable whi,ch has not yet been defined is called
When
//l = 0
When
c90x1002/l l
c90x1002/l l
I
I
c90x100
G90X10020
b) Operation
#l =
When/il=0 tl2=lll
ll2=#r I
I
/12=
It2=0
ll2=lllx5
ll2=lll*'5
*zlo
I 112=0
ll2={lI+lll
llZ=lll+ttt
I
I
It2=0
1t2=0
c) Conditional expressions
/il =
ill
NE.
When
ill = 0
#1 EQ
EQ #0 I
/10
I
Established
Not established
#lNEO
#lNEO
I
I
Established
Not established
#i cE /i0
#l
i
cE
#0
I
Established
Established
/ll cr 0
ill
i
Not established
0
I
Not established
d) Display and setting variable values Variable values can be displayed on the also be set in the MDT mode.
-lB8-
cT
CRT screen.
Variable values
can
gariables can be used j.n a custom macro body. Also arithmetic instructions control instructions are commandable. Actual values for variables are specified with a macro call command.
and
17.2.2 Variables
Variables can be used in the macro instead of numerical data. The user can assign any value (within the allowed range) to them. Using variables allow custom macros to become much more flexible than the conventional sub-routines. Several variables can be used, and each variable is identified by a variable number.
1) Varlable expressions A
variable is composed of the code /i and a //l(i=L,2,3 ,4.....)
number as shown belovi.
(Example I ) lt5 tf
Lo9
#1005
The following format can also be used where numbers are replaced bv
il [
2) # t#1001
#[#1001-ll # ltt6l 2l
Variable lli explained hereafter can always be replaced with variable
ll
[
Quotation variables The numerical value following an address can be replaced with a variable. i/i or -ili indicates that the value of the variable or its complement is substituted for the command value of the address.
3) F#33 If /133 = 1.5, ir is rhe same as FI.5. Z-ltl8 If i/18 = 20.0, ir is rhe same as 2-20.0. c#130 If //130 = 3.0, ir is rhe same as G3. a) using a variable with addresses/,:, o and N is prohibited, (i.e.,:1127 or N/f I cannot be used). The value of n(n =l to 9) in an optional block skip/n cannot be used as a (Exarnple
variable. A variable number cannot be replaced by a variable. when 5 in tls is replaced with #30, it does nor become llll3O but ii t#301. The value of a variable cannot exceed the maximum set for each address. For example, when #140 = 120, M// 140 exceeds the maximum (an l"t code must be less than 99). d) When a variable is used for address data, its value is rounded to the significant digit. e) By using
h\
(Example
4) xI li24+ltl8*c0s t/lr 1 z-l
1
#18+1t261
-187-
List'of Variable #1000
-
#1015, llro32
System Variables
Variable
number Dr
/lli00 - llllt5, lltr32, #1133
D0
number
#5041
-
#506I
- {i5064 Skip signal position
115044 Work coordinates
#2000 - 112200 Tool compensation value
/l50Bl - #5083 TooL compensation
#3000
#510i - #5I04 Servo deviation
Llacro alarm
1f2500
l/3001
, lf3}02
#3003
, 113004 Cycle operation control
#3005 //301
Clock
Setting
it2600
-
(Y axis)
112606 Work
offset
value
Work
offset value
112806 Work
offset value
lf27O0
- #2706
#2800
-
(Z axis)
1 - #3AL2 Clocktnf ormation
#3901
- 112506 Work of f set value
(X axis)
(4th axis)
- #3902 Number of parts
/1400f - #4L20 I1odal information
il500l - /15004 Block end position lf5A2l - t|5024 Machine coordinates
a) Inrerface signals /1f000 ro /ll0f5 and tlL032, /i1100 ro /lir55 and llLl32, /ill33 T--..+ IrrPuL
^-i ^'.^1 -rStrdr
The status of the interface input q'i on: I i q dof orm'i values of the system variables /I1000 to /f I0l5 , li1032.
-
190
-
narl
hrr
rorrl
i no
the
.;.i,..:4,
17.2.3
TYPes of variables
Variables are classified into local variables, conmon variables and system variables, depending on the variable number. Usage and properties are different for each EyPe of variable l) Local variable lll to il33 The local variable is a variable local1y used in the macro. That is, a local variable /li used in the macro and called at one point in time, is different from iii used in the macro (whether it is t.he same macro or not) ca11ed at another point in time. Accordingly, when macro B is called from macro A, as in a multiplex call, a local variable used in macro A is not destroyed by beins rrsed in macro B. A local variable is used for an argument transfer. For inforfnation on the correspondence to the argument address. A local variabie without a transferred argument i-s vacant in its initial status and'can be used freely. 2)
variable #100 - #L99, /1500 - //53i Just as a local variable is used locally in the macro, a comnon variable is in common use throughout the main program, throughout each subprograrn called from the main program, and throughout each macro. That is, llL used in a certain macro is the same as /ii used in another macro. Accordingly, the calculated value of a conmon variable lti in a certain macro can be used in Common
another macro. The use of common variables is not specially determi-ned in the system. can be used freely. 3) System variables Use of a system variable is fixed in the system.
-rB9-
They
Output signal
Interface output signals can be issued by assigning values to variables #1100 to /11115, Itrr32, #1133. variable
System
I
#1101
1
tf
2\ 2;
2; 26 2; 2; 2; 2in 2;; 2;; 4
i
llrr04
r05 #1i06 #rr07 #IIO8 #i109
I I
#1110
I
#i111
1
#1
I
I
I I
IIt2
1
#1113
I
#rl I4 #1ir5
System
,0, 2;
I I
ILo2
#r r03
tf
Interface output signal
Point
#1r00
2;; 2:: 2::
t
z')
II
variable Point r6
u00
I I JJ
32
u100
Value of variable
uoooo uo00r uo002 uo003 u0004 U0005
rj0006 u0007 u0008
u0009 uoOr0 u001 r uoor2
uool3 uoot4 uoor5
Interface output signal
lt1 i'1.') 'T
system
-
uols
- uol3l
Output signal
i
Contact closed Contact open
(HIGH)
(LOW)
t6 and 32 points output signals can be issued at one time by assigning value to the system variable /llt32 and #1 133, tq /1111?
= j tI
#f " L"ll0o+il
xZL
l-v-n an JU -
r^a * Vi) - 2-' * VrrrrJJ = L tz JI r-w Jlrraa
When When
UO[100+il
is Low,
Vi=0
UOIi00+i] is High, Vi=l
-r92-
a
System varj-able
Po
I I I
# 1000
//r00r #1002 #1003 #1004 #1005 // r
I
I I
)" -q
i
I
#10i4
I I I I
i/1015
I
l0r3
variable t032
ong
^ )Lv -t
Ur009
)rz? -t
rTTnr?
ITTor o
2:: uroll 1
2:: 2r, 2^' laJ
Point
urOi3 UrO14
ur015
Interface input signal UIO
lo
Value of variable
a:
ur001 ur002 ur003 ur004 ur00s ur006 ur007 rTT
2:
i
#r0r0 #i0l I tf t0L2
#
2; 2; 2;, 2; 2; 2; 2;
I
006
System
'1
i
#1007 #1008 #1009
#
Interface input signal o rTr nnn ?
inL
-
UI15
Input signal I
I
Contact closed
n
ConEac! open
(HIGH)
(LOW)
Since the variable value read is 1.0 or 0.0 regardless of the unit system, t.he unit system must be considered in preparing a macro. The readlng system variable 1t'1032 is used to read 16 points lnput signals at one time.
15
: li
1032 = I
/l
j [1000+i] *2'
t-u 'j.
i; a!
System
variables i/1000 to /lt0t5, llL032 cannor be used as a lefr side
i-n a calculation
command.
i; d
F q.
E
G
F
-
&
191
-
rerm
b) Tool offset amounr ll2o00 to ll22o0 The tool offset amount can be determined by reading the value of the system variable ll200l to ll22o0. The offset values can also be modified by assigning a value to the system variable //1. System variable numbers for tool offset amounr memory c and compensation numbers are uo to 200)
(rn case of
Offset
number
Variable
i
lt2001 {t2002
2
1f
199
200
20.03
2199 {t2200
tf
(Note) The value of variable number /i2000 is only used to read the value. value is alwavs 0. c)
The
System variables for work zero point offset values tt2500 - 112906 By reading the values of system variables ll25OO - ll29O6, work zero point offset values are determined. By assigning va,lues to these variables, work zero point offset values can
be chansed. Axis
Work zero point offset value
X
External work compensation G54 (Work coordinate system l)
#25.0r
G59 (Work coordinare sysrem 6)
112506
External work compensat.ion G54 (Work coordinate system l)
#2600
G59 (Work coordinare system 6)
*zZoo
External work compensation G54 (Work coordinate system l)
#27 00
G59 (Work coordinare system 6)
lf 27
Y
4rh
External work compensation G54 (Work coordinare system
variable
lt2500
ti260l
lt2t 0I 06
ll2800 1)
G59 (Work coordinare sysrem 6)
-194-
System
#280
I
{t2806
No.
-;r;ts;:#
The last values of the system variable #1100 to #Ill5, ltLl32 and #if33 issued are stored as 1.0 or 0.0. (llote) When a value other than I.0 or 0.0 is assigned to //1100 ro //1115,
Used
2r3
for
e2E 21 26 2s 24
2ro
Stgn
23 22
10r
102
2L
100
other purposes
Structure -of
DO 2E
Not used
27
26
Used
2"
24
for
23
2'
22
20
Address
other putpose
Macro call cornnand c65P9100D (address); The custom macro body
is specified as follor.rs:
09 IOO;
llll32=lll132 AND 496 oRllT t c65P9101T60; /i 100=BIN llt1032 AND 4095l , rF[/l10r2EQ 0] coro9r00; /l r00=-il r00;
Address feed out Timer macro Reading in of 3-digit BCD data Sign a
N9 100M99;
2) Read eight types of signed 6-digit BCD data (three digits to the left of the decimal point and. three digits t.o the right of the decimal point) by address switching in #101. Machine tool composition When D0 2 = O, three digits to the right of the decimal point ? - l. r I three digits to the left of the decimal point When DO 2- to 2- = 000, data No.l 001, data No.2 11
Macro call
t
, data tlo. 8
command
c65P9l0lD (data number) ; The custom macro body is specified as follows: 09101 ;
c65P9l00D I lt7*2+I) i /f
l0l=/l100;
x2] ; L)r=lf r0 l+/r r00/ l 000 ;
c6 5P 9 l00D I lt7 #
1199;
-193-
Drill cycle (For incremental (Equivalent to G8l)
(Example 3)
llacro call
programming)
command
c65 P9081 L (Repetition time) R (R point) W (Z-point); The custom macro body is specified as follows: 0908 r ;
#3003=l; c00w /llB; G0lI^I i/23
;
c00w-[RouND[#r8] + ROUND /t3003=0;
The single block stoP is not executed. #18 corresponds to R and ll23 corresponds to W.
llt23)l;
Mqq.
(Note) The state of //3003 is cleared by resetting. g) Feed hold, feed rate override, and exact stop check suppression specified in /13004 hllaen the following values are assigned to the system variable /l 3004, feed hold and feed rate override are suppressed for subsequent blockq and the exact stop check is not performed. Pressing the feed hold button during execution of a block for which feed hold has been suppressed: /a\ Executes feed hold at the start of the first block outside the A-) suppression range (when the button is kept pushed). Lights the feed hold lamp, and does not execute feed hold at t.his (, point, but at the end of the first block outside the suppression range, (when the button is pushed and released). #
3004 U
! eed nolcl
Feed rate override
0
1
2
Exact stop check
o
0
0
0
0
0 0
3
4
0
0 0
6
X
o
X
l 0:
F'f f o n t i rra L:Yv'
V.
Suppressed
(Note) The state of {i3004 is cleared by resetting.
-196-
.iil
d) Alarm #3000 hlhen detecting an error in the macro, an alarm can be generated. When an alarm number is specified in the system variabte /i3000, the alarm lamp is turned on and the alarm status is entered after the proceeding block is processed. /l 3000=n (ALARI
MES
SAGE) ;
(05n<99), an alarm No.=500+n An alarm message of less than 26 characters can be specified in the section between control-out and control-in. e) Clock #300I , 1t3002 The clock time can be determined by reading the values of the system variables #3001 , 113002. The time can be preset by assignirfg a value to
the system variable.
Kind
System
variable Unit time
At the time of
Counting
Power-on
Clock
I
/i
3001
I
msec
Reset to
Clock
2
lf
3002
I
hour
Same
Always
0
as at the time of power-off.
The accuracy of each clock is within 16 msec. Clock
While STL signalis on. 1
overflows at 65536
msec.
(Example 2) Timer I'licro call command G65P9l0l T (Awaiting time) msec; This macro may be specified as follows:
09I01; /f 3001 = 0; wHrLE[#300r LE ll2OlD0l;
: :
Initial setting Wait for the prescribed. length of time
ENDI; MOO. LLJ
+l
/
,
The suppression of the single block stop and the wait for the auxiliary function end signal. lrrhen the following values are assigned to the system variable #3003, the single block st.op function is suppressed and execution advances from one
block to the next without awaiting the end signal (FIN) of auxiliary functions (S, T, 1"1 and B). When the end signal is not awaited, the distribuEion end signal (DEN) is not transmitted. Be careful not to specify a subsequent auxiliary function without awaiting the end signal. #3003
Single block stop
Auxiliary function end signal
Not suppressed
Awaited
I
Suppressed
Av/aited
2
Not suppressed
Not awaited
3
Suppres
Not awaited
s
ed
-i95-
"
?'.:
{I 'd
.{ 1l
I { j
: Sv
stern variab #400
Modal information of preceding block
le
a
G code (group 0l)
I
114022
G code (group 22)
{t4L02
B code F code H code
#4 109
#4i11 lt4Lt3 ll4LL4 tt4LI5 tf lt
i
:
M code Sequence number Program number
4It9
S
T
4t20
code
code
f) Positional information /15001 to ii5106 Positional information can be determined by reading the system variables #500i to #5016. The unit of posit.ional inf ormation is inxn or inches depending on the input system. System variables 1i5001 to /15106 cannot be used as the left-hand-side term of an arithmet.ic command. System variable #500
i
{t5002 #5003 #5004 lf
502r
#5022 {t5023 #5024 1i5025
it5026
Its04r 5042 5043 i|5044 {t5045 t!5046
tf lf
#506
I
lf 5Ub. Z
#506 3
{t5064
r
Reading in
Positional information
during movement
X axis block end coordinate Y axis block end coordinate Z axis block end coordinate 4th axis block end coordinate
(ABSI0) (ABSI0) (ABSI0) (ABSI0)
X axis present coordinate Y axis present coordinate Z axis present coordinate 4th axis present coordinate 5th axis present coordinate 6th axis present coordinate
(ABSMT) (ABSMT) (ABSMT) (ABSI'{T)
X axis present coordinate Y axis present coordinate Z axis present coordinate 4th axis present coordinate 5th axis present coordinate 6th axis present coordinate
(ABS0T)
X axis skip signal position Y axis skip signal position Z axis skip signal position
(ABSKP) (ABSKP)
4th axis skip signal position
-
r98 -
Possib
le
Impossib 1e
(PI"IC)
(PMC)
(ABS0T) (ABS0T) (PMC) (PMC) (PMC)
(ABSKP)
(ABSKP)
Impo s sib 1e
Possib
le
ii.
h) Variable corresponding ro the serring #3005 By substitution of system variable /13005 by a value, the setting data can be set.
07 SEQ
06
05
15
03 ISO
INCH
ABS
REVX REVY TVON ISO INCI{ ABS SEQ
04
X axis mirror Y axis mirror
02 TVON
0l
00
REVY
REVY
image image
TV check Changeover of code system ISO/EIA Changeover of input unit system inch input/uun input Changeover of absolute/incremental command Automatic insertion of sequence No.
L4
13
12
lr
10
09
IAPEF
REV4
08
REV4 4th axis mirror image TAPEF t0/11 /L2 Tape format conversion al
Clock information ii3011, /13012 It is possible to know the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second by reading system variables il30i1, ll30l2. System variables
Kind
Year, Month,
#30rr
Day
Hour, Minute,
ll3roz
Second
(Exanple) When it is May 20, 1987 4:17 5" PM 1t3}l2 = 19870520, #30I2 = I6L105
of parts, //3901 , 113902 It. is possible to know the count value by reading the
J) Number
//390r and //3902.
system variables
Also it is possible to change the count value of parts by substituting the system variables. Svstem variables
Kind
l
Number
of machined Darts
#390
Number
of necessary parts
{t3902
(Note 1) Do not substitute a negative value.
F
*
k) Modal inf orrnation i14001 ro 114120 Modal commands specified up to the preceding block can be determined by reading t.he values of the system variables #400f to ltl+I20. The unit specified is effective.
-t97-
(Exaurple 4)
The tool moves to a point appropriate to the machine tool (xp, yp, zp distant from a reference point) through a programmed intermediate point; and after processing a sequence of operations, returns to the original point. Macro call command G65 P9300 X(Intermediate point)Y(Intermediate point)Z (Intermediate point) ; The custom macro body is specified as follows: 09300;
ill=//5001; ttZ=tt5002:' //3=/i 5003; G00 z1126; xll24 \1125; G04; (Move is interrupted to read ll502l G9 I x Ixp-//502i lY Iyp-i|5022]zlzp-115023)
I
i
to
/i5023)
z
./ :
,ntocessr.ng/
x#24 Yltzs zlt26; x#L \lt2z uil
"
!t2.. J,
Mqq. ... . ,
17.2.4 Arithmetic
commands
A variety of arithmetic operations can be performed on variables. An arithmetic command must be specified the same as in general arithrnetic expressions. /li=
j
2) Addition arithmetic ili=il j+#k lli=#i-#k Iti=lll OR /lk lli=llj XOR /ik 3) Multiplication arithmetic llj-=ll
jxtlk
ll.l=lfi llfk
tti=lti AND #k 4) Functions i=srN #i=cos
li
[/ij
j /i i=TAN Iil j [ /l
ili=Rreni#j l/ t#kl i/i=sQRr[/lj] /li=ABS [//j /li=BrN
[#
j
/li=Rcnfrli
//i=RouND I /lj I
/li=FIX
[ /l
jI
#i=FUP
[,/l
I
j
Definj-tion, subst.itution Sum
Subrracrion
surn (ar every bir of 32 bits) Exclusive 0R (ar every bir of 32 birs)
Logical
Product Quotient
Logical producr (at every bir of 32 bits) Sine (degree unit) Cosine (degree unit) Tangent (degree unit) Arct.angent (degree unit) Square root Absolute value Conversion from BCD to BIN Conversion from BIN to BCD Rounding off
Discard fractions less than I Add i for fractions less than
-200-
,$,iffi#
System
variable
#508 r
{t5082 #5083
#5I01 ll5LOz #5103 #5104
Abbreviation Meaning
Coordinate -J
D
LEU
Reading in
Positional inf ormation
during
movement
lst axis Tool offset value 2nd axis Tool offset value 3rd axis tool offset value
Impos
X axis servo position deviation Y axis servo position deviation Z axis servo position deviation 4th axis servo position deviation
Irnpossib 1e
ABSIO
ABSl'17
ABSOT
sib le
ABSKP
End point
Command
Couunand
coordinate of the preceding block
present coordinate
Position
PresenE
where skip
coordinate
signal has turned on in the G3l block
Work coordinate system
Machine
tlork coordinate
Work
coordinate sysEem
sysEem
sysEem
coordinate
Tool offset
Not considered
Considered
Considered
Considered
Tool length
Tool top position
Tool standard point
Tool standard point
Tool standard point
of f set
Cutter comPen-
sation (Note 1) The tool length offset amount is not the amount. in effect just before the block is executed; it is the amount for the current block. (Note 2) The block end point (ABSI0) of the skip (c31) is the position where the skip signal has turned on or the end point of the block if the skip signal has not turned on.
-199-
t) Prgcision
Always consider the precision of a custom macro function used for Preparation
of programs. a) Data format Numeric data handled by a custom macro is in a floating decimal point format as follows: F. " 1"1* 2 where M: l-bit sign + 31-bit binary data E: l-bit sign + 7-bit binary data b) Operational precision An operation executed once generates the following error. These errors are accumulat.ed with each repeated oDeration. Average error
Operation format a =
I.))
b^"c
. X IU^-10
q.oo x ru -10
a = b/c ^-./vd-fu
i.24 x l0-q-
a=b*c a=b-c
2.
X
^ l0
,IU-
Maximum
error
X
rU -10
1+.OO
1.86 x l0-g-
5.32 x I0-I0
5.0 x 10-q-
I.U X IU -R
a=
1.8 x 10-6-
3.6xI0" -6
b/c
(note) Function
TAN
Relative error e
a
3.73 x l0-q-
a=SINb b=COSb ATAN
Type of error
mln.
(;,:)
Absolute error
e
degrees
perforrns SIN/COS.
precision a) Addition and subtraction Note that when absolute values are used subtractively iloaddition or subtraction, the relative error cannot be held under l0 ". For example, suppose that the real values of /iI and JlZ are as follows. ttr = 98765432L0123.456 ll2 = 9876543211711 .777 Performing operation ll2 - /ll does not produce
8) Notes on decreased
tlz-lll=67654.321,'
since the custom macro has a precision of only eight decimal digits, the values of /fl and ll2 have a precision as lcw as approximately tir = 987 6543200000.000 liT respectively. (The internal values differ =.9876543300000.000, somewhat from the above values because they are binary numbers.) Consequently,
ll2 - lll = 100000.000 which generates a large error.
-202-
to use function ROUND 1) If function ROUND is employed in an arithmetic operation command or in an IF or WHILE conditional expression, the figure in function ROUND is rounded off (counting fractions of 5 and over as a unit and disrdgarding the rest) as is ordinary data with a decimal point.
How
(
Example)
i/r=RouNDlr.2345l; /ll becornes 1.0. rF[#1 LE ROUNDlllZll G0r0 l0;
ROUND [//2 ] is 4. 0 it ltz is 3 . 567 . 2) If function ROUND is employed in a command to an address, it is rounded off to the least input increment of the address. l
F
Ytmn
f
c0lx IRouNl [//r I I ; If /ll is 1.4567 and the least input increment of X is 0.001, this block becomes c01 Xl.45L. In this example, the conmand is the same as GOI X /l1; command. Function ROUND in an address command is used rnainly in the following
case. (Exarnple)
Program to move incrementally by /11 and ll2 oni-y and then return to
the starting point Nt //1 = I.2345i N2 tlz = 2.3456; N3 c01 X ill F100; : X moves 1.235. N4X//2; : Xmoves2.346.
N5 X -lll].+ll2l; : X moves -3.58, since #l + llL is 3.5g01. Since I.235 + 2.346 = 3.581, the progr.oo d6e" not return to thE-starting point by N5. Assume N5 X- IROUND Iii I ] + ROUND tll2ll ; It becomes egual to N5 X-[1.235+2.346]; and the program returns ro rhe starting point.
I 5) Combination of arithmetic operations The above arithmetic operations and functions can be combined. The order of priority in an arithmetic operation is function, multiplication arithmetic then addition arithmetic. /ii=//j+/lk*srN llltl \[xampre L ) fF
__-4\_ \:-/
_rt\_ \7
Sequence of
,4\ _-_-\1/--
arithmetic operations
6) Uoaifi,cation of arithmetic sequence using A portion to be assigned priority in an ari-thmetic sequence can be enclosed
in t l.
t I can be nested up to five times (including t ] used j-n functions). (Example 2) //i=sru t t tiij+litl*//!,+//rnl*/lnl (Three f o1d nesting)
(r) {?)
/^
\J/ v
\
Sequence of arthimetic operation
- 201 -
(Lxampre l) tn
ttI20=I; NI WHILE #T2O LE N2 WHrLE //30
IO
EQI
DO 1;
Repeated ten times
DO2;
Repeated while variab le //30= I
N3END 2;
llL20=ltl20+l N4END
(Note
1)
Notes on OO
I;
REPEAT ptograrnming.
r,ru"a be specified before
END m.
END 1; (No)
nn l. D0 m and END m must correspond to each other in one program.
DO
(No)
DO
END
I;
DO
F\TN
1.
(No)
END 1;
-204-
b) Logical operation EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE and LE are basically the same as addition and subtraction. Therefore, be careful of errors. To determine whether or ' not //l and ll2 are equal in the above, for example, rF ltr EQ ll2 is not always evaluated correctly. When the error is evaluated as in IF ABS IIL _ II2 LT 5OOOO and the difference between /i I and tl2 f.a1-1s within the range error, both values must be considered equal. c) Trigonometric functions Absolute_Frrors occur in trigonometric functions; but, since they are not under l0 " be careful of integration or division after using'a trigonometric function. 17.2.5 Control commands
The program flow can be controlled by using the following commands.
1) D;{ergence (G0T0) tiJ IF [
1ock.
IF [
#j EQ#k #j NE iik #i cr /lk #j LT /ik /li cE i/k #j LE ltk
=
5
t
forward direction. 2) IteraEion WHILE l
m
While
-203-
DO
ranges cannot be intersected. :
j
no l.
DO ?. -- -,
.
(No)
FNtn I!t .
F\]n LL| v
t
.
L ,
A branch can be made from inside to outside a
nn t. .f
coTn qnnn. 'vvv,
. F\tn
(yes) 1 rt
.
N9000.....;
-206-
D0
range.
(?)
The
same
iden
c
if ica t ion number can
be
used many times.
no r.
tr'I\in r
.
(Yoe\
no r.
[i\u I;
DO
statement can
nn r.
nn ?.
Dn ?. \ tcD/
END 3;
,c,t\U I;
trNn r.
be
nested up to three times.
Custom macro bodies or subprograms can be range. D0 statements can be nested up to custom macro body or in the subprogram.
arar t
.
c65. . .
(Yes)
G66.....;
(Yes)
G67.....;
(Yes)
FNIN !L!U
called from inside a D0 three times more in the
1 I .
t
nn t.
MOa rrlv.....
t
(Yes)
END 1;
17.2.6 Macro and CNC statements
The following blocks are called macro statement.s.
i) Operation command (block including=) ii) Control command (block including G0T0, DO or END) iii) Macro call'command (block including G65, G66, G67 or G codes calling macro) The following blocks have the same features as the macro statements: i) A subprogram call block (a block including subprogram call comrnand by M98, M, or T code) which does not include any conmand address oEher than O, N, P and L.. ii) g block which includes !'199 but does not include anv command address other than 0, N, p and L.
-208-
A branch cannot be made from outside to insj_de a D0 range.
GOTO 9000;
D0
1;
(No)
N9000.....;
FI\IN
1.
nn 1.
N9000.....; (No) END
I;
GOTO
9000;
207
-
(Example 3) N lXl 000; N2i/ t0= 100; N3Y I 000; N4/11 100= 1 ;
N5/i l=
l0;
N6X- 1000;
Block currently executed
I'tacro statement
Firs t
alreadv executed
statement I'lacro statement executed Iulacro statement executed Second CNC statement CNC
Execution of macro stalement
Execution of CNC statemcnt
When the second CNC statement after the block currently executed is the no-movement b1ock, macro statements up to that and next to the second cNC statement (i.e. the no-movement block) aft.er the block currentlv executed are executed. (Exarnple 4) N lXi 000; Bfock currently executed N2//10=100; Macro statement already executed N3Y 1000;
N4/iIr00=1;
N5//l=I0; N6Z IOOO;
NTilli0l=1; u8il2=20; N9X-i000; Execution of macro statement
First CNC statement Macro statement executed Macro st.atement executed Second CNC sEatement (no-movement block) Macro statement executed Macro statement executed Third CNC statement
N4
N5
Execution of CNC statemenr
(b) When the firsr- CNC statement after the block currently executed no-movement block, the macro stat.emenE is not executed. (Example 5) N lY 1000; Block currently executed
N2ilI100=l;
ll3/i l= i0; N421000;
N5/l1l0l=l; N6i/2=20; N7X-1000;
Ilacro statement already executed Ilacro statement already executed First CNC statement (no-movement block) Macro statement execuEed l'lacro statement executed Second CNC staternent
Exccution of CNC sratenrcnt
-210-
is the
Blocks other than macro statements are sometimes referred Eo as CNC statements. The nacro stat.ement differs from the CNC statement, in the following points: i) In the normal single block mode, the single block stop does not occur. (See item (3), Chapter 8) ii) The macro sEatement. is not regarded as the no movement block in the cutter
iii)
compensation c. The time of execution differs. iii) j-s described below in further detaj-l. a) The macro statement existing next to the block which does not buffer the next one (b1ock of non-buffering M code, or G3l block) is executed after that block is executed. (Example l) NlXt000M00; Block currently execut.ed N2i/1100=l; Macro statement Execution
of macro statement
Execution of CNC statement
b) llacro statement existing next to the block buffering the next one. i) When not in cutter compensation C mode When the current. block starts to be executed, the nexE nacro statement is imnediately executed. The macro statement up to the next CNC statement is executed. (Exarnple 2)
N1G0 1X1000;
N2/il i00=1; N3i/ l= l0; N4X2000;
Block currently executed Macro statement executed Macro stat.ement executed Next
CNC
statement
.
Execution of macro statement
Execution of CNC statement
ii)
When
(a)
in cutter compensation
C mode
the first CNC statement next to the block currently execut.ed is noc the no-movement block (block containing no movement command in the cutter compensation plan). When
rT) \j.,/ When t,he second CNC sEatement i-s
not the no-movement block. CNC statement. next to the block
The macro statement, after the first currently executed, is executed.
-209-
A block including a macro call command (G65, G66, G67), arithmetic command and control command is not stopped even by single block operation. The following parameter setting executes a single block stop for commands other than macro call commands. This function is used for testins a custom *^^-^ ulo!!v
L^l-, uugy.
I
0
U
I
SBK}I
single stop is done in every macro stalement. A block in which a macro statement has executed a single block stop, is assumed to have no movement in the cuEter compensation mode. Sometimes incorrect compensation is performed. (This case is handled the same as it is for a movement amount of 0 although a move has been speci,fied.) L+) Optional block sklp l, appearing in the uiddle of
0
I
0
(Setting operation is effective) to I specifies that custom macro bodies or subprograms wich program numbers 9000 to 9999 cannot be cancelled, and edited. However, this affeets Ehe deletion of al1 programs during turning on. Setting
PRG9
Reset I^lhen a cleared
status is produced by a reset, all local variables and eommon variables ill00 to if 149 become
7)
Display j-n PROGMM RESTART page The M and T code" rrqerl fnr errhnrsgl4m calllng are not displayed like
8) Feed hold
M98.
Macro statement execution stops at the end of the biock by turning on feed hold. (It also stops by resetting or by alarm generation). 9) Other llmitations a) Usable variables //0, llL to /i33, #100 to tll49 , #500 to /1531, sysrem variables.
h) V:1id veriable values Ilaximum value +10+ / v/
Minimum value TtO-29
c) Constant value-rralid in
.value +99999999 Minimum value +0.0000001 Decj-mal point can be used I'laximum
' Precls].on Eight-digit decimal number e) I'tacro nesting
,t\ v) Arithmat-ir --i
Maximum of four f) Iteration identification number 1to3 g) Nesti-ng of Llaximum of five h) Subprogram nesting Eight (Subprogram call and macro call)
-2r2-
17.2.7
r
Codes and words used in custom macro
The following code can be used in the program codes used in conventional programs. 1) rso
*t 'i
;, *-
of the
cust.om macro
in addition to
*I
:.
Meaning
F
x
:
8
::
0
l
a
ll
+.
* o
z)
5
0
0
8
7
o
0
OO o
0
o 0 0
nl UJ
0 0
oo oo
f!
0
0
o
Character
I
2
o
0 0
o o
0 0 o 0
3
4
n
o
o
t
i
6
7
0
tl
0
1l
.* 0 o
0
ErA
Meaning
6
r
4
J
Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter
L
l
2
1
r
Character
(Data No. 0053) (Dara No. 0054) (Dara No. 0044) (Dara No. 0042) (Dara No. 0043)
0, the same code 0 as in the program number, must be used. The hole pattern ll, + and = in EIA code must be set as parameters (Data No. for . 0042 Eo 0044, 0053, 0054). Ilowever, the character with no punched hole eannot be used. Note that alphabetic characters can be used, but when used as /1, they are not used in their proper sense. Special words used in custorn macro are: . OR, XOR, IF, GOTO, EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE, ANd LE. AND, SIN, COS, TAN, ATAN, SQRT, ABS, BIN, BCD, ROUND, FIX, FUP, WHILE,
i 1 s
DO,
:
END
17.3 Registration of Custom Macro Body :
I i
A custom macro body is similar to a subprogram; it is registered and edited in the same \^iay as a subprogram. The memory used to register custom macro bodies is included in the storage capacity of the CNC. 17.4 Limitations r) MDI operation Macro call and subprogram call command cannot be specified in MDI mode. However, if I'IDI operation B function i.s provided, subprogram call command can be performed. 2) Sequence number search
in the custom macro body cannot be searched for. Single block A block, other than one including a macro call command, arithmetic command, or control command, can be executed as a single block stop even when in the Sequence numbers
1)
macro. E i;
- 2rl -
18.3 Key Position The location of keys is shown in the figure below.
trtrtrtrtr tr trETE tr
B-4rh-D
+l
trMMMM
18.4 1 L/
Each Address Restrictions
\ rf
rha nffeol No. is commanded by address D, the modal value of H is also rewritten. (Distj-nqs use of addresses D and H cannot be done.)
18.5 Setting of Setting
Parameters
The format conversion can be set by setting parameters. By setting the page as " (SETTING 2)" and by rewriting of "TAPEF", it becones
follows:
TAPEF = Ot
as
Format conversion v41id Format conversion invalid. 02000 N0130
PARAMETER
(SETTTNG 2)
PWE :O _TAPEF = 0
No.
TAPEF
(0:
DISABLE
I:
ENABLE)
=
MDI
18.6
Cautions of each Function
1) Subprogeram call To call .61 srrlrnrnorom i f a command of more than 4 digits is used for designati." *". (address P), the last 4 digits become the ";"i;""" subprogram No. and"lfot"*t"* if the times of repetitive calling (address L) is not specified, the tj-mes of repetition becomes one. .
-214-
18.
10/11 TAPE FORMAT
operation of the progran registered by 10/ll tape format is possible for rhe following funcEions with setting of the seEting parameters. a) Cutter compensation (G40, G4l, G42)
Memory
b) c)
Subprogram call (UlAl Canned cycle (G73, G74, G76, G80
18.1 Difference
-
G89)
Points of Tape Format
Difference of tape format between 0/00 and 10/11 is shovm in TabIe below.
F i
IO/II
Function
rGl7.
Cutter comDensation
rG40r
r Gl7
P
D-; ictsir ic+ri LG42) L
(One
call
L
of X, Y, Z or 4th)
D: Offset M98
No.
P_r_
rG73r X iCllrt, Z
ic76i 0-
i
rG8lr F I'
l-
I
Y
R_
pL
_
P
111: Times of repetive call pppp: Subprogram No. G73-r
X
ttGT4tl
Z
1G76
i cgr
t
i
Y
RP.n
I
L.Atl
LG89I
i
t
G19
P: (One of X, Y, Z or 4th) H: 0ffset No.
;
rlt
n.
P
M98 P 1l1pppp ;
;
P: Subprogram No. L: Times of repetitive call Canned cvcle
r rG40r
H-; icrair ic+ti LG42)
G19
P: Subprogram
OM
F
i
L:
&
K: Tirnes of repetition
Times of repetition
i
;
18.2 t
Address and Range of Command Values
which could not be used for 0/00 series can be used by format conversion. In this case, even if format conversion is set, restriction of 0/00 format is applied to the range of conaand values being used for the basic address, and if a value out of the 0/00 fornat range is registered, a P/S alarm is generated. Added basic addresses and their range of command values are mentioned in Table below. 0ther addresses will have the same specification as address in 0/00 series. Some addresses
Function Times of repet.ition
0ffset
Address L
No.
t e
ii
E
-2r3-
rnm
input
I - 9999 0-999
ineh input
l - 9999 0-999
III
OPERATION
iii)
Manual handle feed (See Section III-4.4) By rotatlng the manual handle, the tool moves by the distance correspondlng to the degree of handle rotation.
?\ Toor movement by prograrni-ng
- Automatic operation (see Sect ion III-5)
Program
Automatic operation is to operate the machine according to the ereated program. It includes memory and MDI operations. i) Memory operatiorf
Memory
Memory operation
After the program is once registered in memory, the machine can be run according to the program instructions. This operation is cal1ed memory operat ion.
-
2IB -
F I
1.
INTRODUCTION
1)
Manual operation a) Manual reference point return (See Sectlon III-4.1) The LNC machine tool has a position used to deternine the machlne posi-
tion. This position is called the reference point, where the tool is replaced or the coordinates are set. Ordinarily, after the power is turned onr the tool is moved to the reference polnt. Manual reference point return is to move the tool to the reference point using switches and pushbuttons located on the operator's pane1. Op"r"tor's panei
ooo
o
Orrl | oo
|
ooo
r
The tool can be moved to the reference point also with program cornnands. This operation is called automatlc reference polnt return. (See Section
rr-6.
b)
I)
Tool movernent by manual operatlon Using operatorrs panel switchesr pushbuttons, or the manual handle, the tool can be noved along each axis. a
g
Operator's panel
\
ooo oo
'i
Manual handle
Orrr oorrr
ooo
Work
j a
;
*
The tool can be moved 1n the followlng ways: i) Manual conrinuous feed (See Secrfoi ffi-+.2) The tool moves continuously while a pushbutton remains pressed. ii) Step feed (See Sectlon III-4.3) The tool lDoves by the predetermlned dlstance each tlne a pushbutton ls pressed.
-217-
ii) Start and stop (See Section III-5.5) Cycle start
Feed hold
Automatic operation
reset
Program Program
stop end
I
Stop caused by program
)
PressLng the cycle start pushbutton eauses automatic operation to start. By pressing the feed hold or reset pushbutton, automatic operation pauses or stops. By specifying the program stop or program termination command in the program, the running will stop during automatic operation. trrlhen one process machining ls completed, aulomatic operation stops.
iii) Handle interruption Tool r--.1
I
I I
I
Workpiece
i
Depth of manual handle feed
I
I
I
While automatic operation is being executed, tool movement can overlap automatic operation by rotating the manual handle.
-220-
I
Depth-ofcut specified
by the program
&
a g
1i) I,IDI operation
MDI operation
After the program is entered, as an eornrnand group, from the I"IDI keyboard, the nachine can be run according to the program. Thls operatlon is called MDI operation. 3) Automatic operation 1) Program selection (See Secrion III_5.2.I) Data format in 0 1001
memory
Program number
Work-l program I
M30 0 1002
Program number Program number search
Work-2 program
Automatlc
operation M30 0 1003
Program number
I.lork-3 program
select the program used for the work. ordinarlly, one program is prepared for one work. rf two or more progra*s are in me'ory, select the progran to be used, by searchlng the progra' number (Sectron rrr-10.4).
-2t9-
Single block (See Sectlon III-6.7)
ili)
w Cycle
Tool
(.r/,/
r,/,4 (/^ t,/ ,/ )
lLz-t Stop
Stop
When the c]'cle start pushbutton is pressed, the tool executes one operation
then stops. By pressing the
cycle start again, the tool cxecutes the
ne\t operation then
stops. The program
is
checked
in this manner.
Single block
b)
How to view the posicion display change without running i) M,achine lock (Sef Sections III-6. I and III-6.2)
the machine
ll*rT w.zt
(//)
CRT/TTDI
V7j tool
V)
VA
Change caused by
machine movemcnt
The tool remains stoppcd, and only the posi' rional displays of the axes change.
Machine lock
ii) Auxiliary function lock When automatic running is placed into the auxiliary function lock mode during the machine lock mode, all auxiliary functions (spindle rotation, tool replacement, coolant on/off' etc.) are disabled.
r-i:,'i=T ::,:l:
4) Program test
Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machine as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine actually or viewing the position display change (without running the machine). a) Check by running i) Dry run (See Section III-6.6)
Remove the work, check only movement of the tool. Select the tool movement rate using the dial on the operator's panel.
i'l----- --
It
|t;
-- -- -L I --__ _ _t: L'
Drv run
ii)
Feed rate overrlde
Feed rate specified by program:
Adjust the rate value smaller
50 mm/min.
than
that specificd
Program. Feed rate after feed rate override:
l0
mm/min.
Overside is 20%
Feed rate overrlde
-221-
by
the
i)
Off
set value
(See ,sectlon
III-10.1.
)
Tool compcnsation number I
Tool compensation number 2
Screen
Tool compensation Keys
number
3
CNC memory
tool has the tool dimension (length, dianeter). When a workpiece is machlned, the tool movement route depends on the tool dlmensions.
The
By setting tool dimension data in CNC memory beforehand, automatically generates tool routes that perrnit any grol to cut the work shape specified by the program. Tool dinension data is cal-led the offset value.
lrl
-] | |r I i
-224-
orir.t
value of the 2nd tool
5)
Parr program editing (See secti-on III-9) After a created program is once reglstered in memory, it modlfied from the CRT/MDI panel.
can be correct.ed or
Program correction
or modification
Program registmtion
Nl
T/MDI
.
N2.
h {}
NC tape (program)
PPR
This operation can 6)
be
Data display/setting
executed using the part program storage/edit function. ( See
Section III-10.) Data setting
display
Screen CRTi
Keys
I
Data
NTDI
CNC memory
Data stored i-n sc
reen.
NC
menory can be displayed and corrected via the
-223-
CRT/MDI
ii) Displaylng and setting parameters (See Sectlon III-10.4)
Parameters
Rapid traverse rate Positional control system
Screen
Reference point return sYstem Backlash compensation data
KeYs
Pitch error compensation data
CNC memory
Machine
operation
functions have versatllity ln order to take actlon in characteristics of varlous machines. For example, CNC can specify the following:
The
CNC
I ) Ra,gld-l:la;zerse-rat-e--of=each, axis 2) Whether incre.qe_ilE-sy-stem is based on metric system or lnch system. 3) How ro ser @Avg -' Data to make the above speclfication is called pardmeters. (See Sectlon III-10.4) Parameters differ dependlng on machine tool.
-225-
iii)
Displaying and setting operatorrs setting data (See Section III-I0.2)
Setting data M^irror image machining on/
olt
Screen
setttng
Keys
CNC memory
Operational characteristics
Machine
operation
Apart from parameters, there is data that is set by the operator rn operation. This data causes urachine characteristics to change. The above data is called setting data. iv) Data protection key (See Section III-I0.6)
Operator's panel
Data
protection key
CRT/MDI
Program
Offset value Parameters
Setting data CNC memory
A key called the data protection key can be defined. rr is used to prevent the program, offsetr pararneters, setting daEa, etc. from being registered, set, modified, or deleted erroneously.
-226-
Display
i) Prograrn display (See Section III-1
I . 1. )
Active program number
Program.tontent
The cursor indicates the currently executed location. Program contents
01
002
01 046
01057 01245 01556.... 02006 02567 03456...,
Program list
of the currently active program are displayed. In addition, the programs scheduled next and the'program list are dis-
The contents played.
ii) Current position display
"l
ir ti., ll' +x
(See Sectlon
III-11.3)
I x OOOO @O I Y oo@ ooo I z OO@ OOO I
I
Work coordinate
CRT screen
system
The current posit,ion of the tool ls displayed The distance from the current position to the displayed.
with the coordinate values. target position can also be
iii)
Alarm display (See Section IIL-11. s) is displayed at bottom, pressing the message, as in the photo below. the alarm displays button l-ALAffil When an alarm occurs and ALARM
AJqRI
i€SSISE
518 SA
W
O.ER TRA\jEL OUER TRFIJEL
: :
I'W
+X +Z
iv) Parts count display When this option is selected, two types of run time are displayed on the screen.
ACTLH- POSITIOq CRBSOLUTE)
a2@@@ NATSA
x Y z
RLN
-1,2.54@ -42.5@A @.a@@
rrF€ *r-
.r.,-ETT,Sfl
r;-ir;ln;tffit
-228-
*.J
and
number of parts
.'. .'i::{
v) Graphic display (See Section III-12.5)
Display on the
Display on the XZ plane
YZ plane
Display on the
Three dimensional display
XY pla4e
Programmsd tool movement can be displayed on 1) XY plane
2) Yz plane
3) XZ plane 4) Three dimensional display
229
"tr' -
the follcfuing planes:
.,--l-..:
B)
Data output (See Section III-12) Tape reader Portable tape read et
FANUC PPR
/A\ V
Paper tape
Memory
ITANUC cassettc and cassette adapter
Reader/puncher
interlace
Floppl,disk
Automatic programming system
The program, offset, parameters, etc. input in NC memory can be output to paper tape, cassette, or a floppy disk for saving. After once output to a medium, the data can be input into CNC memory.
.
-;:.'Ir-.
'
1.:
:,.
'-;'1.--.:
r
-230-
2.
OPERATIONAL DEVICES
2.1 CRT/MDl
Panel
The CRT/|'lDI panel consists
following illustration.
l)
CRT/MDI
panel for
of a
CRT
display (9"
amber) and keyboard
as in the
0-I1B CRT character display (9")
Data input key
Reset key
EAEEE
EEE EtrEB tilEtr trBE
Program
edit key
Input key
@BOONME Page
change key
Function key
Start/output key
I
Cursor
moYe key
2) Full
key Reset keY
Data input key I
Program edit key
POftR
l,*l lo*'
rtrtr
rtr
g
EMMBBMH Cursor move key Page change
trEtrE @tr@E Function key
key
-
23r -
Input key
Start/output key
2.1.1 MDI
keyboard Table
No.
2.1.1 MDI keyboard functions ('l12) Func t
Name
ions
( 1)
RESET key
Pr:ess this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, elc.
(2)
START key
Press this key to start the IIDI conmands, or to start the automatic operation cycle. Since this key's operating method differs according to the machine tools, refer to the rnachine tool builderts operation manual.
(3)
Address and numerical key
Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, and other characters.
(4)
INPUT key
When an address or a numerical key is pressed, the alphabet or the numeral is input once to the key input buffer, and it is displayed on the CRT screen. To set the data input to the key input buffer in the offset register, etc., press the INPUT key. Thls key is equivalent to rhe INPUT key of the soft keys, so the same results can be obtained by pressing either of them.
(5)
Cancel (CAN) key
Press this key to delete the last character or symbol input to the key input buffer. The contents of the key input buffer are displayed on the CRT screen. When the address key or the, numerical key is pressed next, the position where the alphabet or the numeral is inserted next is indicated by rt lt lflnen the cancel (CAN) key is pressedr the character immediately before the rr rr is cancelled.
Example:
I,Jhen
the key in ut buffer displays >N00lxl0002 and rhe cancel key is pr ssed, Z is cancelled and >NO0ITIOOO is dis-
(CAN)
played. (6)
Cursor shift keys
There are two kinds of cursor shift key described be1ow. * : This key is used to shift the cursor a short distance in the forward direction. t : This key is used to shift the cursor a short distance in the reverse direction.
_
a')a LJL
_
Table
No.
(7)
2.1.1 MDI keyboard function (2/2)
Functions
Name
Two kinds of page changeover keys ar: de-
Page changeover key
scribed be1ow. + : This key is used to changeover the page on the CRT screen in the forward direction. i : This key is used to changeover the page on the CRT screen in the teverse direction.
(8)
Soft keys (option)
The soft keys have various functions ' according to the Applications. The soft key functions are displayed at the bottom of the CRT screen. Left-end soft key [< I : This key is used in order to exit to the initial stats (condition when the function button is depressed when each feature has been operated vla soft keys.
Right-end soft key Dl : This key is used when operate functions which have nor yet been displayed. 2.1.2 Function buttons Function buttons indicate
E
large items like
chapters in a document.
Indicates the current position.
@
Conducts the following:
lTffid-l
Setting and display of offset value, setting and display of variable.
I opsnr
In EDIT mode ... edits and displays the program in the In MDI mode ... inputs and displays the MDI data In automatic operation ... displays command value.
memory
I
@ t-otrR--l
I
ALARM
I
I
GRAPH
I
Setting and display of parameter
and
dlsplay of diagnostic
Alarm nurnber display and setting and display pane1.
daEa.
of soflware operatort
s
Graphic function.
Several pages are inciuded in the chapter selected wlth each function button. The page is selected with PAGE button. (Note) The data displayed on the screen disappears when one of the function buttons and the lffil key are pressed. Thereafter, when either function button is pressed, the corresponding screen is dlsplayed again. When the unit is not used with the povrer turned on for long time, turn off the screen. This ls effective to prevent the image quality from deteriorating.
F
-233-
2.2
Machine Operator,s panel
The operatorrs panel varies in functioning and switch arrangement between the different tools. Operations of a typical operator t s panel are explained as shown Fig. 2.2. However, for details, refer to the manual issued bv the machine
tool builder.
c
ra v
/A (( .\j/
)'i
Si^'-'f
o
roL&sTEpFr:Fr)
v(o66 \/ v \r'
FEED
+?
@
o
,#,'JRu
HOLI)
o OFF
o
""2 ,ffi \r'*"^""6 +x +\' I o,'' \ltll 1,n,, lt ri
ON
(N) -
\z/
\)l7N \)Z DR'Rt
'?'J!"!i,"
o
rHIiH{it*
((\l
\r/
r rFF
,.-=\
nN z'
\)/ MACHINE LOCK
n
\
AMOUNT
,/
i dlD) dlD\ \tll' .t,,. o \lIeY o-\ FEEDRATE OVERIDE
JOG FEEDRATE
m/mm
Fig.2,2 An illustration for operator,s
-234-
HA\DLE
STEP FEED
IOO
""(N"'i
-,,0.
,*vlR,, *,.,, ovERRtDE
panel
r:ro
N, v HANDIE AXIS
I /-1\
xloo
/rN-\
\\\/
v
r"TJil3.',?*
Table
2.2
Element functions
Function
Name
Cycle start button
By selecting an execution program then pressing this pushbutton, automat ic operation is started . During automatic operation, the lamp inclicating automat ic operation is on.
l'eed hold button
hlhen
Mode selection but ton
Select a mode, depending on the operation type.
Rapi-d traverse
By pressing this pushbutton, the tool is fed rapidly.
Jog & step feed
By pressing this button, manual continuous or sEep feed is executed.
Handle
By rotating the handle, the tool is rotated in the corresponding direction.
Single block
By placing the single block switch in Ehe 0N position, automatic operation is executed by one block.
Optional block skip switch
By placing this switch in the 0N position, the optional block skip is executed.
h rrr ".J
Bv placing this switch in the 0N posiEion, the dry run is executed.
rr rn
this pushbutton is pressed drrring automatic operation, the tool decelerates then stops.
Reference point
return
By placing this switch in the Oll position, reference point return is executed.
Rapid traverse override
Lhen the rapid traverse override is to be executed, this
Step feed amount
This element selects the
Emergency stop
Bv pressing this button, the machine is stopped emergently.
Lock selection
Selects display or machine Lock.
llanual
hhen manual operation is to intervene during automatic operat j-on, this elemen! selects the amount of movement by manual operati-on be set in the absolute register or not
ab
solute
Feed rate override
element selects the amounE of override. amounE
of one steo of steo feed.
Selects the amount of override for automatic or
opera t ion.
Jog feed rate
Selects the manual continuous feed rate.
Handle axis
Sel-ects the axis moved bv the manual handle.
Handle multiplying
During manual handle feed, select the multlplier moving amount per step.
selection
selectlon
-235-
manual
of the
2.3
Tape Reader
Portable tape reader j-s used for the tape reader' 2.3.1
t)
Portable taPe reader
Name
and description of each section A
Tape
6.
reader
Grips
3.
opera.tlon swrtcn
Capstan
,1
r sourcell Light 1| t[ lll
2.
Optical reader part
Metal ll lil fittingA ll lll Twinderll lil
)3."., lock
fl] ,111_
1- Cable stored
p a11
i _
l-ll I ll
I
-
lj l: .l ,
_-]---r
,lr ii
13.
Readeri puncher
interface
lll
l
10.
Lowering
Photo
Iock
amplifier
Iever
5. Tape box
Fig. Tabte
2.3.1
2.3.1
Name of each section
Descriptions {or each part (1/4)
Functi-ons
Light Sources
for An LED (Light emitting diode) is mounted each channJl and for ihe feed hole (9 diodes A built-in Stop Shoe functions in total). to decelerate the taPe. The light source is attracted to the optical reader by a magnet so that the tape will be
held in the eorrect position. Thls unit can be opened upward, by turning the tape reader control switch to the RELEASE position (this turns off the magnet).
Optical
Reader
Capstan Roller
Reads data punched on the tape ' through a glass wlndow. Dust or scratches on the glass window can result in reading errors' Keep this window cLean-
Controls the feeding of tape as specified the control unit.
-zJo-
by
Table
No.
4.
2.3.1 Descriptions for
Functions
Name
Tape Reader Control Switch
each part (214l.
A 3-position switch used to control the
Tape
Reader. RELEASE
AUTO
...
The tape is allowed to be free,
or used to open the light or source. When loading this unloadi-ng the l tape, position is selectbd. The tape is set to fixed position by the Stop Shoe. The feed and stop of the tape is controlled by commands from the Control Unit. During a taPe-controlled operation or data input from tape, the Light Source must be closed and this position must be selected.
MANUAL
The tape can be fed in the If forward reading direction. another position is selected, the tape feed is stopped.
Tape Box
A Tape Box is located below the Tape Reader. A belt used to draw out a paper tape is located inside the box. The paper tape can easily be pulled out using this belt.
6.
Grips
For carrylng the portable tape reader.
7.
I^linder
Used to supply or rewind tape.
-237-
Table
2.3.1
Descriptions for each part (3/4)
Functions
Metal fitting
A
Push
To remove rewound tape, decrease the internal diarneter by pushing the fastener as shown in the above figure. Cover lock
While the tape reader is being carried, sure to keep the cover under this lock.
Lowering lock lever
I^lhen the tape reader is raised, the latch mechanism secures the reader. As a result,
be
the tape reader is not lowered. The latch is locked with this lock lever. Thus, the latch is not released by raising the tape reader with the grips. I{hile the tape reader is kept under the 1ock, the lever remains horizontal. When storing the tape reader, release the lock by pressing this lever. Then, raise the reader wlth the grips, and release the latch. After the latch is released, the tape reader can be stored in the tape box. After storage, secure the tape reader wlth the cover lock.
-238-
Tabf e
No.
2.3.1
Descriptions for each part (4141
Functions
Name
ll
Cable storage block
The power and signal cables The cable length is I.5 ro.
1')
Photoamplifler
Tape reader photoamplifier.
'I ?
Reader/puncher interface adapter
200 VAC z 5 YDC power supply puncher interface adapter pCB.
are rolled
up.
+ reader/
2) Tape reader handling a) Preparations (1) Remove the cover lock (9). Raise the tape reader with rhe grips (6) until a click is heard. Then, lower the tape reader. At this t1me, the tape reader is viewed and seeured. Check that the lowering lock lever (10) is horizontal. @ Take out the signal and power cables from the cable storage box (Il). Connect the signal cable and the poner cable to NC's reader/puncher interface port and power source, respectively. b) Tape loading Set_ the Tape Reader swirch to rhe RELEASE position. IP (, Lift the Light Source Uni-t, and insert an Nc tape between the gap. The tape must be posltioned as shown in the figure, when viewed looking downward.
Feed hole
<\__ -----l
Direction of tape feeding
x
the tape until the top of the tape goes past the capstan roller. !y1rcheck that the NC rape is correctry pbsllionei by the Tape Guide. (q) Lower the Light Source. (6) Turn the switch to the AUTO position. }x \1-i Suspend the top and rear-end of the tape in the Tape Box. c) Un1 oading the NC tape (i) Turn the switch to the RELEASE position. X (2) Lift the Light Source and remove the tape. /1\ Lower the Light Source. (41
d) Sto rage rr ) Store (2) Press
the cables into the cable box (11). the lowering lock lever (r0) dor,mward at both sldes. (, Raise the taBe reader wlth the grips (6) (ratch release operation). Then, lower it. (A setfing the cover lock (g), carry the tape reader with the grlps t!!"t (6).
-239_
2.3.2
Note for handling tape reader
1) Precautions on tape loading When the NC tape is loaded, the Label Skip function should be activated to read but skip data until first End of Block code (CR in EIA code or LF in ISO code) is read. When loading an NC tape, the location within rhe tape, from which data reading should be started must properly be selected and the NC tape should be set as shown in the figure below.
( Ir tt
|l.-...'----.-'...---* lhe program which should he read |
Set the tape so that this section is under the glass
I
window.
Actually, the end of block code (;) is in EIA code or is LF in ISO code.
CR
2) Disconnection and connection of tape reader connection cable Don't disconnect or connect CNC +-) tape reader connection cable (signal cable) without turning off the CNC and tape reader po!/er supply when using a separate tape reader, otherwise the PCB of the tape reader and master PCB of CNC controller nay be broken. Turn off the CNC and tape reader power supply before dj-sconnecting or connecting the connection cable, accordingly.
2.4
FANUC Cassette BllB2lF1
Data can be stored in afcassette with bubble memory (Bl/82).
be input from this interface.
cassette co the NC. The interface
NC data can also is reader/puncher
FANUC CASSETTE
CASSETTE ADAPTOR
NC connecting connector
Fio^f
l-"-.
In the case FANUC cassette B1 or 82
See the FANUC CASSETTE Operatorrs Manual (B-53484E) for rhe FANUC CASSETTE operat ion. See Chapter III-12 in this rnanual for data input/output operation from and to FANUC cassette.
-240-
2.5 FANUC
PPR
An I/O device with paper tape reader, tape punch, and prlnter in'one systep. Interface is reader/puncher interface.
Printer
Reel unit tape punch
Paper tape reader
Switch unit
FANUC PPR
Paper tape reader read speed Paper tape punch punching speed
Printer characters per line Printlng See the
speed FANUC
PPR
150 ch/sec or more 50 ch/sec 40 ch. (dot lnpact method)
1.2 line/sec
Operator?s Manual (B-54584E)
for the
FANUC PPR
Operatlon.
3.
POWER ON/OFF
1)
Turning on the power q2 check that the appearance of the CNC machine tool is normal. lD Turn on the power according to the instruction manual of the machine tool
builder.
that some data is being displayed on the a Check q!) Check that the fan motor is rotating.
CRT
screen.
pressing the POWER ON k.y, do not touch any other CRT/l-DI panel Ja -^+ ts^"^L keys. Until the positional or alarm screen is displayed t uv llvL LvuLll keys are them. Some used for the maintenance or special operation purpose. When they are pressed, unexpected operation may be caused.
NOTE: When
z) Tur ning off the power ri\ Check that the lamp indicating the cycle start is off on the operator's panel /;\ Check that all movable blocks of the NC machine tool is stoppi.ng. (3) If I/O devices such as the tape punch unit are connected to the NC rnav chine too1, turn off the power to these devices. e) Contlnue to press the POWER OFF pushbutton for about 5 seconds. >.< (q Refer to the machine tool builder's manual for turning off the power to the machine. )
j I
-242-
,* 'd
t 5
't,
s
-:';tj :.i:,i:;.t
4. 4.1
,t-
MANUAL OPERATION Manual Reference Point Return
O
Ser the
MODE SELECT
swirch to Ehe
JOG
position.
MDI
@ Turn on the REFERENCE
POINT
switch.
RETURN
OFF
ON
REFERENCE POINT RETURN Switch
O
Jog Feed
to reference polnt dlrection by each axis
Keep this switch on until th,e reference point is reached.
The tool Boves along the selected axis to the decelerated point rapid traverse rate, then moves to the reference point at the FL at the speed. A rapid traverse override is effective during rapid traverse moti.on.
-243-
@ fn" machine stops at the reference point lighring the
REFERENCE POINT
RETURN COMPLETION LED.
/A/n\/A\
Yl\/_Y
REFERENCE POINT RDTURN COMPLETION LED
(Note
Once the
REFERENCE POINT RETURN COI.IPLETION LED light s at the completion of reference point return, the tool does not move unless the REFERENCE POINT RETURN swirch is rurned off. (Note 2) The REFERENCE P0rNT RETIIRN COMPLETToN LED is extinguished by either of the following operations: (i) Moving from the reference point. (ii) Entering an emergency stop state. (Note 3) For the distance (Not in the deceleration condition) to reEurn the tool to reference point, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
1)
4.2
Manual Continuous Feed
The
machine tool can be continuously moved manually as follows. Set the MODE SELECT sr^ritch to the JOG position.
o
MDI
o"'o \'rEP/HANDLE
{ {N
uo,,
lS1,o"
@ S"t."t the axis ro be moved.
A\ A A V V V +X
-X
/A
v
(())
+Z
+Y
_Z
/A /A V -Y
\r'
\\
))
The selected axis moves in its direction.
(Note i) rf 3 axes are selected simultaneously by three swi-tches, I axis selected at first only moves because Manual operation is allowed for one axis at a time. (Note 2) when the mode is switched to the JOG mode while po\rer is oD, axis will not move even 1f it has already been selected. Axis selection must be performed again.
-244-
@ Select JoG feedrate
{^frtl\ .\ \t'Jy I,,uo JOG
FEEDRATE mm/min
Feedrate
Position on rotarv switch
Metric input
Inch input
mrn/min
inch/nin
0
0
0
I
)n
0. 08
2
1t
0. t2
3
5.0
n,
4
7.9
0.3
5
12.6
0.5
6
20
0.8
32
r+ t ?
F 3
,
1.2
I
50
2.0
9
79
3.0
10
t26
5.0
lt
200
8.0
L2
320
l2
t.3
500
20
t4
790
30
l5
L260
50
i I
a "{
: i
t * $
;
i
(Note 1) The feedrate error (about +3%) affects on the feedrate in the table above.
-245-
@ Rapid traverse
To execute the rapld traverse by manual mode, push RAPID too.
TRAVERSE
button
.RAPID TRAVERSE
It is possible to move the axis in the selected direction at rapid traverse while this button is pushed. (Note 1) Feedrate, time constant and rnethod of automatic acceleration/ deceleration for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00 in prograrmed
command
4.3 STEP Feed
/;\ u, Set MODE SELECT switch ro
STEp
posirion. MDI
STEP
feed is available for the machine without manual pulse generator.
Select the desired amount of
movement. x1000 x10000
xr0
x100000
XT
Input system
l\|
Millimeter input
0.
Inch input
0.000I inch
xl0 001
rnm
0.01
xl00 run
0.001 inch
0.1
x1000 rnn
L
rnm
0.01 inch
0.
I inch
'i
-246-
*
:9
I
lt: 3
;
@ Select the axis
the switch is pressed once, the axis Eoves by the anount speclfied in lts direction. Then when the switch ls pressed after releasLng it once, the axis moves by the specified amount.
Wtren
(Note 1) The feed rate is the same as the jog feed rate. (Note 2) The rapid traverse button is also effective. Rapid traverse over-
rlde is effecttwe during rapid traverse.
4.4 Manual Handle Feed
feed rate can be adjusted precisely by usLng the manual pulse generator. ri) s./ Set the MODE SELECT swltch to the IIANDLE position.
The
Awo
//
----l-t-
\
srep/HaNor-e
..*( @),"" O Select an axis.
i' t I
;
tt F
t
-247-
O Rotate the handle of the manual pulse generator.
a
a
/A v
a
a clockwise rotation counterclockrrise rotation (The
@
* direction
direction direction varies with the machine tool builder.)
Movernent amount In some cases, thejperatorrs panel is provided with the following switch. xl0 nultiplies the movement amount.by l0;x100 by 100.
selector
xl0 X100 (Note 2)
Handle Multiplier
Movement amount
Input
per degree
XI
xl0
x100
Metrlc input
0.00I nn
0.01 nn
0.1
Inch input
0.0001 inch
0.0O1 inch
0.01 inch
system
nsl
(Note 1) 9!6"1 amount may be usecl depending on machine tool. (Note 2) rf the handre is rotated in excess of 5 turns/sec, there ls a difference between the handle rotation amourrt and the machine Ioovement distance. (Note 3) Rotating the handle too fast when X100 is selected moves the tool or table at a rate as fast as the rapid traverse rate. A sudden stop gives the machine tool a shock.
-248-
4.5
Manual Absolute ON and OFF
Ihis switch selects whether the amount of manual movement is to be added to the absolute value. 1) Wtren the switch is ON. Yaxis
Xaxis
The coordinate values change by the amount 2) When
the switch is
of
manual operation.
OFF.
x2 x1
The coordinate values do not change. (Exanple 1) Suppose the next tape comands :
G0lc90xr00. 0Y100.
0F0 10;
x200.0YI50.0
a)
x300.0Y200.0
Wtren
block @ has been
Y-axls +100.0) at the
; ;
executed after nanual oDeration end of movement of block O:
Y
t
Manual
(
r2o.o,2oo.o)
opetation-
(
Qzo.o '250.0)
200.0 , 150.0 )
When manual absolute switch is ON ( 1 00.0 , 100.0 )
-249-
(X-axis +20.0'
b)
l.then the feed hold button is pressed while block @ is being executed, manual operation (y-axls +75.0) is performed, and che cycle start button is pressed and released.
( 200.0 ,225.0)
[{anual absolute switch ON
( 150.0 , 200.0 )
Manual operation
-
+ (
-
1ioo.o,2oo.o)
200.0 , r s0.0 )
( 1s0.0 , 125.0 )
c)
the feed hold button is pressed while block is being execured, manual operation (Y-axis +75.0) i_s performedr the @ iontrol unit is reset with the RESET button, and block @ is read again. I'ltren
(300.0,275.0) ( 200.0 ,
(l
sos ,200.0
225.0)
.-\ -e_
)
Manual absolute srvitch OFF lr{anual absolute srvitch ON
Manual operation (
( 1s0.0
( r 00.0 , 100.0
,I
200.0 , l 50.0 )
2s.0 )
)
-250-
(
300.0 , 200.0 )
Fd, axls
When
there is only one axis in the following
cornmand,
returns.
only the
-ri
_
conmanded
Nlc0 1c90x100. 0Yl 00.0F500;
N2 X200.0; N3 Yl50.0;
? I
I Manual absolute switch ON
Manual absolute switch
OFF
e) When the following' commands are incremental conmands, operati-on is the same as when the MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is set to OFF. (Note 1) The followlng occurs when manual operation compensatlon.
1)
ls performed during cutter
Tfre I{ANUAI ABSOLUTE swl-tch ts OFF and cutter compensatlon is being performed. Afteilnanual operatlon ls performed with the MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch ln the OFF position durLng cutter compensatlon, autonattc operation is restarted then the tool moves parallel to the movement that would have been performed if nanual novement had not been performed. The anount of separati;n eguals to the amount that was performed nanually.
""'ot
oo"r"rrol
V
/
/
/
Cutter center path
-251-
" ,.t:il .- l.-+T;i*
2) The MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is ON and cutter compensation is being performed. Operation of the machine upon return to automatlc operation after manuaL intervention with the manual absolute switch in the 0N position during execution with an absolute command Program in the cutter compensation rnode will be described. The vector, the remalning part of the current block and the beginning of the next block is shifted in parallel the amount of manual movemenL performed is included in the calculations of the vectors of the two blocks subsequent to the current block. This also applies when manual operat ion is performed during cornering. a) During block executj-on (Exarnple 1)
vaz
VO ,/l
t,
a\
VBl
-/1vc2
\--r6
,/, Pp
\ \ Absolute command program Path
Y
VBl'
\
Tool center path
\
-(\ \
\rn )\
'\l'I '\
Tool center path before manual operation
(\
.'i-t'I
Manual operation
\/ PH'
-252-
that the feed hold was applied at. point Pr. whlle moving from p^ to of prograrmed path P^ , Po, and P^ and that th6 tool was manually ntved td PHr. The block end^polfrt Po moVes to the point Po'by the amount of nanudl movement, and vectors V-i and V-^ at P- also mo'7e to V-,t e.nd V-^t. Vectors V.' and V", between tff6 next tfso blo"cks Po - t,- anf,!,- - prrofre discarded "alnd new "vbctors V^r t and V^"t (V..rt = Y ni in t'he examlle aSove) are produced from the relaUton betwE'en Po*'- P""?nd Pn - Pn. However, since Vor t is not a newly calculated vecflor, co"rrect olfset "ls not performed trf block Pr' - PC. 0ffset is correctly performed after PC.
Assume i
Po
*
t'
i
i
(Example 2)
l'B2
lrBl
)
s
\.. t''cz
\,-' t"\
\
--\
vB2'..t /\\ /\
vBl
i.\.Y r. _==\41 \
,,.
\YB\
* (r
\
'.
/,
\
Y.-.--
Absolute command program path
\
\\\\\ tt\ a\
\\ \\ \
_t
Tool
\ ) center puth t
l'A2
ru\,i VAI
\ Manual operation
?
l
i
:
t.
l/rt
V,aZ'
Pn'
V.A.
F E.
ft
-253-
l'
This is an example when manual operation is performed during cutter compensation cornering. VAZt, VBlr' and Vg2t are vectors moved in parallel wlth V62' VBl and Vg2 by the amount of manual movement. The new vectors are calculated from VCt and YCZ. Then correct cutter compensation is performed for the blocks following Pc. b) Manual operation was performed when execution of a block was terminated single block stop.
l'B2
by
VCl
VBl
Manual
operation
Vn
t'
,/
\/"
vst'
/4
\
Absolute command program path
Tool center path
vectors Vg1 and vg2 are shifted by the amount of manual operation Subsequent processing is the same as case a) described above. An MDI operation can also be interveneted as well as manual operation. The movement is the same as that by manual operation.
-254-
5.
AUTOMATIC OPEBATION
5.1
Operation Mode
5.1.1 Memory operation
Load the program to the memory (III-9) Select the program to be operated Set the node selector to the AUTO posltion MDI
Awo'/--r---.-\
s
,o,,( @ Press the cycle start button.
srpp/rHNor_s
),"" Cycle start tamp lights
/A @
V
Cycle start
hltren
pressed, automatic operat.ion beglns and the cycle start larnp lights.
5.1.2 MDI operation One command block can
be entered frour the CRT/UDI panel- for execution.
1) For example, X10.5 Y200.5; a) Set the mode select switch to ouro-
I
MDI mod.e.
/--]\
srEp/HANDLE
/ ,4)t \-
|
uo,,\ b)
Push rhe l-pRocRAlt
il\
\tt"y ^t
I burton.
-255-
\
1,o"
c)
Push PAGE button
to display a screen with llDr at the top left. PROGRFT'I 0'rDI )
W
(|'{]DA_)
|W
tr
GAR G1? P G96 A G94 H G21 N GzlAS
BI9
T
GBA
GE ?
Are.
I'IDI
d) p""h
nl, H, H, E'"0 E push tt'tFEFl
keys
in this order.
button. The dara, xlO. 5 , is inpur and displayed. lrf you are aware of an error in _the keyed-in number before pushing the fTNryil buttonr push the [CAil but,ion and key in rhe correcr number again. If notice an error after ttre I fnFUfl button is pushed, key in rhe data again from the beginnins. rTr rtr Fl -l-0-l "[ I . t-s-r kevs in this order. f) e""nl i s s
e)
I' L.l'
p) o/
l'
I'
I 1_3l'"dl ; I rnstr l-rllFuT-l key. The dara, y200.5 is input and displayed. If you pushed $tong number keys, correct the operation following the instruction described above. I
PRSRtr'1 0,'rDI) X Y
W
(F0m_)
LS.WB M.ffi
TW
F
GMR
GT? P G96 e
GgI
E1
H
t'l
G4A S G49 T
B8
9= Rm. I{D I
h) p"sn l-sranr-l burton. Push the cycle start button on the machine operator's panel (depending the machine tool).
-256-
on
2) canceling Y200.5 of XI0.5 Y200.5; before pressing tn" I-SfAnfl button (cycle D
+L4r ^' F L
r rlVrr/ '' UUL ^- \
L.
u", a)' Push the lTl tY
and the [El,.N] buttons in this order. "r,a l-rllpJTl h) Prrsh the I S1'ART I brriton or the evcl e sf erf button on the machine opeI
rator t s pane1. (Note) Modal G codes cannot be cancelled. Enter the correct data again.
5.1.3 MDI operation-B
Wlth the MDI operati.on - B specification, it is possible to prepare a program and execute it similarly to usual registration program, in che MDI mode. l) Program preparation If the I'IDI program screen is selected, display of the format below is PROGRAM
(}DI)
00010
shown.
N0010
00000
(MODAL)
c00 c17 F R
c90 G2t G94 c40 1000 P Q
G49 c80
c98 G67 H M03
G54 G64
5300 T0i01
ADRS
I'IDI CURRNT
Tho nrnor'- No. t'00000tt is automatically inserted. Thereafter, prepare the program to be executed by operation similar to normal program editing.
Insertion, modification, deletion of word star! search, etc. Since a prepared program is noE deleted by a reset operationr perform the operation of Note 3) to delete the program.
Word search, address searchr program
Note 1) Operation on the regi-stered program is not possible. (Registration, deletion, punch, comparison, etc.) Note 2) The length of a program which can be prepared is limited to one page of
a CRT screen. In the above case' the longest program is 6 lines with specification of the Parameter (No. 0028 MMDL), if the mode is switched to Ehar of no modal information display, up to t0 lines of program can be prepared. If the number of lines of program exceeds the limir, Z(ER) will disappear and insertion and modification operation will become
impossible. Note 3) To erase all the prepared program, operate O "DELETE".
-
L)
I
2) Program execution
(mr1 00000 c00 xr00.0 I'103 i c01 2L20.0 F500; P9010 ; M98 20.0 ; c00
00010 N00r0
PROGRAM
Y200.0;
o/
(I'IODAL)
GOO G9O GzT c17 G94 G40 F 1000 P
R
a
G49 c80
G9B G67 H
M03
G54
G64
s300 r0r01
ADRS
MDI CURRNT
Set the cursor on the head of the program. (Start from an intermedi.ate point is possible. ) Push "START" key or Cycle Start button on the operatorrs panel. By tiris action, the prepared program will start. When the program end (M02, M30) or ER(%) is executed, the prepared prograrn will be automatically erased and the operation will endr. By command of M99, return to the head of the prepared program is performed.
3) Cautions a) Programs registered in the program tnemory can be called as subprogram. In thi-s case, the nest of subprogram is up to 2-loops combined with automatic operation (AUTO) program. (If a custom macro option is provided, up to 4-loops combined is possible.) b) If the custom macro option is provided, even in the MDI mode, custom macro program preparation and execution is possible. However, macro call is not possible. c) A program to be prepared in the MDI mode uses program memory vacant area. If there is no vacancy in the program memory, program preparation in the MDI mode is not possible. d) Programs prepared in the MDI urode will be erased in the following cases: i) In MDI operation, if M02, M30 or ER(%) is executed. ii) In AUTO mode, if memory operation is perforned. iii) In EDIT mode, if any editing is performed. iv) Background editing is performed. e) The editing operation during the stop of MDI operation will start from Ehe cursor position which makes start, but not from the current cursor Dosltion.
-258-
d rif
s
a
5.2 i
r)
?
Starting Automatic OPeration I',1emo
a
I
l
t
5.3
ry operation Select AUTO mode. Select execution program. Press cycle start button on the machine operatorts
pane1.
Executing Automatic Operation
Afr er automatic operation is started, the following are executed: A one-block command is read from the specified program. (2) The block command is decoded. at The command execution is started. The command in the next block is read. ('>< Buffering is executed. That is, the cornmand is decoded to allow irnmediate
e 6
executi-on.
@ Immediately after the preceding block is executed, execution of the nexE block can be started. This is because buffering has been executed. I{ereafter, automatic operation can be executed by repeating the st.eps @ to
o
5.4
a;\ \v'
Stopping Automatic OPeration
There are two means to stop the automatic operaLion. One is to command a stop command in a program where the exeeution is to be stopped (See 5.4.1 - 5.4.3) and the other is to stop the operation at any time by pushing an appropriate button on the operator's panel (See 5.4.4 and, 5.4.5). 5.4.1
Program stop (M00)
Cycle operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the program is stopped, all exlst.ing modal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The cycle operation can be restarted by specifying an | NC start. (This differs with the machine tool builder.) 5.4.2 Optionat stop (M01)
Similarly to M00, cycle operat,ion is stopped af ter a block containing I"10 1 is executed. This code is only effective when the Optional Stop switch on the machine operatorts panel is set to 0N. 5.4.3
Program end (M02, M30)
l) This indicates the end of the main program and is necessary to store NC commands from tape to memory. 2) Cycle operation is stopped and the NC unit is reset. (This differs with the machine tool builder.) 3) OnIy M30 The control is rewound to Ehe start of the program in memory operation. (This differs with the machine tool builder. Some machines indicate rewind with M02.)
t
+
-259&,
5.4.4 Feed hold When Feed Hold
button on the operatorrs panel is pressed during automatic operation, the tool decelerates to a stop at a time. I Press the feed hold button. Fecd hold lamp lighrs
Ileed hold button
I{hen pressed, the feed hold lamp lights and the cyc.le start lamp turns off. Turns off
v
t()l
Cycle start
At i) ij-) iii) 5.4.5
this tine,
tF
Feeding stops if the tool is moving. Dwell execut.ion stops, if executing. l'1, S, T or B operation continues up to the end of the block.
Reset
Automatic operation can be stopped and the system can be rnade to the reseE state by using RESET key on the CRT/IDI panel or e*ternal reset signal. 5.5
'i !iat
il l!
fi
Program Re-start
This function specifies Sequency No. of a block to be re-started when a tool is 'broken down or when it is desired to re-start machining operation after a day off, and re-starts the machining operation from that block. It can also be used as a high-speed tape check function. I) When a tool is damaged (P tYPe): a) Press "Feed Hold" to escape the too1, and replace it with a new one. I'iodify the offset amount if it varies. b) Turn the program re-start switch on the machine operation panel 0N. c) Press t'PRGRI'I" to display the present program. d) Find -the program head. Press "RESET". , During memory bperation, select ttAUTOtt mode, and press o t. e) Press P "Sequence No." +, and search t.he block with Sequence No. to be re-starEed. When the same sequence No. appears many times, for examplet when the subprogram is accessed several times in searching Sequence No. in the subprogram, specify the frequency of a block with its sequence No. in upper 4 digits, and specify Sequence No. in lower 4 digits as illustrated below.
P.r
2 3 4 0 r 2
Frequency Sequence
3
No.
-260-
When the block is the first
time, the upper 4 digits can be onitted. Furtherr the leading zero can be ornitted except Sequence No. when the frequency is specified. f) After completion of block search, the CRT screen is changed to the progran re-start screen.
G€A IM1B RESTffiT 6tL @ gls cDESTtMTIfi) I'fls a1a @r9 gv 6 w u4 x [email protected] 65wgnwffi Y Ln.w d7? @. w2 @. gLs z L@.@ A&.444 UA 955 ... A A.W (DlSTFr.tCE TO @) ..r r.. r.. 2 x [email protected] 3 Y Lg3.@L r gLgL @. s w 4Z e,@. 8...." A.@ 1A
FR@Ffi
t**''-l t""*".l I '*'-l
l"**l
|
**l
(DESTINATION) shows the position where the machining operation is re-started. (DISTANCE T0 G0) shows the distance between the current tool position and the
machining re-start posi-tion. The figure at the left side of the axis name shows the order (parameter settj-ng) described later when the tool moves to the re-start posit.iotr. M..... Shows M-code commanded recently 35 tirnes in the past. Shows M-code commanded recently 2 tiures in the past. T..... S ..... Shows S-code command in the last. B' . . . . . Shows B-code command in the 1ast. Display the most previously commanded code in the head. Each code is cleared with the program re-start command and the cycle stalt command in reset condi-
tions. g) Turn the program re-start switch OFF. At this time, the figure at the left side of axis name (DISTANCE T0 c0) flickers. h) Check the screen, and if M, S, T or B code should be output, select the MDI rnode, and output M, S, T or B code from MDI. Each code in this case is not displayed on the program re-start screen. During memory operationr select "AUTO" mode, and check that the distance i) of (DISTANCE T0 GO) is correct, and that the tool does not hit against the work and others. If it is about to collide with an obstacle, move the tool manually to the location where it does not collide, then press '?Cyc1e Start" button. At this time, the tool moves to the machining re-start position in the dry run mode by one axis in the order set to the parameters (No. 0124 to OI27), thus re-starting machi.ning operation in succes-
2)
sion.
re-starting machining operation after the following cases (Q type) polrer is turned OFF once the emergency stop buEton is depressed once the coordinate system is changed after auEomatic operatj-on is previously stopped For example; I When G92 was set from MDI 2 When the coordinate system was shifted 3 When the automatic coordinate sysEem was set by the reference point return 4 When the coordinate system was nodified by "RESET".
When
i) ii) iii)
When When When
-
/h
I
a)
When power
is turned 0N or emergency stop is released, perform all necessary operati-ons at that time, including the reference point return. (See
Notes )
b) Move the tool manually to the program starting point (machining start point), and keep the modal data and coordinate system in the same conditions as at the machining start. c) lf necessary, set and modify the offset amount. d) Turn the program re-start SW on the machine operation panel ON. e) Press "PRGRM" to display the program. hhen it is not the specified one, search the specified program. f ) Find the program head. Press t'RESETtt. Du::ing memory operation, select t'AUTOtt mode, and press o t. C) Press Q t'Sequence No.t' +, and search a block with Sequence No. to be re-started. When the same sequence No. appears many times, specify the frequency of a block with its sequence No. in upper 4 digits, and specify Sequency No. in lower 4 digits. h) Upon completion of block searching, the display on the CRT screen is +^ ^L^'.^^l cnangeo Eo tne program re-start screen. i) Turn the program re-start switch OFF. At this time, the figure at the left side of axis name (DISTANCE T0 G0) blinks. j) Check the screen, and select the MDI mode if there are M, S, T or B codes to be specified, and output M, S, T, or B codes from MDI. In this case, each code is not displayed on the program re-start screen. k) During memory operation, return the operation mode to ttAUTO" mode, check that the distance (DISTANCE TO GO) i-s correct, and thar the tool does not Ljr rrI L d6qrrlD '^''r-^t a fork and others when moving to the machining re-start position. If it is likely to hit against an obstacle, move the tool manually to the position where it does not collide, then press the cycle start button. At this time, the tool moves to the machining re-start position in the dry run mode by one axj-s in the order preset to the parameters (No. 0124 to 0127). (Note l) Under the following conditions, the program re-starting of P type is not executed. i) l{hen no autornatic operation is performed after power ON. ii) When no automatic operation is performed after releasing the iii)
emergency stop. Lhen no automatic operation is performed after the coordinate system is set, modified or shifted (the external work zero point
offset amount is changed). P/S alarm (No. 9l) for i), ii) above or after releasing P/S alarm (No. 94 ro 97) P/S alarm (No. 94) irtleen the coordinate system is set P/S alarm (No. 95) When the coordinate system is shifted P/S alarm (I{o. 96) When the coordinate system is changed The blocks to which the tool can be correctly returned by the P type program startup are those for which coordinate system is set and modified just before the machining operation is interrupted. (Note 2) When the tool moves to the machining restart position by one axis with type P or Q,lt is possible to stop the tool each at a single block ,after completion of single axis operation. However, it is imposiible to intervene IDI there. l'Ianua1 operation is possible there, but the already returned axis does nof move by the returning operation. (Nntp ?'\ -t , T)rrrinr ----..g searching operation, the tool will not return to a correct machining re-start position if the conditions of input signal and offset amount, etc. are made idential to those for machining. Even with the single block switch 0N, searching operation is continued.
-262-
€{ * Il *.
:
i
t
(Note
4)
(Noce 5)
(Note 6) (Note
7)
"Feed Hold" is applied during searching or when re-setting operation is performed during searching or after searching, re-start Ehe program re-start operation frorn the beginning However, after search completion, resetting operation in the MDI node is according to the parameter No. 045: CLER. When the program re-start SI^l is 0N, the cycle start is ignored. Perform manual operation with "Manual Absolutett ON before and after the machining. As a rule, the t.oo1 cannot be returned to a correct posit |on under the following conditions. i) When the tool is operated manually with "Manual Absolute" OFF. ii) when the tool is operared wich the machine ro6t and Z-axis
Lrrhen
ignored.
(Note 8) (Note 9)
(Note
10)
iii) When the mirror image is used. iv) When the coordinate system is noE set at the beginning of a program in the incremental mode. v) I,rhen manual operation is performed in the course of axis movement for returni-ng operati-on. Vi) When the machine lock is released after directing the program re-start under machine lock conditions. vii) When the program re-start is commanded for a block between the block for skip cutting and subsequent. absolute command b1ock. viii) When the coordinate system is set, modified or shifted after completion of searching operation. However, for (3) above, resetting operation is possible in P type for the ON-OFF switched blocks. At this time, maintain the mirror image signal in the same conditions as during inEerruption. rn any case, it should be noted that no alarm is produced. When no specified block is found, P/S alarro (No. 60) occurs. When a move conmand is given with MDI before axis movement afcer completion of seareh operation, P/S alarn (No. 99) is produced. "RSTR" flashes at the lowermosE part of the CRT. display screen until Ehe last axi-s completes returning after the program re-starE is commanded.
(Note I l) When the 4th axis is a rotary axis, the reference point return direction is rr-rr, and G28, G30 or subsequent incremental couunand is given just before a block for which re-start is commanded, the absolute position of 4th axis may deviate 360 degrees. (Note l2) When an absolute pulse coder is provided, no operation for reference poi-nt return is requi-red when poTrer is turned ON or emergency stop is released.
5.6 Manual Handle Interruption The movement by manual operation of handle can be done by overlapping it wiEh the movement by automatic operation in the automatic operat.ion mode. 5.6.1 Handle interrupt oPeration The handle interrupti-on can be done by rotating the manual pulse generator under
the following conditions. l) Mode Other than HANDLE and TEACH IN HANDLE mode. (Norrnal handle feed is done in JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode, if the manual pulse generator is effective. ) 2) Operating condition Operating conditions other than machine lock and interlock. 3) Handle interrupt axis selection signal Llhen Ehe handle interrupt axis selection signal (HIX, Y, Z) is turned on in the axis to which the handle incerrupc is attempEed. (The FANUC PMC is required for inputting this signat.)
-263-
$ a x
5.6.2 Movement by handle interrupt l) Move amount
E
The move amount by handle Interrupt is determined by the manual Pulse generator scale and the handle feed magnification (xl, xl0, x100). Since the interrupted move 1s not accelerated/decelerated, xl00 magnification is not selectable. The move amount per scale at xl magnification is 0.001 nur (mrn output) or 0.0001 inch (inch output). (Note) This move amount is 0.001 mrTr (nm input) or 0.0001 inch (inch input) in
t:
manual handle feed.
This move amount is overlapped with the move amount by the automatic operation in the automatic operatj-on mode. 2) Relation with various signals The following table indicates the relation between various sienals and the movement by handle interrupt. Relation
u r6.rdr
l-fachine lock
Machi-ne tool does turns on.
Interlock
Machine tool does not move when this sienal
not
move when
this sisnal
turns on.
Mirror
3)
image
Interrupt functions on the plus direction by plus direction command, even if this signal turns on.
Relation with various posirion display The following table shows the relation between various position disolav data and the movenent by handle interruDt. Display
Relation
Absolute coordinate value
Interrupt pulses are not added.
Relative coordinate value
Interrupt pulses are not
Maehine coordinate value
Interrlrpt pulses are added.
added.
4) Display of move amount by handle lnterrupt If the handle interrupt function is provided, one page of position display screen is added, and the move amount by the handle interrupt is displaved on *t^ l, +L -^-^ LrlE aLrI PdEE. The following 4 kinds of data are displayed concurrently on the handle interrupt move anount display page. a) Handle interrupt move amount in i-nput unit systeur (rNpur uNrr) b) Handle interrupt move amount in output unit system (OUTpUT UNIT) c) Position in relative coordinate system (RELATIVE)
{ .r.
*
?
-264-
:5i
E 5 ?
d) Residual move amount
(DISTANCE TO GO)
HANDLE INTERRUPTION
02000 N0150
(INPUT UNIT)
(OUTPUT IJNIT)
x 25.400 Y 0.000 z -10.000 (DISTANCE TO GO) x 5.9706 Y -13.4680 z 0.0000
x r.0000 Y 0.0000 z -0.3937 (RELATIVE) x 10.2468 Y -5.9713 z 2.3358 BUF AUTO
The handle interrupt move amount ls cleared r"rhen the low speed reference point return ends every axis. 5.6.3
High-speed reference point return of handle interrupt axis
l[hen the lnput unit and output unit are different from each other, the machlne coordinate value (MACHINE) does not always become 0 when the high-speed reference point return (G28) i-s executed on the axis in which the handle interrupt move amount is not 0. However, the reference polnt return end signal is output even ln such a case. (The devtation of the nachine coordinate value is maximum 2 pulses when the high-speed reference point return ends.) If the handle interrupt ls done during the reference polnt return, lt is possible that the reference point return end signal ls output, even if the nachine tool does not return to the correct reference point yet.
-265-
6.
t
TEST OPERATION
6.1
I
AllAxes Machine Lock
the switch is set to the MACHINE LOCK position, move conmand pulses are suppressed. Consequently, the position dlsplay is updated as specified by the program, but the tool does not move. This function is used to check a program.
When
OFF DISPLAY LOCK
MACHINE LOCK
Display Iock/machine lock switch
(Note 1) When a G27, G28 or G30 command ls specified, the tool does not go to the reference point and the REFERENCE POINT RETURN COMPLETION LED does noE go on. (Note 2) The M, S, T and 2nd auxl-liary function (B) are executed.
6.2
Machine Lock on Each Axis (Z-axis only)
the switch is set to 0N position, the axis does not move during manual/ automatlc operation.,r Position display updat.es as if the axis were moving.
When
SINGLE BLOCK
Machine lock on each axis (Z-axis)
6.3 Auxiliary Function
Lock
the Auxiliary function lock switch is turned on, on the machine operatorts panel, M, S, T and B function operations are locked. This switch is used to check a program together with a machine lock switch. (Note) M00, Mol, M02, M30, M98 and M99 are executed, even if the switch is on.
When
-266-
6.4
Feedrate Override
With this dlal, it ls posslble to overri-de the feedrate designatdd by the program.
Feed Rate Override dial
Feed Rate Override dial
An override of 0 to l50Z can be applied. (Note 1) In some machines, thi.s switch is common to the jog feedrate switch.
6.5
Rapid Traverse Override
The rapid traverse override switch of lO0"A, 502, 25il and, Fo is provided. When the rapid traverse rate is 10 n/min and this dial ls set to 50y", actual rate becomes 5 n/nin, t'Fo" is a constant value specified by the mnchine tool_ builder.
Thls function is available in the following movements. t) Rapid traverse by G00 2) Rapid traverse durlng canned cycle. 3) Rapld traverse in G27 and G28. 4) Manual rapld traverse. 5) Rapid traverse in manual reference point return.
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE
6.6
Dry Run
I
If thls sv/irch is set to ON in the Cycle Operatlon, the feed rate specified the progran is ignored and becomes as follows:
by
OFF
DRY RUN switch
Rapid traverse burton
Prograu
Conrmand
ON/Opf'
Rapid traverse Rapid traverse button
0N
Rapid traverse
Rapid traverse button
OFF
JOG
(Note
l) This RDRN
feed rare (Note
Cuttlng feed I'Iax. 1)
JOG
JOG
feed rate
feed rate
speed can be ser to the rapid traverse rate by settlng paraneter No. 0001.
-267-
6.7 Single Block This function stops the machine after executing one block of the program. t) Set the single block switch to ON. OFF
Single block
block of the program is executed, and then the execution is stopped. If the cycle start button is pressed, the next block is executed and then the execution is stopped again. One
(Note 1) For G28 and G30, the single block function is effective at an lntermediate point (Note 2) I! a canned cycle, the single block stop points are the end of O, @, and (0 shown below. When rhe single block function is eFfective a-points O or @, the feed hold lamp lights. F-------
t!)
+? (D
@
t
G)l
,A I'
I
- .-
/A
Rapid traverse
.'-..-..-..-------.-...* Feed
(Note 3) Single block stop is not performed in blocks conraining M98P_; M99; and G65. However, single block stop is even perforrned in a block with M9BP or M99 command, if the block contains an address other than O, Nir P.
-268-
7.
SAFETY FUNCTIONS
7.1 Emergency Stop
If
you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operatorts panel, the rnaghins stops in a movement.
movement
EMERGENCY STOP
This button ls locked when pressed. Although it varles wlth the machlne tool builder, the button can usuaily be unlocked b-y twisting Lt. (Note 1) EI"IERGENCY sroP interrupts the current to the motor. (Note 2) Causes cjf trouble must be removed before the button ls released. 7.2 Overtavel the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the nachine tool linit switch' or when lt enters , the stored stroke linit inhlbltion area spectfled by the setting data or the program, an OVER TRAVEL ls dl.splayed and the tool slows down and stoPs. In this case, press the reset button to reset the alarrn after moving the tool to the 'safety directlon by manual operation. For detalls on operation, refer to the operatorfs manual of the machine tool bullder.
When
-269-
8. WHEN ALARM 4RlsEs* Check the following items i-f normal operation cannot be done. 1) h''hen error code is displayed on the CRT
If an error code is displayed, refer to APPENDIX 9 "List of Error Codes" to check the cause of the error. If the error number ranges frorn 000 t'o 128, the error is related to the program or setEing data. Correct the program or the setting data. 2) When no error code is displayed on the CRT There are cases in which the system is executing some process and it seems like the machine operation is stopping. Refer to Maintenance Volume, Section 2.4 rrCNC slatus display". 3) Refer to Maintenance Volume, Chapter 2 "Troubleshootingrr.
-2lo-
$ ttt.tt '
9.
PART PROGRAM STORAGE
9.1 Preparation
&
EDIT (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
for Part Program Storage and Editing Operation
The following preparatlon is necessary for the part program storage and edltlng
operation. l) Set the reader/puncher. 2) Set the data on reader/puncher. (See il.3) 3) Turn on the data protection key (KEY). Some system doesntt provide this key. 4) Set the operation mode to EDIT rnode. 5) Press the PROGRAM key and display the program.
g.2
Registering Program
to Memory
R\ f\U)
Registering with MDI key \ l) Select EDIT mode. \ 2) Push the PRGRM button to display the program directory screen. 3) Key in address 0. 4) Key in the prograrn No. 5) Push the [-ttqsRT I key. With the above procedure, the program No. is registered to the memory. Thereafter, key in respective words of the program and press the [fnS-nT I key to register them.
9.2.1
9.2.2 Registering from NC tape 1) Se1ect EDIT or AUTO uode.
2) Set the NC tape on the tape reader. 3) Push the PRGRM button. 4) lJhen there is no program No. on the NC tape or when the program No. is to be changed, input a program No. (This is unnecessary if there is a program No. on the tape and lt is not to be changed.) i) Key in address 0. ii) Key ln the program No. 5) Push l-Nut I key. 9.3 Registering Several Programs on a Tape to Memory
(B)
0222
.
M30;
n?1?1
Mn?. rrv4,
Proceed in the same \ray as registerlng the NC tape to the memory. Data is read up to ER, and many programs are registered. Program No. is set as follows: l) When the program No. is not set from MDI. a) The value of O (N of the first block when there is no O) ls set as the
program No. b) When a program having no 0 nor N appears on the NC tape, a value obtained by adding I to the previous program No. is set as the program No. 2) When the program No. is set from MDI before the NC tape is registered. The value of 0 on the tape is ignored, and the set value ls set as the program No. The subsequent program Nos. are set by sequentially adding l.
-
27r
-
9.4 Program trrlhen
Number Search
there are
many programs
in the memoryr one of them can be searched. or97
.-
Program No.
2
is searched.
1) Method t a) Select EDIT or AUTO node. b) Push the PRGRIi button. c) X.ey in address 0. d) Key in the program No. to be searched. CURSOR . r---'button. e)' Push l+l f) When searching is over, the program No.searctred is indicated at the right top of the CRT screen. 2) Method 2 a) Select EDIT or AUTO mode. b) Push the PRGRM button. c) Key in address O. CURSOR
button. If it is kept pushed in the EDIT mode, the regi-stered programs dre disglayed sequentially. (Note) After displaying all program Nos. registered, the display returns to the first one. 3) l,Iethod 3 a) Select AUTO inode. b) Reset the machi-ne. c) Set the signal for selecting the program No. on the machine si-de at 01 to 15. (For details, see the instruction manual of the machine tool builder. ) d) Push the cycle start button. The program No. (0001 to 0015) correspondlng to the signal on the machine side is searched, and automatic operation starts. (Note 1) The program No. is not searched when the signal on the machine side is d)
Push
1fr"
lnnl
(Note 2) Alarm No. 59 is indicated if the program corresponding to the signal
the rnachine side is not registered in the memory. (Note 3) In the reset condition, the cycle operation larnp is off. instructi-on manual of the machine tool builder.)
on
(See the
zAr
9.5 Deleting a Program f \1 \
.
\v/
To delete a pro€lram registered in memory.
t) Set the mode select swltch to EDIT. 2) Push the PRGRM button. 3) Key in the program number and push the I keyed in number will be deleted.
-
272
DELET
-
I button.
The program with the
9.6
(9)
Deleting All Programs
all programs registered in memory. l) Set the mode select switch to EDIT.
To delete
2) Press the PRGRM button. 3) Kev in address O. a) xey in I:1, lTl, [-tl, l-tl,
.gi
t'1
and
Fl
and push
the t DELEr 1 button.
;Punching a Program
To punch out a regi-stered program in the memory l) Make the Eape punch unit ready. 2) Set the punch code by setting parameter
3) 4) 5) 6) 7)
Set the mode select switch to EDIT. Push the PRGRM button to display the program directory screen. Key in O. Key in the program number.
button, and the program with the keyed number will
Push the l-ffiTl punched out.
ER
Program
Q)t
be
ER
t (z)
3 feet of feed holes
3 feet of feed holes
(Note 1) The space code for the TV check is automatically punched. (Note 2) Trro CRs are punched after LF in ISO code. LF
CR
CR
3) If the feed of 3 feet is too 1ong, push the TeAil button to stop ing feed holes nidway. (Note 4) pushing the I RESETI iutton stops punching.
(Note
9.8 Punching All Programs To punch out all the registered programs in the memory. l) Make the tape punch unit ready. 2) Set the push code by setting parameter.
3) Set the mode select switch to EDIT. 4) Push the PRGRM button to display the program directory screen. 5) Key in the address 0.
-
27_1
-
punch-
6) Key in
Fl, [-tl, l-e l, l-tl, l-tl,
3 feet of feed holes
and l-srARr
lbutton
I foot of
spaces
Program - -
I
Program
Fp. /o/\ \/o)
rogram
rogram
I foot of spaces
3 feet of feed holes
(Note) The order of punehed programs is irregular.
9.9
Sequence Number Search
Sequence Number Search finds a sequence number halfway in a program and it is usually used to start or restart the program at the block of that sequence number. A block or blocks skipped during the search does not influence the NC; the coordinate values, M, S, T or G code, etc. in skipped blocks do not change the coordlnate values and nodal values of the NC. So specify necessary M, S, T or G code, coordinate system setting, etc., in the first block at which the program is to be star$ed or restarted with the Sequence Number Search. The block searched for by sequence number search is usually at a break point in Ehe processlng. If it is desired to search and start a block during process, examine the condition of the nachine tool and NC and specify M, S, T and G code, coordinate system setting, etc. from the MDI as required.
ol1
11
02222 . ,. N4030
...
;
Object sequence number
Searched from its beginning (only within the program)
Selected program number 1\
Sequence number search for a program in a) Set the mode select srvirch to AUTO. b) Push PRGR-II button.
-
274
menory
-
03333 ....
I,II'
\/")
\
c) Select the program number to which the sequence number to be searched for belongs.
Program selected Range searched
to d) when the program contalns the sequence number; Otherwise, execute Program Number Search to select a program number to whlch the Proceed
sequence number belongs.
d) Key in N. e) Key 1n the sequence number to be searched for. . CURSOR .button. f) Push the 61 lYl g) The sequence number searched will be displayed top right on the (Note
the search is completed.
CRT when
Coordinate values and modal data are not altered during a search. Specify these data from the MDI after the search ends as requlred. (Note 2) During a search, the following items are checked. o Optional block Sktp ' P/S Alarm Check (Alarur No. 003 to 010) (Note 3) M98Pxx:o<(subprogram call) is not executed during a search. Searching for a sequence number within a subprogram called frou a currently selected program in AUTO mode generates alano No. 060. 1)
Subprograu
01234
05678
M98 P5678
N8888
In the above example, searchlng for N8888 generates an alarm. 9.10
Collating Programs in Memory and NC Tape
Turn on the protect k"y, execute the same operation as the registration of NC taPe lnto memory, and the reglstered progran and NC tape will be co1lated. 1) Select a mode (EDIT or AUTO). 2) Lock the protect key. 3) Load the program tape to be collated into the t.ape reader. 4) Push PRGRM button to display the program directory screen. 5) Push fINPUfl burron. 6) When the tape contalns several programs, collation ls performed rrntil ER (7") is encountered.
-
275
-
(Note I) A rnismatch during collation generates rhe alarm (p/s No. 79). (Note 2) If'the above operation is executed wi th the protect key released, the program will be registered into the memoryi the prograrn will not be co 1lated.
{
:.'
'1
r
j + :
9.11
:
Insertion, Changing and Deleting the Word
,.1
This function is used to modify a program in memory. I) Set the mode select switch to EDIT. 2) Push the pRGRM key. 3) Select a program. When it has been selected, proceed to (a); otherwise, perform a Program Number Search. 4) Search for the hrord to be modified. A scan or a word search can be used. 5) Modify, i-nsert, or delete the word. (Note 1) Words and editing unit A word includes an address and the number following it. But in user macros, the concept of a word is not clear. Consequently, "editing unit" is used. This is the object of modification and deletion in one operation. One scan causes the cursor to indicate the beginning of the editing unit. In insertion, data is inserted after the editing unlt. Definition of editing unit I) From one address to the next address exclusive. 2) The address is an alphabetic charaeter, IF, WI{ILE, GOTO, END DO, =, or; (EOB). According to this definition, a word is also one editing unit. The word referred to in the following explanation on editing should strictly dle termed the editing unit. (Note 2) It is not allowable to conEinue a program again after changing, inserting, or deleti-ng data to the program while temporari.ly suspending the machi-ning by single block stop, feed ho1e, etc. during the execution of the program, otherr,rise the program is not always executed correctly as specified by the program data being displayed on CRT after the continuance of rnachining. If it is desired to change memory data by parE program editing, change them under the reset condition, or perform a reset operation after editing without fail, before executing the program.
t
E
F .* ?:
{.L
11
$
*aE .
* : t
9.11.1 Word search 1) Word scan CURSOR a)\ N rusn tnef+ I
Nl 234X1
'tcey
3 S I 2 ; N5 67 8M03
00 . Ozl250
;
tr TTEE E The cursor moves forward word by word on the screen; the cursor displayed below the address character of a selected word.
a
It:
-
276
-
. o) vusn cne
CURSOR
I-T_l
.
burron
N1234X100
. 0z L250;
S5
6;
N56 7BM0
3
;
E tilEE
'-1-
=-J
The cursor moves backward word by word on the screen; trrie cursor is displayed below the address character of a selected word. (Example)
Scanned here.
PRGRFT4 CEEffi t lllz34 X1n.6 ZIm s12 ; FE6?€t I'[l3 ;
ffiB N123 t
YPP. t
r--l c/
Keep pusnlng cne
CURSOR
. or the
EDIT
CURSOR
r-;t
.
key to make a continuous search. [Fl . PAGE key ro display the following page d) Push the|-+_l and search the first
of word the page. PAGE e)-lf'Push the r:*l key to display the preceding page and search the first word of that page
f)
Keep pushing
.n" ffi tvtt+
o. ffi
key ro display one page afrer anorher.
-217 -
2)
Word search
A specified word is searched for from the current position in the
forward
direct ion.
. 0ZI
Nl 234Xi00 Currently searched word (word indicated by the cursor)
250 ; S I 2 ;N5 67 8M03
;
SI2 to be searched for Search dlrectlon
a) Kev in address S. . f-t] b) Key an I H I ano I F l. .l .. (Note i) Keying in only SI does not execute a search for Sl2. (Note 2) Keying in 59 does not execute a search for S09. Key in S09 to search for S09. "0" of S09 cannot be omitted. CURSOR 1---- -!n\ k"y starts the search. The cursor is displayed ..." -il" ! uolrrrr6 rhv,/ Prrchino below S in SL2 at the end of the searctr.
:
Til I
rf pushing the PlslR 1"r, the search starts 3)
Search
for
backward.
addresses only
A specified address is searched for from the current position in the forward
direction.
p
N1234XI 00. Oz 1250; s t 2; N567I M03 Current searched -word (word indicated by the cursor)
M03
to
;
be searched
for
in address M. CPT9 key starts the search. The cursor is displayed below Pushing -l+l1ir" M aE the end of the search. . CURSOR key, the search starts backward. If pushing the ;:-1"
a) Key
4) Returning the cursor to the head of a program O
I 1 0'0
N
0 0 0 I X L 2 . 3 4 3 Z I 5 . 6 7.; c 0 I X I 2
Head of program
5;
M
0
4
Current searched word (word l-ndIcated by the cursor
)
:
9
* i
(r
$
-218-
::
..{
't
I
a)
Merhod I
Press th" I ngSET I key when the EDIT mode is selected and E.he program screen is selected. f,he program will be displayed from its head after completing the heading.
b) Method 2 c)
Execute a Program Number Seareh. Method 3 Set the mode select s\^rirch ro a Push d Key the0. PRGRM keY. () in
@
Push the
g.11.2 lnserting r*rorU
AUTO
or
EDIT.
u"r.
ffi*
( I ) \u/ T15
Nl 2 34xl
to be inserted
00 . O21250;
S1 2 ; N5 57 8M03
;
To be searched for 1)
Search for or scan the word immediately before the insertion location in T (an address to be inserted.)
2) Key
l-r I . l-tl Keyinlrlandl.
r:r
4)
t
LJ-l'
ru"tt I rllsFill tey. PRMRtrl Wt
NI23/ xLn.A s12 :
W Zlm
i
t66?Er 1tr3 ; j422. ,
z
N}1.
T
EDIT
Before Insertion
-279-
NL?5/.
PRmRFf1 Wj
N1234 X1uB.6
s12
;
t'66'Ul
j@., z
ttt3
0ffi8
Zrm Tl5
N123
t
;
EDIT
After Insertion By a push on "INPUT" k"y instead of ttINSRT" continuous words can be inserted according to the setting of parameter (No. 18, EDTB=1). However, finally, press ttrNSRTtt or t'EOBtt key. (Example)
Key
i" col t iNpurl xI23. t rNpurl y4s6. t iwuil
Y456.F100; can be inserted at a time.
Froo
Iroal'
cotxt23.
(Note) The last word qE a block can be inserted as follows: lTlt1 (instead tTtil Key in zt00 of 2100 [ rNSRr lt r.gj lrtlsnnrl. rhe resulr is l;6; | the same. ) /(d\ 9.11.3 Changinsaword ( \u/\t )
N1234Xl
00 . Ozl 250T 15 ; S I 2
;
To be changed to Ml5
1) Search forlscan the word to be changed. 2) Key in the address to be changed. In the above exarirple, key in address 3) Key in data. ( [l )
4) Push IETER I ;"P
N123
4x I
00
. oz L 2 5OEJJ; s I 2 ; Modified program
-280-
M.
9.11.4 Deleting .
*rrd (
8) UI
Nl 234X1 00 . 0zI250T 21250
l) Search for/scan the
word
2) Push the l-onrEr I butron.
(
S
I 2;
to be deleted
to be deleted.
after deletion
Program
9.11.5 Deletins up to an EOB
I 5;
a\ D)
Current sea rched word (word indic ated by the cursor) N
I
23
4l
x I 0 0 . 0 z L 2 S 0 r I s M r 3 ;l s I Z ; deleted
ffi1
Pushing the I flR I and the I DELET I key deletes up to an EOB and causes rhe cursor l_"* I to move to below the address character of the next word. e.11.6 Detetins arcars
( 8 ) \u/
The area from the currently displayed word to the block with a specified sequence number is deleted. Current searched word (word indicared by the cursor) N2233 to be keyed in I
I
I
N1234M10;M15xl0
0;
Tt2;N2233'S12;
Area to be deleted
1) Key in address N. 2) Key in, 2, 2.3, and 3 in this example. 3) Push the l-5ftEt I key. The program up ro the N2233 block is deleted. cursor moves to the address next Eo the deleted block.
-
281
-
The
P,n I 'j
i'g.lZ \__
i,)l
Automatic Insertion of Sequence No.
By setting the setting pgI3*9!9f_ffe;i-9:
to automatically I " it is possible insert a sequence No. to each block-when programming via the MDI keyboard in
EDIT mode. When EOB is keyed in and ttren [-ttqSRtl key is pressed, the sum of the current sequence No. and Ehe incremental value (value set to SEQINC of parameter No.
0550) is automaticalty stored in the memorv. I) Set the setting parameter S-EQ to I.\
z) >erecE. trIJrt mooe. 3) Push I PRGRM I key. 4) Key in address N. 5) Key in the initial value of N, e.g. 10. 6) r,-,sh [-JNsRtl key. 7) Insert each word of the dat.a in one bIock. lti-l 8) Key i" I l.i" l. 4\
9
) Push [_]N$!J key. EOB is stored in the memory . In case 2 is set at the incremental value parameter, Nl2 is inserted to the next line and indicated. PRmRFT'1 Wt NlBG92nYAnt
cEtulS
twrz
ul2
EDIT
(Note (Note
9.13
N12 is desired qgt lo be inserted in the next block in the example above, push tft" FELET-l key ro delet Nl2. If Nl00 is desired to be inserted to the next block instead of Nl2 in the example above, key in N100 and push fgf,fgRl key. Wirh rhis, Nl00 is registered, and the initial value is changed to 100.
l) If
Background Editing
This function permits background editing regardless of mode selection and CNC nnn.lirinnc (in automat.ic operatlon or not, etc.). No alarm which takes place during background editing affects foreground operation. Conversely, background editing is not'affected by an alarm in foreground.
-282-
9.13.1 Registration from MDI
l) A push on the soft
key "BG-EDT't
after pushing El ". the right side on the editing screen.
program screen displays the background
PPO@fr1
(
B.i-EDIT
)
Eq^eq NZZgq
Ql,{=. FiUT|]
,-*.1;\[;"lf-_-][_-lE;;1 2) Specify a program to be edited. a) When generating a program: 01234 trNSERl-], f or example b) When edi ting th.e existing program: 0L234
[TER-fl, for
example
3) Program edit
The program editing is' the same as with the foreground program editing operation. Graphic conversational programming can also be carried out in the same manner as with the foreground program editing operation.
PRmRFf4
(
BG-EDIT
W.t
)
AAAA2 NAZZA
I
xB YA AA t r@ W xLA6. YtW. t l.EB @1 ZLA. FtA.s , N16 G92
Mg Y1g€.
r€B T61S1
f'133
;
;
r'5€ t'114 ;
Y7AWXAY8, t@; ADRS. NUTO
4) Background edit end It is necessary to save a program completely edited in background into the foreground program
memory.
r3-d:END-l
':1i4::..j 5:
-283-
--
1.
9.13.2 Registration from
CNC taPe
Registration operation is the same as r^Iith the foreground editing operation method, but in this operation, the Program is registered to the background editing area. The background edit end is required to register the program into the foreground program qemory like the back ground editing operatj,on. t) l-01 TProg;mNolf INPUf-l or [-rNpurl : It is registered from CNC Tape. 2) [BG-ENp ] 9.13.3 CNC tape punch CNC tape is punched
in the same procedure as in the foreground operation. As function is concerned, it is possible to punch out a program belng far as this foreground as we11. selected in No.l Prosr"' l-srenrl : The specified program is punched out. OE I The whole program is punched out. [=;te3l l-sreRrl @
E
(Note
In background editing, it is possible to edit programs other than a program being selected in foreground. If an attempt is made to edlt a program being selected in foreground, BP/S alarm (140) occurs. On the contrary, if an attempt is made to select a program being edited in background, in foreground (program number search and program access by external signal), P/S alarms (059, 078) occur in foreground. (Note ,\ No program can be input/output by the external start signal (MINP) or by the I/O device external control during the background editing. (Note J) For the background alarm, a P/S alarm similar to one which is seen during foreground program editing occurs; however, "BP/S" is displayed on the data rinput line of the background edit screen in order to discriminate between background and foreground alarms. This alarm is reset, automatically by editing operation (some input 1)
operation) . background editing is carried out, a vacant area (not used) may be present in the program memory. This area cannot be used as program memory as it is. Therefore, it is necessary to compress program memory in order to eliminate such a vacant area. This program memory compressing operation can be performed by a push on the soft k.y ttC0NDNS" or ttRESETt' on the foreground program direcEory screen. (Note 5) During background editing, all programs cannot be erased.
(Note 4)
9.14
When
Menu Programming
To assist programming in EDIT mode, the following menu is displayed on the CRT. 1) When G is keyed in, the G code menu is indicated on the lower half of the CRT s creen. 2) htren a G code selected from the menu in (t) is input, the standard format of the one block corresponding to the G code is indicated. For example, when G is keyed in after inserting N102, the G code menu dD shown below. is indicated on the CRT.
-284-
PROGRtrI'1 8L% , N10G92ruYAz3t r@ W xlw. Y-fi.
NPB
NWI38
t
bFa ./
Gffi : POSITiSIIi€
: 1i1.g1A 1P1. : CIRCLLAR IH_. ClJ : CIRCLL-CR IH-. Ccl.t @4 : DITELL G81
FA2
GA3
l.r_t'1.
G ilt
I
after G04 can be sequenrially indicared by pushing rhe lTl ot l-+l k"y. For example, when selecting G0l, key in 0 and l, and rhen prr"n rlrsnr-l I but ton. At this time, G01 is inserted to the memory as shown below, and the standard format of the G01 block is indicated on the CRT screen. The G code menus
PRIERFI1 UI@ t N1BG92}€Y8zlJt f@ GPB XLW. Y-9. fa6 861
X(Z,Y)_ 4re. @1
ffitffi
l2B3€
t
tl_ s_ T_ EDIT
Insertion of x
one
_ l-IffiTl,
y
block is cornpleted by keying in as follows: I
-rr^nm III\JKI
|
Ir -I
l-NsnT-],
TltrnDl I
PRmRFr.l ffi7n Btn t N1BG92reYAZIjt FeA GA Xtn. Y-fi. t fBa Ga1 >@. Y-&. FW M ; N48
EDIT
-285-
12248
|
lvu
l
.
'.)^'^' ..g.q.-Program Loading by TEACH lN Mode
,n" rEACH IN JOG mode and the rEACH IN If the prtyu."t-op;;;;;;;;l are added. In these modes, the machine position obtained by the manual operation is stored in the memory as a program position and a program can be created. The words other than X, Y and Z (O, N, G, R, I, J, K, F, H, II , S, T, P, Q, and EOB) can be stored in the memory in the same way as that conducted in the EDIT mode. l) Select the TEACH IN JOG mode or TEACH IN HANDLE mode. 2) Move the machine co che required positi.on. 3) Push the PRGRM key. 4) Enter the address ,X.* 5) Push the [-rllsnf Lt ey,-F.r, the machine position along the X axis is stored in the rnemcif!. X10.521 Absolute position (for metric input) Xl052l Content stored in the program [-E-l 6) Push ril |IIi; I, I INSRT | | I I and I fNSnf I tey, then the machine position along the Y and Z axes is stored in the memory.
HANDLE mode
-
Note 1) After entering the address X, 'I or Z, enter a numerical value and push I INSRT I key, then the value entered is added to the machine position. This is used to correct the machine position through key entry. Note 2) The coordinate value registered in this way will be an absolute coordinate value. Enter G90 (Absolute programming) at the beginning of the program. {r Note 3) The command to be entered before and after machine position shall be by the same operation as that conducted in the EDIT mode before ' entered and after registering the machine position, respect.ively. f t tn Note 4) Insert the EOB ( l;6; | ), the block registration completes. Example) 01234 Ni G92 X Y Z ; ... Point P0 N2 c00 c96-x-v-; ... Point Pl N3 cOl Z_Fm; ... - . . Point P2 N4 1402:
P0 0-----
{P
t^ I I
t I
I I
o
rz
The program of the above examplezis stored in the following procedure. I) Set the setting parameter "SEQt'to I (For the incremental value parameter, t'It' is assumed. ) 2) Select the TEACH IN HANDLE mode. 3) Make positioning at P0 by the manual pulse generator. 4) Push the PRGRI'I button. 5) Enter the address O, numeric value 1234, and push tftu l-fllSnfl t"y. Then the program number OI234 is stored in the memory 6) Enter the address N, numeric value l, and push the I INSRT I key. The sequence number I is stored in the memory as the initial value of the automatic insertion.
n
:l
i ii
'*
* :#
-286-
i
E s
7) Enter the address G, numeric value 92, and push tn" Fllffl tey. Then the G92 is stored in the memory. 8) Enter the address X, and push tn" f-iGiill t"y. __lEnter the address y, l-rNSRTl, address Z and push rhe I l;l I u"r. Then the machine position at p0 is stored in rhe memoiyl9) After the step (8), the EOB is inserred and inpur of rhe block AL234 Nl G92 X Y Z ; completes. 10) ny ttre step (g), NZ is stored in the memory by the sequence number automatic insertion function. ll) Make positioning at Pl by rhe manual pulse generat.or. 12) Enter the address G, numeric value 00, IINSRTI k.y, addrels__lQr_ numeric ^ r--=:----------value 90, I rxsnt I key, address X, ENSRI_I k"y, address Z, ana I i;i I in this sequence so that the 2nd block N2 G00 G90 X
i3)
memory.
Y
lEUpl
; is stored in the
N3 is stored in the memory afrer srep (12). 14) Make positioni,ng at P2. 15) Enter the address G, numeric valg1Ol, I lusnEl k"y, address Z, I rtqsnr I tuy, -T1]]'l| address F, numeric value 300, l;i; I in this sequence so that the 3rd block llvul N3 G01 Z---F300; is stored in rhe uemory. 16) Then the N4 is stored in the memory. Enter address l'I, numerie 02 and to store the final block N4 M02; in the memory. With lhis, registration of the program example is .completed. The contents of the program can also be checked in the TEACH IN mode with the same operation as in the EDIT mode.
PRIERF}T CRELATILE) x 3.ffi Y 23.T23 z 4.fi OIZU
OLZU
(AESO-UTE)
x Y z
t
69 XtWY8ZIZzffi, f€ Gm Gg >gEP5 Y2Tf8 t fS m1 Z-fr FW t t.]4l'@i N1
z
Are. Tlt{D
-287-
3.ffi -a.ffi
rW
23.723
9.16
Conversational Programming with Graphic Function
9.16.1
Programming
l) Depress the PRGRM function button. The screen will be displayed shown as follows if the other program has not. been entered. If the other program has already been entered, the currentlY selected program will be displayed on the screen wi th the usual format. W
PRGAI1
S
IAM
OT
EDIT
Fis.9.16.1 (a)
2) After inputting address O and the program number of the newly registered program for entry, depress the EOB key. When desired to entry the program of program No. 10, forFinstance, depress the EOB key after inputting 0, 1, 0 by key operations. A new program is then entered. 3) L{.hen depressing the soft key "IAP" on the screen of Fig. 9.16.1 (a), G code menu shown as following in Fig. 9.f6.1 (b) is displayed on the screen. wla vm
PRIERFI1
Gffi :
POSITIONING
GP1 : LINEAR IPI-. G@ : CIrctLtrR IPL. GA3 : CIRGIAR tPL. CO! B4 : U,ELL G16 : CFFSET \JALLE SETTII'G 61? : X/ Pt-$E G18 : Z< PLSE Gi9 : YZ PIAE PB : IFrchl @1 : I,ETRIC @11 : REF. POINT RETLRN CtEg< nm' C1,J
EDIT
Fig. 9.16.1 (b)
(b), input G code corresponds to the function 4) On the screen of Fig.9.I6.I one desires to program, by key operations. When desiring positioning, for instance, the G code menu shows G 00, so input G 00 by key operations. If functions desired for programming are not displayed on t.he screen, depress the Page Key I-+l and then allow to display the next G code menu. Repeat this operation ti11 the function desired for programming appears. If the function desired to program is not G code, leave it without key operationb.
After Ehat, when depressing the soft key "I,IENU", a detailed screen of the G code inpuE by key operations is displayed. An example of the detailed -288-
screen of G00 is shown in t.he following Fig. 9.16. I (c). When inputting anything by key operation, the detailed screen standard format is displayed. (See following Fig. e.16. i (d) ) PROGRFT'I
WrA tWB
Gm : POSITIONIT€
c@GG6 x L@. Y 56. _z -H OFFSET NO,
t1
,'
(x, ,'
Y,:,
the
WL 122ffi
PRMRff STCNMRD
of
FORT'IAT
-GGGG XY
)
z
HF R14 JI
1/ B/'
JK P8
E.'-'-rlnn
EDIT
Fig. 9.16.1 (c)
Fi9.9.16.1 (d)
(c) or (d), allow to travel 5) In the detailed screens of examples Fig.9.l6.i the cursor ti11 obtaining required data while depressing the cursor key. During this time, the address in the figure corresponding to data shown by Input numeric data by depressing numeral keys, the cursor will flicker. depress the INPUT key after completing to inputting one piece of data. Then, the inputting of one piece of data is completed. By repeating these operations, input all data required for the G code. (See following Fle.9.16.r (e)) PRIERNT GZI : POSITISIING WGGG x L@. Y z H l1
OFFSE
WBLA
54.
ISLA
f NO.
>
r' "
J.
7/ B
ull
E'B{,lnf-_.1 Fi9.9.16.1 (e)
b)
?\
With screen 9.16.1 (e), depress the INSERT key. Thenr orr€ block of data has (b) is registered in the program nemory. G code menu in Fig.9.16.I displayed on the screen, and another block of data is permitted to 'be entered, so repeat the operations from (4). After the registration of all programs is completed, depress the leftmost The programs that have been registered are then displayed on soft-key S] the screen, converted into the conventional format. Depress the RESET key to return the programs to the program head.
-289-
:,1?ff
9.16.2 Confirmation of
program
1) Depress the PRGRM function key. Search the program for which confirmation is desired by using the MDI key. (Depress the cursor key l-+l after inputting address 0 and the program number which you desire.) The program is displayed on the screen in the usual format. (See following Fig. 9.16.2 (a)) PROGRRh WLA t frtw eaa xraa. Yffi. tffi t"t?.2 ;
owlg tW :
gI EDIT
Fis.9.16.2
2)
(a)
After allowing the cursor to travel till the heading of the block for which confirmation is desired on the interactive conversation type screen, depress the soft key rrIAPrr, and then contents of its block are displayed by changing them onto the inte;:,active conversation type screen. (See following Fig. e.16.2 (b)) When contents of a block are displayed on the interactive conversarion type screen, eontents of its next block can be displayed on the interactive type screen by depressing the Page Key | * | (for instance) on the screen of Fig. 9.16.2 (b). Besides, by depressing the Page Key | + I as the same, contents of one block before can be also displayed on the int.eractive conversation type screen. F@r4 ffi : POSITIOTIING G G ffi-6 z H 11 5,'
OFFSET
wlg rwm
NO.
)
z'
J/
B/ ull
Fis.9.16.2 (b)
9.16.3 Editing of
program
While displaying the contents of the one blockr s program on the interactive conversation type screen, their contents can be edited. Editing of the program with the usual format was executed by one word units, including basic insertion, replacement and deletion. On the oEher hand, on the interactive conversation type screen, they are all edited by one block uniE.
-290-
Replacement of block
Allow contents of the block desired to replace to be displayed interactive conversatj-on type screen. After allowing the cursor to traveI till the heading of the block one desires to replace on the usual format screen, this can be executed by depressing the soft keyttIAP"; or from the beginning, by depressing the soft key rrIAPrr and bringing up the display of the interactive conversation type screen, and then repeating to depress Page Keys l-t-l or Fl. When replacing data, except G code which will be a headline, input new data by depressing the INPUT key after allowing the cursor to travel to the data required by using the cursor key and inputting a numerical value by depressing the numerical keys on Ehe interactj-ve conversation type screen. When replacing the G code itself which becomes the headline, depress the soft k.y "G.MENU", then the G code menu is displayed. Accordingly, select the G code required and input its numerical value by operation keys. For instance, when replacement is required to t.he feedrate, the G code menu shows G0l, so input 0i by k"y operation. After that, when depressing the soft key "MENU", the detailed screen of G codes that are already input will aPPeare.
Accordingly, refer to 9.16.1 (l) and input dara. When having completed the above replacing operations, depress the ALTER key. By this operation, one block of the program can be replaced just as it is. ,\ Insertion of Block Allow to display the block just before the section desired to insert a new block by using the Page Key on the interactive conversation type screen. On the usual format screen allow the cursor to travel till just before the section desired to insert a new block by using t.he Page Key or Cursor Key. After allowing to display the G code menu by depressing the soft key "c.MENU", refer to item 9.f6.l (4) and 9.16.1 (5), and inpur data of a new block. When completed the above inputt.ing operations for the data of one block, depress the INSERT key. By this operation, data of one block is inserted just as it is. ?) Deletion of a Block I A1low contents of the block for which deletion is desired to display. After that, by depressing the DELET key, contents of the block displayed in deleted from the program memory. On the screen, the contents of the next block is displayed with Ehe interactive conversation tyDe screen. 9.17
Number
Number
9.18
of Registered Programs
of registered
programs:
125 programs
Part Program Storage Length
i) Part program sEorage length Part program storage length ?\
(Standard; 63 programs)
Lo / 20 / 40 / 80
I r20 / 320 n.
can
be seleeted
No. of offset pairs 231641991200 pairs
-29r-
from
the
followine:
9.19 Editing
Operation Using Full Keys
The following operations have been allowed by full keys:
1) Editing of custom macro B 2) I'lodification and insertion of numeric value only. (However, deletion search cannot be made.) 3) Several words and blocks can be edited simultaneously. (However, the of characters edited should be within 32.) Note) Set the STDP of parameter No. 0014 to 0.
and
number
A program is edited when the program protection of EDIT mode has being cancelled in the same way as in normal editing. But the following points differ.
a) Shift key Press thettSHIFTttkey once to change the key i-nput cursor, which appears next to the key input data, from norm"t tt.tt tottntt. In this status, press the key with symbols or characters marked on the lower right corner of key top to a11ow those symbols and characters to be input. Input one character to a1low the key input cursor to return to normaltt
If the key input cursor is shifted, namelytt
3) /, (,=,
;
4) Top characters of IF, WHILE, GOTO, and DO One blank character is set before characters and symbols above on the CRT screen. A program is deleted, changed, and inserted with the area fron the above cursor position to Ehe position one character before the next cursor position being one unit. Example: Position of cursor
N00I xr-//100 ?Ft =
Tzt
;
;
5oo7 12 ]x .r2til31 ; N003 x-sQRr t#313 x ltt4
i-itz z+r : NOOS 7S = 1 +1 - /t10 ; rr itlT Ne 0l coror0 ; wHrLE ufz LE 5l DOl ; Ttzooo + +2) = +7 * To ;
Noo+
+ rll
;
Itz=#2+I;
lnoT
I
-292-
Note 1) The cursor does not stop Example)
( XI00. Y100.)
within
parentheses.
;
ThE-cursor does not stop at these posidions. However, when the parentheses are not a pair, the cursor moves as
following:
in
the
Cursor forward
I
LTo' jto9-tti"
Cursor backr"rard ( x100. Y100.
- T---:f-
Note
2) The cursor position
.rrr"or does not stoD here.
:
,ihe cursor srops here.
uay be changed by rnodifying programs.
nodifying rhe 2200 ia Xt00 z:200g using the 100,'ALTER" key, the XI00200 is obrained I{owever, there is no change in the following case; when insertion is made using the 100 ttINS'r key at the 2200 of X100 2200 ; , XL00 7200 f 001 resulrs. Never perform this procedures at the program number.
Example) By
d) Abbreviation of words of custom macro B When the words of custom macro B are changed and inserted, the top characters or more can be used instead of the whole word.
two
Namely,
c0 SQ BI R0 -
wD XO
\^II{ILE, XOR, cos, SQRT, BIN, ROUND,
TA AB FI EN -
WH
AN
WI{rLE, AND, TAN, ABS, FIX,
GO
-
S] -
GOTO
SIN
- ATAN BC - BCD FT] - FUP
AT
.
END
Exaurple) Keying in WI{ [AB [/|2]LERO I#3ll is rhe same as rhar of WHILE [/lzl LE ROUND t#31 l. A1so, rhe program is indicared in rhis
IABS
manner.
e) Control out/in Comments can be
wri-tten in programs. 0 SERIES) ;
Example) O000i (FANUC
Note l) The words of macro cannot be abbreviat,ed. However, do not input them by dividing them into two or more sectors since they rnay be converted. Note 2) The ttOtt, tt tt can also be input. Hotrever, cautions must be taken when inputting them by dividing thern into two or more sectors. Note 3) No period can be input af ter the rort and rtNrr even within the parent.heses ( ) . f
-293-
10. 10.
SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
1
Offset Amount
10,1.1 Setting and display of tool offset values (function t eyr lottretl)
Parameter IOF (No. 0001) selects absolute input and incremental lnput. I) Input of absolute offset value. a) Push [oFsgTl tey. (For the soft key, press the soft key lorrsEfll when the other screen is displayed.) b) Push a PAGE button to display the requlred page where the requlred offset number is given. W }'W FFSET Fn. mTA mTA ttr. ffi A-W LA.W _ffir Atg ta.effi w -L.ZzB a.w af. -n-w n3 g.em a.w atz w n.w 813 ffi A.W a.m a14 re 8.2ffi 6.m Bls w7 a-?ffi g.w aL6 m 0.828 MTLFI- POSITIO.{ (RELRTIL€) x a.w Y s-m
s.w
z
l.O. Wl
= I'IDI
c) Move the cursorto the offset number to be changed. Method I
Continuously
the
push
CURSOR
key.
The
cursor will
move in seguence.
CURSOR
Movine the Page.
Method Key in
[Tl
l+l
cursor beyond the
page changes the screen to the next
2
and
offset
number,.and press the
l-rNFilfl tey.
d) Input the offset value (input with decimal point is also possible) with the data input keys. e) rush [-tNPuT I key.- The offset value is input and indicated. (Exanple) I,"hen 15.4 is input for offset No. 25.
W |W FFSET h0. mTA mrA t'tr. g.w !5.M ar? Jffi m A.W 8.W a1B @7 A.m s-wB 619 @ a-m a.wB w @ 6.WB A.?n at a3a a.zffi 6.w @. a-m 431 a3 z.nB g.w 632. a-m w4 (RELATILE) rcTLH- PGITISI Y 8.w x s.w g.w z htr. m= MDI
-294-
2) Input of incremental offset value Input an increase or decrease value of the offset value a) Shift the cursor to the position of the offset number to be changed. (Same as l)-c)) b) Input the incremental value (input with declmal point is al-so posslble) with the data input keys. c) Push t INPUT-I button. ih" ittcremental value is input, and the offset value corresponding to the sum of the incremental value and the current offset value is indicated. This value indicated is the new offset value. (Exarnple) Offset value currently set z 5.678 Value input (incremental value) :' 1.5 New off set value z 7.178 (= 5.678 + 1.5.t (Note) When the offset value is changed during automatic operation, the neht offset value does not become effective immediately. It becomes effectlve after the H code specifying the offset No. corresponding to it is designated.
1O.2 Setting Parameter (Function key: lFFRAfvtl)
t) Set the mode select switch to
MDI. MDI STEP/HANDLE
key.
2) Push
3) Push
a
PAGE
button to display the setting parameter. @mt@B
PFRFT'ETER
(SETTII.G 1)
=6 -FEu( RELn/ A
= TIIN = O IS[l = I
(6:EIA
IlGl = A (g:l'tl l/o =g
r.o. RE\x
lsu )
Ir.0{)
=
4) Push a CURSOR key and move the cursor to the iten to be changed. 5) Input I or 0 according to the following description. a) REVX Setting X axis mirror image I : X axis mirror image 0N 0 : X axis mirror irnage OFF b) REVY Setting Y axis mirror image I : Y axis mirror irnage ON 0 : Y axis mirror irnage OFF
-295-
'
-}.'.\
|
-(Note) If X and Y axis mi.rror images become effective, the X and Y axis movement directi,on in AtlTO mode is opposed. However, the movement direction in manual operation or the movement { direction between the reference point and the intermediate point in auto- i'{{ matic reference point return are not opposed. i -1
c)
d)
TVON
TV check when registering a program from a paper tape into a memory. 1 : Perform TV check 0 : No TV check rso Setting code, IS0 or EIA, when punching a program in the memory onto nrnar
e)
{ 1
a
l-tna
I : IS0 code output 0 : EIA code output INCH
Setting a program input unit, i-nch or metric system 1 : Inch 0 : Metric
f) L/o - Setting reader/puncher device for prograrn input/output with reader/puncher /' interf ace. Select a device of a channel I set by parameters NFED, ASR33 and STEP2 (parametaer No. 0002) and BMTED (parameter N0. 0552) . Select a device of a channel 1 set by parameters NFED, ASR33 and STP2 (parameter No. 0013) and BMTE1 (parameter No. 0553) . Select a device of a channel 2 set by parameGrs NFED, and STEP2 (paramet6,er No. 0050) and BRATE2 (parameter N0. 0250). SeIect a device of a channel 2 set by parameters NFED, and STEP2 (parameter No. 0051) and BMTE3 (parameter No. 0251). g) ABS c.-.l+nL'i-^ between absolute and incremental comrnands in MDI mode. owrLgrrarrS I : Absolute command 0 : Incremental command h) sEQ Qarrino eequence number insert.ion automatically when registering a program in the memory using the keys on the MDI panel. (See section III-14. ll for details) I : Perform automatic sequence number insertion. 0 : Does not perform aulomatic sequence number insertion. i) Setting the tape format of l0/il series conversion. I : Tape format is converted. 0 : Tape format is not converted. 6) Push I INPUT I key. Each paramerer is set and displayed.
-296-
*
15. MECHANICAL HANDLE FUNCTION 15.1 Outline The amount of machine movement according to the stress other than motor driving power in servo off condition is reflected to various coordinate system of CNC
control unit. In CNC control unit, the nachine movement is followed up as if move conmand r{ere com-anded. So, when the servo po\^rer is turned on, the uachine position and the NC coordinate system value match each other. So, by using this function, it is possible to move the machine by hand using the mechanical handle. For this function, PMC is required. 15.2 Follow-up
DGN.
Signal *FLWU
No.
*FLWU
0104 *FLWU
I 0
Not follow up in servo off condition Fcllow up in servo off condition
This signal becomes effective when the system is provided with the mechanical handle function (optlon) and PMC. When the circuits for signals SVFX - SVFZ are closed, the servo off (No current flows to servo motors) condition is set. Since the positioning control does not function under thiF condltion, an error is produced when the machine tool moves. For thls deflection arnount processlng, the following remedles are selectable according to whether the clrcuit for signal *FLWU i.s open or closed. o When the circuit for signal *FLWU is closed; No follow-up function is alive. The servo error amount ls recorded on the error counter. In this case, the machine tool moves to cancel this error when the circuit for servo-off slgnal has been reset to be open. o When the clrcuit for signal *FLWU is open;. The fo11ow-up function is a1lve The present posltlon of the control unlt is changed to reset the error counter to zero, assumlng that the command has been applied by the moving amount of the machine tool.
In this case, the machine tool remalns devlated even after the circuit fot servo-off signal ls reset to be open. However, since the present position of the control unit changes ln correspondence to the rnachine tool position, the machine moves to the correct position when the absolute cormand is applied next.
No
15.3
follow-up functlons durLng the
emergency stop
or servo alarm.
Input'Signal 0
DGN.
No.
SVFZ
0105
svFx, Y,
zo
I
XrYorZaxls X,YorZaxls
-330-
SVFY
SVFX
servo is turned off. servo ls turned on.
14.2.3 Tool path drawing
1) Depress the soft key lmFfl after depressing the function the following will be displayed on Ehe CRT screen.
key
GRAPH/AIIX
wt rcnLz xY a.m g.w z a.w
S
BT
flJTO
2) The following machine movement are drawing by starting
the automatic operation. Note 1) Since the graphic drawing is done when coordinate value is renewed during automatic oPeration, etc., it is necessary t.o start the program by automatic operation. When necessary to execute only drawing, '
therefore, select the machine lock
mode.
Note 2) rn case the feed rate is high, drawing may not be executed correetly, decrease the speed by dry-running, etc. to execute drawing. Note 3) When the aut.omatic operation is started under reset condition, the program is executed after deleting the previous drawing automatically. Note 4) When necessary to display a part of the progran, search the display start block by the sequence No. search, and set the sequence No. of the end block to the PROGRAI'I STOP N of the graphic parameler before starting I the program under continuous operation mode.
-329-
14.2.2 Details of graphic parameter
1) AXES
2)
. Set the plane to plot.
AXES=0Select(1) AXES = 1 Select (2). AXES = 2 Select (3). AXES = 3 Select (4). AXES = 4 SelecrJ5). AXES = 5 Select (6). The rotating angle (horizontal , vertical) for isometric di.spaly of 5 and 6 is fixed at 45" in both cases. RANGET (uax. (MrN.
xJ= l=
),
)
)(=
l=
Set the maximum value/ninimum value of graphic range desired to display the screen. o Setting range: 0 - +9999999 (unit: 0.001 nm or 0.0001 inch) In this case, the value of MAX needs to be greater than that of MIN. Set the graphic ruagnification 3) SCALE (unit: 0'01 0 - ioooo0 o 100000 (unit: range: 0.01 tine) Setting 4) cRT
on
.ENTER [= |= /,=
Set the coordinate value on the work coordinate system at graphic center. Llhen MAX and MIN of MNGE are set, the values will be set automatically once drawing is executed. s)
.t
PROGRAI"I STOP
Set the sequence No. of the end block when necessary to partially The value is cancelled automatically once drar.ring is executed.
dispaly.
6) AUTO ERASE
1. Erase .the oldest drawing automatically when the automatic operation is started under reset condition 0. Not erase automaticallv.
* -328-
Example
Gc (=30mmJ0mm)
I
Graphic origin
When the corninand dashed line (---).
Graphic origin = work coordinate
of
ls given, the graphic point ls The tool path is shor.m with broken line for rapid feed G92
cutting feed.
moved
and
as
origh
shown by the
with full line for
14.2 Setting of Graphic Parameter 14.2.1 Setting procedure of graphic parameter
Various parameters need to be pre-set for plotting. These parameters can be set under any mode.
l) When the funcrion butron l@E-7ffi]
is depressed, Ehe parameter setting screen is displayed. In case the screen ls not displayed, depress the soft key the screen is displayed. I
following graphic FGlffil, by
which
PNRfl'ETER 92ffi2. NO',$ AXES 4 -ts (XY 4, YT- t, ZY=z, )C=3, )C/Z-:4, Z{y=S) R$GE ct'p<. ) x= 115@F rWS (NIN. ) RFI.GE )F AY= ab SCFLE K= n
GRTFHIC
GRFFHIC CENTER
X=
5?5m
PRTERFI1
fl.JTO
Y=
ST(P IF
ERffiE F
mF8 g' 1
P= t'oI
s
oT
2) Depress the CURSOR [L [Tl t" move the cursor 3) After keying in the nun r-ir data, depress ttre
4)
to t,he desired posirion. by which the graphic lffil, parameter is set. Perform the above steps 2) and 3) repeatedly to set all graphic parameters.
-327 -
As shom in the example of the above flgure, the maximum drawing range will be the area of approx. 144 nrn (wldth) x 108 mn (length). In case the range to draw ls greater than the maxlmum drawing range, the drawlng magnification is used. The drawing ruagnificatl-on is 0.01 to 100.00 times, which is usually determined as follows; o Drawing rnagnificatLon = Drawing magnification (H), or drawing rnagnificatlons (V), whichever is smaller o Drawing magnification H (length on program to horlzontal dlrection axis) o Drawing magnification V = o/ = R/(length on program to vertical direction axis) c : 144 nrn B: 288mn The drawing magnification is always based on the center of screen. Gc: Center of screen magnification Program Gc
After magnification
In case the tool path will not exist near the center of screen, enlarging the screen will cause the tool path to be drawn out of the drawing range. To avoid such cases, the following four graphic parameters are prepared t (range: X MAX.) " RANGE x (MAx.) (range: X MIN.) "O RANGE x (MIN. ) (MAX. ( MNGE Y range : Y llAX. ) ) (range: Y IIIN. ) " MNGE Y (MIN. ) O RANGE z (MAX. ( range : Z I'{AX. ) ) (range: Z IIIN. ) " MNGE Z (MIN. ) With the above parameters, the center of screen (Gex, Gcz) can be calcuLated as follows; Gcx=X(MAX.)+X(MIN.) Gcz=Z(MAX.)+Z(MIN.) The value will be 0.001 rnm or 0.0001 in. depending upon the input unit. The graphic origin and graphic center point will not be changed even if the work coordinate origirr is changed. In other words, the work coordLnate origin is always consistent with the graphic origin.
-326-
14. GRAPHIC 14.1
FUNCTION
Drarruing Range
It is possible to draw the prograrmed tool path on the 9-inch cRT screen, which to check the progress of machining, while observing the path
makes it possible on the screen.
rn addition, it is also possible to enlarge/reduce the screen. Tool path drawing is possible on six coordinate sysEems.
The size
of drawing screen will be as follows;
a
Gc: Center of screen
t I
54 mm
72nm
?2 mm 54 mm I I
I
-325-
C
:
{
Selection key PRGRAM
Software key LIB OR Selection key PRGRAM
Software key PRGRAM
Library screen
Software key FLOPPY OR Selection key PRGRAM
Software key PRGRM OR Selection key PRGRAM
Software key FLOPPY
Software key
READ
.Software key PUNCH
Software key
DELETE
Software key
SRHFIL
Software key
RET
Selection key PRGRAM
-324-
3) Delete
Press the soft key "DELETE".
The cursor indicates
File
No.
DELETE
FILE
Input File No e (?)
Press the soft key "EXEC". Delete the file with File No. designated by FILE NO. After execution, subsequent files are shifted up one by one. 4) File search Press the soft. key "SRHFIL". The cursor indicates File No. SEARCII
FILE NO. = I NUM.
EDIT
First,
Ent,er File No. Press the soft key
the file
ttEXECrr.
designated by FILE N0. is displayed at the head of the
screen. 13.7.3 Other precautions t) "CAN + INPUT"
of FILE NO. and PROGRAI'{ NO. becomes blank. 2) The left-end soft key when the soft key is indicating "EXECt' is a return key, which returns to the display screen of screen fornat No. I or No. 2. 3) Shift the screen from the directory display screen to other screens, and press the function key "PROGRAM": a normal program screen is selected. 4) The device type shall be a floppy cassette. Set parameter channel 1to No.0.0038 (RSCI,ID = 0), DEVFL = 1). Set paramerer channel 2 ro No. 0.0038 (RSCMD2 = 0, DEVFL2 = l). 5) For the numeral input ln the data input area with FILE N0. AND PROGRAM NO. ' only lower 4 digits become valid. Example: l{hen file No. = L2345678 is entered, 5678 is an actual data as Flle No.
6) When an improper data is entered into FILE NO. AND PROGRAM N0., an alarm (P/S 71, P/S 86) is produced. -9999 and -9998 of FILE N0. becone invalid. 7) Program read . with KEY (edit protect) signal OFF corresponds to program check.
8) The parameter is input and output on the parameter screen in the same manner as usual. Ilowever, the output file naue is reglstered as ''PARAMETER''.
9) The offset is input and output on the offset screen in the same manner as usual. However, the output file name is registered as "OFFSETi'. l0) Enter 0 in FILE No. and PROGMM No. "1" is displayed. 1l) On the program screen (not exclusively for the floppy cassette), no program can be selected autonatlcally for punching, and the program is punched at At this time, the designated prograrn No. , the last of registered file. becomes a file name. (The file name for 0 to 9999 is registered as "ALL PRGMM". )
-323-
(Example) FLOPPY A
Means Itcontinuerl Means ttlasttt
c
(No.): L (No.): No. :
No. of floppy disks
13.7.2 File input/output 1) Input (Read) Press soft key
"READ". The cursor indicates FILE indicates File No. previously cued.
NO.
At this time, FILE
NO.
READ
_FILE NO, = I
PROGMM
NO.
NI]M.
=
EDIT
2)
Deslgnate Filesl{o. to IIFILE NO. tt. Press the soft key "EXEC". At this time, input program No., program can be replaced and read. After execution, File No. is I up automatically. Output (Punch) Press the soft key "pUNCH". The cursor displays Program No.
No.
PIJNCH
_FILE NO. =
1
PROGRAM
NO.
=
NIJM.
EDIT
Input
Program
Press the sof
No. Program No. turns into the file t key t'EXEC".
name.
At this time, if no File No. is entered, punch a program at the last of the registered file rf F1le No. is entered, the program is punched at File No. designated. However, i-f File No. already in use is designated, subsequent files are deleted and .File Name is registered as ttFCA3". when all programs are punched in one fi1e, input -9gg9 to program No.
-322-
Screen format No.
2
DIRECTORY (rLoPPY) NO. FILE NAME
0001. 0002. 0003. 0004. 0005. 0006. 0007. 0008. 0009.
(METER)
20.5 40.7 32.2 7.5
PARAl"lETER
OFFSET ALL. PROGMM
00002 00003 00004 o0010 o0020 o0030
t0.2 2.6 4.9 11.8 5.5 EDIT SRHFIL
5) In screen format No. I or No. 2, when other soft keys than depressed, the display is as shown in screen format No. 3. Example: I{hen
the soft key
Screen format No.
"RLAD|'
is
6. 7. 8. 9.
FILE
3
00001 N0001 (METER) VOL.
NAME
20.5 40.7 32.2
PARAMETER
OFFSET
ALL.
are
depressed:
DIRECTORY (FLOPPY)
NO. i. 2. 3. 4. 5.
"PROGR.M,t
PROGRAM
'
7.5
00002 00003 00004
10.2
2.6 4.9 1r .8
OOOIO
00020 00030
5
.5
C01
READ
_FILE NO.
=I
PROGRAM
NO.
=
NIIM.
N0.
FILE
NAME
(METER)
VOL.
Indicates File No. Indicates the file name. The file capaclLy is converted to a paper tape for display. It can also be expressed in t'(FEET) ", using setting parameter (fnCU=t1. Indicates the status when the file has a multivolume.
-
321
-
Slide the write-protect key in the dbection indicated by the arrow.
Fig. 13.6.3
13.7 Floppy Cassette Directory
(b)
Write-protect key for FANUC CASSETTE
Display
This function displays the directory of floppy cassette for file outpuE
input
and
13.7:1 Display
The directory is displayed in the edit and background edit nodes. Following the display operation.,_ 1) Display a normal pfogram screen. 2) Press the soft key "FLOppy" or selector key "pRoGRAM" twice. 3) Screen format No. I is displayed.
1S
Screen format No. I
0000r
DIRECTORY (FLOPPY)
NO.
FILE
NA},IE
(I,TETER) vol,.
N0001
4) Here, press.the page key: screen format No. 2 is displayed.
-320-
il
#
for cassette Note 2) When reset operation is applied to the CNC during a request cassette the after reset but replacement, the CNC is not reset at once, has been rePlaced. 13.5.2
Cassette adaptor lamp conditions
The red and green lamps of the 1) Red laurp lights Writable: This larnp lights protect slide of 2) Green lanP lights Readable: This lanp lights 3) Red larnp flickers Write in progress 4) Green lamP flickers
5) 6)
cassette adaptor lndicate operating conditions. when cassette is inserted after setting the write
cassette uPward
(RECORD
side).
when cassette is inserted.
Read or searching of file head in Progress Red and green lamps alternatety flicker cassette is not lnsert.ed, or cassett,e exchange request Red and green lamps concurrently flickers File deletion in Progress
Note
is in progress.
l) Atl alarms occurred in the cassette adaptor are displayed as
alano
No. 86.
13.6.3 Write'Protest ksy
The cassette is provided with a write-protect key in order to Protect data written in the cassette when data is input, when file deletion is performed, etc. I) Writable Slide the write-protect key Ln the direction indieated by the arrorr (see diagraro). Data can not be written in the cassette'
Fig. 13.6.3
(a)
Write-protect kev for FANUC CASSiTTE 81/82
r:
-319-
13.4.2 Offset data input
The following operation enabl-es offset data input from the cassette to the
1) Z) 3) 4)
CNC.
Selecr the EDIT mode. Select the of f set screen by pressing I-brSET-l tey. Operate as same as program input operation. The input offset data will be displayed on the screen in the form of offset value input by prograrnming (GI0), after completion of input operation. R GIOP : 5) Select che ofGt data display screen and check that. the offset dara has been correctly set.
13.4.3 CNC parameter input
Thg following operation enables
CNC
parameters input from the cassette to the
CNC.
l) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Press the. EMERGENCY STOP butron on the machine side. Select the paramerer screen by pressing l-pAffi.l t.y. Set the setting data P\^IE to 1. Alarm PSI0O is displayed ar rhis rime. Operate as same as program input operation. NC parameters are input to the memory for NC parameter by this operation. Normally, alarm PS000 will activate after completion of paramet.er reading. 6) Set the serring dara pWE to 0. 7) Turn on the NC power over again if alaru ps00o activates. 8) Release the emergency stop button of machine side.
13.5 File Deletion The file
in the cassette 1) Select EDIT node. -
can
be deleted as follows:
2) Push I-PRGRI,I l. 3) Turn off the protect key r@\ \ lt ). 4) Key in address N. 5) Key in file No. I to 9999 to be deleted. 6) Push ttre l-sffiTl tey. With this operation, the k-th file input in (5) is deleted. Note I) After the k-rh file is deleted, file Nos. k+l to n change to Nos. k to n-I. Before deletion After deletion t to (k-r) I to (k-1) k
Deleted
(k+1) ro k ro (n-l ) Note 2) Deletion is possible only when the write protect key of the cassette is set to the upper posirion (RECORD side). 13.6
Precautions
13.6.1 Request for cassette replacement l^ihen one file has been entered
over two cassettes, the red and. green lamps on the adaptor fla'sh alternately on completion of data input/output between the first cassetce and the CNC, prornpting cassette replacement. In this case, take Ehe first cassette out of the adaptor and insert a second cassette in its place. Then, data input/output will continue autoroatical-Iy. Cassette replacement is pronpted when the second cassette is required during file search-out, data input/output between the CNC and the cassette, or fil-e deletion. Note I) Since cassette replacement is processed by the adaptorr oo special operation is required. The CNC will inrerrupt data input/output operation until the next cassette is inserLed into the adaptor.
i :{
-318-
13.3.2 Offset data output
The following operation enables the output of offset data to the cassette. i l) Select the EDIT mode. 2) Select the tool offset data display sereen by pressing OFSET key. 3) Press the START key. 4) Specify file search-out when required. For which file the offset data is output to, refer to 13.3.1. 13.3.3 CNC parameter output
The following operation enables the output of CNC parameters to the cassette. I) Select the EDIT mode. 2) Specify file search-out when required. 3) Select the parameter display screen by PARAM key. 4) Press che START key. For which file the offset data is output to, refer to 13.3.1.
13.4 Data Input Operation Observe the following procedures to input data from the cassette to the
CNC.
13.4.1 CNC program input
A program can be input fron the cassette to the CNC by operatlng as described ln "CNC tape input" after searching the file head in EDI'T or AUTO node as described above.
1) Search the file head. ' Push Nl to N9999, N-9999.or N-9998 l--ffil t.y. 2) Push INPUT button again. (Data is input by this operation.) (When changing the program No. r push as follows.: f O-l r program No. +
INPUT
button. ) (Note) If the above input operation is conducted by turning on the protect key (r(d\.V ) the program in the memory is collated with that in the cassette '
tr*"rpriiti;*r"."ring (Operation I) N2 [-rNPUr
I
N2
frNFur I
N-9999
Ns
N-eeee
ITTFI-fl] | ?t\lDrrT I rrrr ur
I I
I rNPUfl
f rNPUr I Slow
(Operation 3)
l-rNPUfl
INFUT-I
...
Second
file
FN-FU-f-l
...
Second
file input
t
N2
l-iNP-uT-l
rTN'mrl N4
to'fifrh files of the "r"".ttj ro the memory.
(Operation 2)
t-irFdf-l N3
second
head searching
[TN-mtl
| rNpur I ... Third file head searching [TFFU-T-] ... Third f ile input
|_Txmtl
t-lN-FTf] .. . Fourth f i1e head searching
l-rNPufll
N-9998
t-ffi]
... Third file input
N-eeee l-lNFtrT-l
frNpur Quick
fTFmil ...
Fif th f ile head searching
Fifth file input
I
Quick
-317-
Head search tlme
c)
N-9999
The file next to that accessed just before is searched. d) N-9998 When N-9998 is designated, N-9999 in (c) is automatically inserted each time a file is input or output. This condition is reset by the designation of (a), (b) or (c) or reser.
Note I) when files exist in the cassette, designations of N0 and NI resulr in the same effects. However, when the files do not exist in the cassette, an ararm is indicated if Nt is designated (since there 1s no first file). When N0 is designated, an alarm is not indicated since the head is searched regardless of the existence of file. conduct N0 head searching when writing the programs from the beginning of the cassette "fil.". after cancelling a new cassette or a1r of the Note 2) An alarm is not in'uoediately indicated in the cNC "*i"ai'g unlt even when an alarm occurs during head searching (when a file is not found, or the like). P/S alarm 86 is indicated when the inpui/output operation is performed arEer Enat. Note 3) The same result is obtained both by sequentially searching files by specifying Nos. Nl ro N9999 and by firsr searching one of the Nl ro N999b and then using rhe N_9999 searching nethod. The searching tj_me is shorter in the latter case. 13.3
Data Output Operation
Observe the follcwing procedure to output data from the CNC to the cassette.
output F A program can be output frorn the cNC Eo the cassette by the folrowing operation. 1) Output of one program . o + program No. + [-srenFl tey 2) Output of all programs o + _e999 * l-stenFl ruy lfith this operation, the program is output as the. new file after files existing in the cassette. A new cassette or a cassette in which old the files are made invalid and new files are to be written from the beginning, use the above output operation after the N0 head searching.
13.3.1 CNC program
Note Note
Note
Note
Note
r) when P/s alarm 86 occurs during program output, the cassette i,s restored to the condition before the outpuc. 2\ when program output is conducted after NI to N9999 head searching, new f_ile is output as the designated n-th position. rn this case, the r to n-1 files are effective, but the files the old n-th one are deleted. rf an alarm occurs during output,"rt", only the 1 to n-I files are restored. 3) The cassette is provided with the wrj.te protect slide. the slide to the upper position (RECORD side) and inserr the cassetteset ro rhe adaprer. rn thie condition, make sure that the red lamp lights. Then, start output operation. 4) Head searching with the file No. is necessary when file output from the cNC to the cassette is again input to ir," cNCthe memory or conpared with the content of the CNC memory. Therefore, irnme4i3g"1, after the file is output from the CNC to the cassette, record the file No. on the memo sheet of the cassette. 5) To efficiently use the memory in the cassette, output the program by setting parameter NFED of parameter No. 0002 or 0012 to 1.
:
{
:
.a
-316-
r
..1r"€€r,
13.
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC CASSETTE (B1IBZIF'II
13.1
What is a File
unlt of data, which ls lnput/output between the cassette and the CNC by one input/output operation (pressing the l-REID-l or l-?ffiettl k"y), is called a ttf iletr. When inputting CNC programs from, or outputting them to the cassette, for example, one or all programs within the CNC memory are handled as one file. Files are assigned file numbers I,2,3r4 and so on, with the lead file as 1.
The
Flle I One
File
2
File
File n I
3
Blan]c
flle can also be written over two cassettes as folLows:
Cas-
File I
sette I
Onee
2
ntinuation of file k
Cas-
sette
File
2
File
File(k-1) I
3
File n I
File (k+l )
written ln the cassette, data
can subsequently
FrLE k
Blank
be read out by correspond-
file numbers. This correspondence cannot be data contents and file numbers are outPut to the CNC and verified, unless the displayed. Therefore, wtren,writing data Ln the cassette, enter the file numbers and data contents in the memo column. ence between the data contents and
Entry example on MEMO File
NC parameters
File
Offset data
File
NC
Ftle (n-1)
NC program 00500
FiIe
NC program 00600
13.2 File When
n
progran
00100
Heading
the program is input from the cassette, the file to be input first nust
searched.
For this purpose, proceed as follows: l) Select EDIT or AUTO node.
2) Push l-Pnffil t"y. 3) Key in address N. 4) Kev in the file No. 5) Push ttre l-rllPur I tey.
The following head searching occurs aecording
a)
N0
to the nurnber speeified:
The beginning of the cassette is searched. b) One of NI to N9999 of rhe file Nos. I to 9999, the designated flle is searched.
-3r5-
be
12. DATA
OUTPUT
12.1 Tool Offsets The tool offsets set in offset memory can be output to the output device. The output data format is the same as the offset data input (programnable data input - G10 -) format specified by the tape command. l) Seting the data output interface. Set the data output interface in the parameter. Data can be output via the FANUC PPR, FANUC casset.te, or ASR33/43.
2) Setfing the output code Set whether the output data code is EIA or ISO. Set this selection to setting data. 3) Set the mode to EDIT. 4) Press OFFSET key. 5) Press START key. 6) Offset values are started to be output and OUTPTTT is displayed during output ting . 7) To stop the outputting, press RESET key. After the RESET key is pressed, output of remaining offset data cannot be started. 12.2
Parameters
The parameters set in NC memory can be output to the output device. The output data format is the same as the parameter tape format. 1) Setting the data ousput interface Set the data output interface in the parameter. Data can be output via the FANUC PPR, FANUC casserte, or ASR33/43.
2) Setting the output code Set whether the output data code is EIA or ISO. Set this selection to setting data. 3) Set the mode to EDIT. 4) Press PARAM. 5) Press START key. 6) Parameters are started to be output and "OUTPUT" is displayed during outPut t ing
.
7) To stop the outputting, press RESET key. After the RESET key is pressed, output of rernaining parameters cannot started.
-314-
be
11.9 Clock Time is displayed on the status indication line (line l5) setting I screen.
00001
PARA]"IETER
(SETTING
= REVY = TVON = REVX
0 0 0
and
thg parameter
N000i
I)
rS0 =0 (O:ErA INCH=0 (O:MM (0:INC ABS =0 sEQ =0
1:rSO)
1:INCH)
1:ABS)
NO. CLOCK =' I7H251"105S
Correction of time can be urade on the parameter setting I screen. llove the cursor to the itern'to be corrected, enter correct time, and then press the rrrNPUT" key. However no time is set if a negative value is entered or the maximun value ln each item is exceeded. Item
Maximum
Year I'1onth
99
value
L2 31 23 59 59
Day
Time
Minute Second
Note) The time at the status indication line (1ine l5th) is not displayed rhe "NOT READY'I is displayed.
-
313
-
when
HOLE PATTERN
:
Menu
title
An optional character string can be displayed within 12 characters. BOLT HOLE Pattern name An optional character string can be displayed within l0 characters. The machine tool builder should program character strings of menu title and pattern name by custom macro, and load thern into the program memory. Enter the desired pattern number by keying operation. r--] -;l: l, for example I TJIINPUT
2) Pattern data display When a pattern menu is selected, necessary pattern data are di.splayed. : BOLT HOLE M1@ t&glz NO. ].|ANE DNTA COHHENT Tma _5S8 541 KIJUN X E .BoLT HOI-E SAzKIJUNY A CIRCLE* 543 RNDILIS 8 SET PRTTERN 544 S. ANGL B DATA TO UAR. 5Z5r{_E. No a ND.5AA_5A5.
UAR.
566
a 5A? a ACTUq- POSIT IOI.I (RELRTITE)
x 6.ga@ g.w z f,€. W=
Y
I1D
BOLT HOLE
TOOL
....
*BOLT HOLE CIRCLE* :
@.w S gT I
Pattern data title An optional character string can be displayed within 12 characters. Variable name An optional character string can be displayed within l0 characters. Corment statement An optional charaeter string conment can be displayed
up to 12 characters/line, g lines. The machine tool builder should program the character strings of variable name and comment statement by custom macro, and load thern inlo the prograrn memory.
Enter necessary pattern data value. set the, cursor to a desired variable by udLd
vdruE.
r ' q |I _ rr\rul - lltl J llo il v llll Tl\.]F"h I, Iof
example
cuRSoR
E
tf
keys, and inpur rhe
After inputting all pattern data, select the AUTo mode, and depress the cycle start key, and the desired machining can be done.
-3L2-
,i*Ffi;i
b)
Usage
When
the
command
of
M02
or
1,130
is
executed, the re
parts and the number of nachined parts ar Therefore, create the program so that t
total number of dbv one.
machined
ar -eJ eggg e- 4-*-eJeJJ- !-lne i"€_9!_ ot. -par_t.-iE Furthermore, even if the M code set to Ehe pararneter ry count.ing is made in the sinilar manner. Also, it is possiJrle- to-*itle counting even if the M02 or M30 is executed the _proce
xs
$e:e When the
number of marc.--h1_-ed parts reaches the number of required parts' signal is output to the PMC. However, when the number of require-d. paEts is ttOtt (inf init{ maximum), no outPutismade.Fordetai1s,Sachinetoo1builders.
11.7
Alarm Display (Function t
IEAF'M])
When an alarm occurs and ALARM is displdyed at bottom, pressing the button displays the alarm message, as in the photo below. See APPENDIX 9 for the meaning of the alarm number.
I'EsSME 514 GrR 1gq-n : 536 o|.,|:R TRT.E- :
ALARM
WEB IWB
CL.€RI,I
+X
+Z
Note) When an alarm occurs the alarm message is usually automatically displayed. 11.8 Pattern Data and Pattern Menu Display
l) Pattern menu display a) Select an offset or custom macro variable cRT by depressin,
b)
Depres"
m
key again.
I.E}{.J
: HX-E PNTTERN
Ot@ NIWB
1. Bg_T t-g_E 2. GRID 3. LIF€ NN€-E 4. TAPPII.G 5. DRILLII.€
6. Bmlls ?. FOQ
S MDI
-
311
-
gT
Et#rlo.r.
I PART COUNT
:
RUN TIME
CYCLE
1
1.6.2
TIME
:
Indicates the number of parts. I^Ihen M02 or M30 is executed, it is increased by +I. To preset the PART COUNT to "0", press P and CAN key. Indicates the total run time during automatic operation' excluding the stop and feed hold time. To preset the RUN TIME to "0", press R and CAN key. (It is not preset Lo "0" by cutting off power. ) Indicates the run time of one automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time. This is automatically preset to ttOrr when a cycle sEart is performed at reset state. (It is preset to "0" by cuEting off power.)
Parameter setting screen
(m1 h@
Prnfl€IER (SETTIhG 2)
pt€ = 1 (O:DISAH€ 1:ElRHl) g
= -RElr4 TNPEF= A
I TgTfl- = A 15 PART CIII.IT = 1Ht6r,l cYol Tll€ anlgtE!; Ftl.t rric fO. RE\4 = FDI 29:3:l:43
PffiT
Pffif FFT|JIROE
lPffi*4
llFGll
ll
ll
I
a) Display contents and setting l) PART TOTAL (tota1 number of machined parts) It is incremented by one when the M code specified by M02, M30 or parameter fnO. --7T-91. i.s. commanded. The setling cannot be made on this screen. On-FTetting of parameter :(\0: !ll2)'can be made. REQUIRED (number of parts required)PART 2) It is used for setting the number of machined parts required. When the trOrr is set to it, there i-s no lirnitation to the number of parts. A1so, its setting can be made by the parameter FO:lqC] 3) PART COUNT (number of machined parts) It is incremented by one along with the total number of machined parts. 4) RllN TIME (operation time) The operation time added during automatic operation is displayed. 5) CYCLE TIME (cutting tine) The run time during one automatic operation is displayed. Note 1) Negative value cannot be set. Also, the setting of ttMtt andttStt of run time is valid from 0 to 59. Note 2) Even if a negative value is set to the parameter nunber 0779 of the total number of machined parts, a positive value can be displayed. Do not set a negative value since the value is decremented by one when counted.
-310-
iv) Actual rate display The actual feedrate per ninute of machine can be displayed on the current display screen and program check screen by setting the parameter (No. 0028 DACTF).
The actual rate is calculated by the following expression: n4
Fact
=
r (fi)z
i=I
where,
n fi
: Number of axes : Cutting feed rate in the tangential direction of each axls or rapid traverse rate Fact: Display speed The display unit: mm/urin (Input in units of mn).
inch/rnin (Input in units of inch. However' t\^to places below the decimal point are displayed.)
In the case of per revolution feed and thread cutting, the dtsplay speed is displayed by the speed per minute rather than that per revolution. Note 2) In the case of shift of rotary axis, the speed is displayed in units of deg/min but is displayed on the screen in units of input system at that time. For example, when the shift speed of rotary axis is 50 deg/rnin, the following is displayed: 0.50 INCtiiM Note 3) Display is made only during automatic operation on the program cheek Note 1)
screen.
11.6 Display of Run Time
and Parts Count
When this option is selected, two types of run time and number of parts are
'
displayed on the screen. 11.6.1 Actual position
screen
MN.r{- POSITI(N (ASILUTE)
o2@@@ NA19A
x Y z
RrN
-1,2.5@A -42.5@@
@.@@@
rrFE *,r- .*-ETIAfl -.J
t;_ll-.*lr*Jfun
-309-
ii) In the relatlve coordinate system (It can be displayed by pressing soft
key I REfl. )
rcTLrL PGITISI (RELATILE)
a@@@L
x Y z
224.359 285.449
TIt€ Ff,T.F tw 29: 18:21
R.H
N@A@@
[email protected] PRT qINT
1H1$1 Crc-E
llv'tl
B
TII€ A.l 1l'143S
-l[*'11-ll-l t"* lf*l'lDI
The relative position is displayed in which the position reset by operaEor is zero.
an
Reset oDeration
thG-G-Aisplayed, pr€ss the l-Xl, l-Fl or l-ilI tcey. The address on the display witl flicker. Then press the l-Tffi-l key. The relative position of the flickering address will be reset to zero.
ffi; lii)
Overall display
'
simultaneously:
(It can be displ€yed by pressing soft key lTi,L-].) The current position in the following coordinate system is displayed (a) Position in the relative coordinate system (RELATIVE) (b) Position in the work coordinate system (ABSOLUTE) (c) Position in the machine coordinate system (MACHINE) (d) Residual movement amount (DISTANCE T0 G0) trruf_ P(FITtg{
(REIJTII€)
xY &.* G. 156
4I.45 (Fm{r€) x 34.35Et Y .234 z &L.g?
z
tE61
(SEILIJTE)
r.@
xY &.*
S. 156 Z 4r.97
(DlsTF}G
TO Gn)
X E_641 Y W.Tn 7 1g,.5E,62 PRT CCI.|.|T 15 R_N TIt€ lt€Al CYCLE TIl€ Or 61455 FCT. F t@ rwtl 21:35: S llDI
IRE IIREL llflr
ll
ll
I
The residual movement amount lndicates the uovenent amount remalning in one block of a conrnand, and is displayed ln AUTO or MDI mode. The unit of the machine coordinate system is the saue as that of Ehe -achine system.
-308-
W2 IW, CHECK Wt ira egz >
RDRS.
f,JTO
F**'l I.*-*l l-**l F**l
f*l
The data is displayed only in |'AUTO" mode. For the display of a Page of block being executed withi.n the memory, the block being executed is displayed at the
top. The position (ABSOLUTE) in the work coordinate system or relative coordinate system (RELATIVE) and remaining movement (DIST T0 G0) are displayed. 11.5 Current Position Display (Function key. lilSl)
(1) Push tne IETI tey.
(2) Push a PAGE key. Data will be displayed in one of the following three ways. i) In the work coordinate system (It can be displayed by pressing soft key I-AEil.)
rruH.
PCSITI(N CNF(IUTE)
N@A@A ' 22A.261
o@@@1,
xY z
27I.58?
339.483
6 PrRT CofiT TtrG 1Ht3,| Crc-E TIt€ An il'ets ACT.F ten l'nfl llDI 2g:15:B
RrN
I"*ll
*"-
ll*ll-lt-l
The current value in a prograrmed coordinate system seE with G92, is displayed.
-307-
r I
111)
il
values entered fron the MDI or nodal values prevlously speclfied are displayed. (It can be dlsplayed by pressing soft key llmt l.l
Command
PR$RFr'r 0'1D I ) x Y
(]2m (ttrDnt_)
La'fl2 M.ffi
.
F
&B
G@R
\
G1?
P
GgB
O
G21
N
GgtH
2
. BlaS G49 T
fi
M138
15
w.
GM
Gga
6?
Are.
I'IDI
iiil
l**'l l"*".'ll-*l [_*;l T-_l
Hii
il
Display in MDI mode only
lv) one page includLng a block currently executed in the p 1ayed. (It can be displayed by pressing soft key I-FRGRM l. ) PRfERtr,I W: \t<9
program
ls dls-
TPM tg138
\g m. t VB Y-'78. : t Nlz€ Z-n. N13a G1? 4L GaL X1?.5 l€ FnzB t N74Z U2 G39 l-l?.s :
N1@ G32
N11A G!f1
N1s6 Br1 GA3 X-1?.5 Yi.?.s R1?.5 ; N16A G81 X-?F. t
Nr?€ GzP
N18[| G61
N1*t
BErt
p?.5 Y27.5 V7.5 X-15. ; )
Are.
A cursor 11.4 Display for
t
YEt ;
flJm
ls indlcated at the beginnLng of a block belng executed.
Program Check
The program check screen is displayed by pushing the CHECK soft key. The display includes the page for a program block in memory being displayed at present, th'd present positi-on, and modal value previously conuranded.
-306-
11.3 Command Value Display (Function key:
[FR-GF-M)
i) Push tt'e I-FIcnt't] tey. 2) Push a PAGE button. Data will be displayed in the following four'ways. (Each screen can be selected by soft keys.) i) Cornrnand values being executed, and modal values previously specified are displayed. (It can be displayed by pressing sofr t.y l-cunnrlrl.)
tP@ l€130
PRGRFT.I (CI-RRENT) x L?.v9 G61 F XEB G1?H 2
(l'nDfl-)
uL
F R 6I?P G91 0 63lH @1 M er1 s
G8A
GBA
m
GA1
2
G49 T
SEl s6?
Bf
AJTO
11) Cornrnand values being executed or to be executed next are displayed. (It can be displayed by pressing soft tey I nnxrl.;
PRGRFT,{ (ORRENT) x I?.frB G61F W G1?H 2
(FEfi) G3Er
tP@
I
I.813B
-t?.VB
G41
BA
Ef
RUTO
l'-*''11""...-l[_*;lnn
-305-
a)
PRoGRAM
NO.
USED
The number of the programs registered (including uhe subprograms)
FREE
b)
MEMORY AREA USED FREE
C)
PROGMM
LIBMRY LIST
.
The number of programs which can be registered additionally. The capacity of the program memory .in which data is registered (indicated by the number of characters). The capacity of the program memory which can be used additionally (indicated by the number of characters) .. Program Nos. registered are indicated.
Also, the program name can be displayed in the program table by setting the parameter No. 0040 (NAMPR). 0n the program name display screenr. the program number and program name are displayed.
PROGMM SYSTEM EDITION PROGMM N0. USED : I'IEI'{ORY AREA USED : PROGMM
00001 00002
8 FREE : 321 FREE z
0615
-
00010
N0001
01
I !
55 37 44
LIBMRY LIST (MACRO-GCODE. I'lArN)
(MACRO-GCODE. suBl) OOOIO (TEST-PROGRAM. ARTHMETIC NO. 1)
00020 00100 00200
or000
(TEST-PROGMM. FrO-MACR0) (INCH/Ift,1 G€NVERT CHECK NO. 1) (MACRO-MCODE. MArN) (MACR0-MC0DE. SUB1)
O2OOO (OFFSET TYPE-C CHECK PROGRAM)
ADRS.
EDIT
Note l) Always register a program name beEween the control out and control in codes irnmediatelv after the program nunber.
oDfrl
(aaaa. -__I
.
Program name (up
to 31 characters.)
Program number
Note 2) Note 3)
Up to 3l
characters can be used for naming a program within the parentheses. If 31 characters are exceeded, the exceeded characters are no! displayed. Only program nuurber is displayed for the program without any program name.
-304-
11.
DISPLAY
11.1
Program Display
A progran number in the photo.
and
a
sequence number
are displayed at the top right ' as W
PRMRtrI @;
seen
T:BL?9.
Yg Zn. t m1 6n Y-79. , lll?fj Z-',n. t N138 Gl? BI1 GB1 X1.?.s IJaP. FAEB ' Nr4E H2 Gi39 I-1?.5 ; N158 Bl1 m3 X-1?.5 Y1?.5 R1?.5 ; N16g GA1 X-8. t N1'7g GEP }u7.5 Y27.5 p7.5 , N1E[| GA1 X-15. ; N1*t G@ ru YA t N1@ G92 \i<9 N116
ADRS.
IIJTO
l**.1t"**.'ll '-.'l f-__l f--l the program ls being edlted tn EDIT mode, the program No. being edited and the sequence number just prior to the cursor are indicated. In case other than program edit, the program No. and the sequence No. executed last are indicated. Or, lnnnediately after the program No. search and sequence No. search, the program No. .and the sequence No. searched are indlcated.
Wtren
11.2 Displaying Program Memory
Used
Proceed as follows:
I ) Select EDIT rnode. 2) Push the PRGRM button. (For sof t key, press scf t tey [TnCml l. ) 3) Kev in address P.
4)
p"strlrllpurlbutton. Or re-push the
PRGRM
button instead of the step 3) and 4).
(]2@ l.o1$ WB _ 6L : S I FREE : 36 FREE 2 37TO I'E}.FV ARSR IJSED : PRTER*I LIMFff LIST EEBI WzB CEEEB VE$) BtN OT& u9@. wB3
PRGRtr'I
S/STE}I EDITI$I PRmRfl1 l.O. LEED
EDIT
-303-
# 6)
Shift the cursor to the offset number position in the l-6-1 rhe of f ser value
;",' ;'J:l#
7) Depress
rrNpur r played as an offset value.
::ij.
JJj
same
way as in setting
r---T,1
::r"ffi..:Jr:r|,*+1":n,,.
".,0
o,"-
Reference
tool This difference is set as an offset value. I
I I I
I
Fixing point
(Note)
n", is depressed "'E H or Y axis relative coordinate value is
rf
either
insread or t.r in 6), the l-9-l input as an offset value.
.:
,t
!t
-302-
T
FFI€L OLW IW3B SKIP : IOFF El.l -B-OA< Sltg-E B-OCK : FF l0.l lGCtlll€ LOO( : IFF S{ : IFF S{ DRI Rtfi PROTECT KEY : TPROTECT RELEffiE : IOFF til FEED F0-D
CPERITO?'S
MTLNL
x z
P6ITIO{
g.w g.w
(ABSO-UTE)
Y
g.w 6T
t"-"".lffi--il_-1l---1n [Tl or fTl key, and march rhe cursor ro the position of the desired Push l-Fl or [Tl key to march the mark ! ro an arbitrary positlon and set
c) Push
switch.
d)
the desired condition. 2) Jog feed operation a) Push the key to display the screen of the software operatorrs panel.
b) Select JOG node c)
Jog feed can be performed by pushing the desired arrow key. Jog rapid tr.averse can be conducted by pushing the key together with the arrow key.
Note l) When the CRT indicates other than the software operatorrs panel screen, jog feed is not conducted even if the arrow key is pushed. Note 2) The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set with parameters (paramerer Nos. 0f30 to 0135). 3) General-purpose switches Eight optionally definable switches are added as an extended function of che software operatorts panel. The name of these switches can be set by parameters as characEer strings of max. 8 charact.ers. For the meani.ngs of these switches, refer to the manual issued by machine tool builder.
/ 10.8 Tool Length Measurement
I/
--l:I Setect a reference tool, and attach the reference tool to the rnachine fixing point (or fixing point on the workpiece) manually. 2) Display the relative coordinate positlons by depressing l-pOS I and PAGE keys. tAl 3) Preset the Z-axis relative coordinate value- to depressing |)L |ana a.by -zero a,t.,t.1 | l-aAN
lkeys.>Ar z Z€laoecn^T*#''on' Cozt)
4) Select an offset
U"t. l_&_l 5) Select a tool to be measured, and aitach it to the page by depressint
I
I
same fixing point manually. A difference between the reference tool and the tool to be measured is displayed as the relative coordinate va1ue. (This is also displayed on Lhe offset page)
-301-
10.5 Pitch Error Compensation
Data
The pitch error compensation data is set according to the characteristics of the machine connected to the NC. The content of this data varies according to the machine model. rf it is changed, the machine accuracy is reduced. In principle, the end user must not alter this data.
10.6 Data Protection
key
A data protection key can be installed on the machine side for protection of parE program input and editing. For where the kev is mounted, refer to the manual issued by machine tool builder. 1O.7 Software Operator's Panel
I^lith this function, functions of the switches on the machine operatorrs panel can be conducred from the CRT/MDI pane1. The following can be conducted via the CRT/MDI panel. a) Group I : Mode select.ion b) Group 2 : Selection of jog feed axis, jog rapid traverse c) Group 3 : Selection of manual pulse g"o"irtor feed axis, selecgion of manual pulse magnification xl, xlO, xl00 d) Group 4 : Jog feedrate, feedrate override, rapid traverse override e) Group 5 : optional block skip, single block, machine 1ock, dry run f) Group 6 : Protect key g) Group 7 : Feed hofd Whether to operate from CRT or uachine operator's panel can be determined bv the parameter OPGI to OpGT (No. 017) for each group. I) Setting of mode selection, etc. t-- EE-r a)- Push | ALARM | .."::t-1.I.
b) ry"n ffi key to display rhe necessary page (rr can be"I1a disptayed by pressing soft t"v ftpft-l]l
Pfl\FL 01@ tt&I3A ; _IODE IF1DI FUTO EDIT t+{U_ JG ZRN FFNq-E RXIS : IFrX I{Y IZ. f-FND-E FllT. : l*1 'L@ RnPID O,RD. I ate2Y. gz 'f@ n4, FA Jm FEED : 5cE1 tt'l,,t'ltN Err FEED O.RD. : fff-r...... ACTI-H- PGITIS.| CNBSS-UTE) g.w x Y 9.@ UcEqqTO?'S
z
a.w
g1 t"tDI
-300-
i I '
in a__p.ereqgter value by data input keys. Depress s) lT?u-il. The paramerer value is input and displayed. h) After all parameters have been set and confirmed, turn to f)
?)
Key
the setting screen, and return the PWE setting to i i) Depress the RESET key ro release the alarm condition. When alarm No. 000 has occurred, turn off the power supply and t,hen t.urn it on, otherwise Ehe alarm is not released. Setting of parameters using a tape This method is effect.ive only when the reader/puncher i.nterface option is combined. Parameters can be input from the tape reader or teletypewriter ASR33/43.
7o
L F
L N
N
L N F
F
(a)
F
Vo
(
(e) N
*
L
I
0
D
0
0
0
0
I
1
L F
\+ (b)
(c)
(d)
Fis. 10.4.2 Parameter setting tape format
a) Punch 7" (ia case of ISO code) or ER or CR (in case of LF of EIA code) at the start of the tape. b) Punch the data number following address N next to the end of block code (lf i.n ISO code or CR in EIA code) . c) Punch Ehe data to be set after address P. Punched data at the address should correspond to the parameter number punched at address N. d) Punch the end of block code. Continue steps b), c), d), as required. A data number following address N must be punched at the start of each block. Leading zeros of parameter data following P are omittable. F LF and Z (in case of rso code) or cR or ER (in case of ErA code) t )--f) Punch finally. Data input from the tape is finished with'the input of these t codes. E t Parameters not speclfied on the tape renain unchanged even if the parameter setting tape is input The Parameter setting tape prepared by the above procedure can be input f according to the following proeedure. i) Ser PWE = I (CRT/MDI lanet). ii) Select EDIT mode on operator's panel. iii) Select PARAI'I on CRT/MDI panel. iv) Turn on INPUT button on CRT/MDI panel. v) SeE PWE = 0 (CRT/MDI panel). vi) Turn on RESET key on CRT/I'{DI panel. (Turn on and off the pov/er of CNC, if alarm number 000 occurred.)
(rf
?.
Note l) The tape stops traveling when any of the following alarus ls detected. i) TH or TV (with TV check rurned on) is in pariry error. ii) An address other than N and P was input. iii) An N or a P value is disallowable. Note Ll Depress RESET k"y, if iE is desired to stop setting from the tape halfway. Note 3) A part of parameters doesnrt become effective unless power supply is turned off (when alarm No. 000 occurred). Note 4) Parameters related to the reader/puncher interface must be set from MDI, etc. before inputting paramet.ers from the tape.
-299-
10.4.2 Parameter setting
1) Setting of parameters by using buttons on CRT/MDI panel paqE-l . a) Press I n"r. LEGI Press page key to display setting parameter page. (Ir can be displayed by pressing sofr key fSETmil.) PFRtr€TER
W
IWB
(SETTI}S 2)
jPtE = 6 (A:DISAE-E l:EMB-E) REU4 = A
m.
PlEi
TT-] _ Press cursor button and set the cursor ro PI^IE. Key l rurut l, and - in Ii jn ft-parameter is able to be written. NC is placed to P/S alaru No. 100 con-
dition.
b) Select tp_MD.lnFde (or ser rhe emdrgency stop condition). c) Depress I PaneU I key ro display parameters on the CRT screen. d) Depress the page key to display a desired parameter Daqe. (It can be displayed by pressing soft key lTExr l.l ' I
PARFT€TM f0. mTF _mt wtffi w. wffit @3 Wt w ww7 w6 w^r ffiwr@t6w w7 wwffi! w@w@raw wE w @74 Wtn
t
I'O. @11
|IPRR4 il
W IefEN hn. mTA e6tl w taIz w @13 W @74 W @ts w eftt1 11111111 e3L9 W @ @
= MDI
r-----l lloaruos ll u
e)
--_-.|
l
r
Shift the'cursor Eo the position of the parameter
Method I CURSOR
number
to be changed.
Depress FdGsoE-l tey. If this button is depressed continuously, the cursor shi.fts sequent ia1ly . If the cursor exceeds a page , the next page appears on the CRT screen.
Parameter number
a.'a
lrxFirill. !
I I
I I e
1
I
I
-298-
1
10.3 Custom Macro Variable common. variables (/l|100 to /1131, #500 to /153t) can be displayed on the the following procedure.
The
\NRIRH-E mTA fn. fo. rw 1@ _l@ T61 6 LW L@. -W LLA 143 6 ItI IU t?s€ffl.L LIz 166tL3f, 16 a L14 fn6115A rcI,.H- PGITIO.I (RELFTIl,E) x s.w Y
z s.w hE- L@
W
CRT by
|WEb
mTA A
$EM L$Pffi 1
A
mffi 6.WE
=
lrDl
the absolute value of variable exceeds the value 99999999, rr**********tr is displayed. l) Display .IMENT-I .butron. a)\ s Push t;:-:_ | I urJlr b) Display the desired page by pAGE butron. (It can be displayed by pressing sof t key I I,tecno-l.l 2) Serring a) Display the desired page. b) Move the cursor to the desired variable number. (Sane as item 10.i (l)
When
I
(c)
)
c) Key-in the variable value by data i.nput kev. d) Push I-INPUT lkey, and rhe input value is displayed. ' 3) Setting the coordinate value to variable a) Move the cursor to the desired variable number b)J* [-fl tr.. X axis) , (ror Y axis) or l ; | (for Z axis) while pushing
k.y.
E
lLl
c)-pustr'I INpUT I burron. The relative coordinate value for X, Y or Z axis is input and displayed on the variables. 10.4
System Parameter
Parameters must be set correctly so that' the servo machine tool specifications, and machine tool functions NC is connected to the DC servo motor or nachine tool. meters depend upon machine tools, refer to the atEached by the machine tool builder. 10.4.1 Parameter display
motor charact.eristlcs, are fulIy displayed when Since contents of paraparameter table prepared
l) Depress [-F-AnMl button on CRT/MDI panel. 2) Select a desired page by depressing page k"y (,T1,[r]).
-297 -
15.4 Caution
1) Work coordlnate system revlsed by follow up becomes effective {rom the next automatlc operation. 2) Inch/uretrl.c converslon functLon can not be used with this function.
.: ;'Jd;*t4t*ciuz
, / .,.
, ".r*;ii!'i"'
-331-
'
16.
DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF
OO-MB
The CRT/IDI panel of 00-I{B consists of a CRT display (14" color) and keyboard.
Contents of display and operation by k.y input are completely different depending on whether the CNC screen or I'ffC screen is displayed on the CRT/Mnf panel. In this manual, the operation when only the CNC screen is displayed ig described. Refer to the manual of machine tool builder for MMC screen.
Reset key
MMC/CNC switch keY
Shitt key
Start/ output key
Program
edit key
Input key
Function key
Fig.
16
CRT/MDI for 00-MB
-332-
*63ii'#
^:'!6*^
16.1 Display
Press "CNCtr key on the CRT/MDI panel to display the CNC screen when the MMC screen is displayed on the CRT display of the CRT/I{DI panel. The bnC screen consists of a variable section and a fixed section. The variable section is the part that is surrounded by the fraue at t.he bottom right, and its display contents are the same as displayed on the 9" CRT display of O-MB. Therefore' the screen selecEed by function k"y, page k"y, cursor k"y, and soft key is
displayed. The fixed section is the rest of the above variable section, and its display contents are position data, operation time (optional)' modal data,. and S, T command value, as shown on the screen in the Fig. 16.1. Display -iterns of this section cannot be changed by the screen selecEion operation. However, its display contents are always renewed. €N.E F(EI'IOI 6EOIJIE)
c!'|rn e .@60 0a@a9 ffi Er' rl'€ zn ,i a . oo@ @,a@a N@aag cl.'E'fc o'i"'6
x
@
Y
z I
omt 64@F 61?
R
649
S
BP 840 EIH 64n €I F *?
N}. _@1 @ @ a4 E G g, @ @ ale
DfiN !@tE @11 EW 011181t1 t11t0111
XT ott @12 613 a14 A!5 81118111 @15 at1!R111 017 4$ @Ll ef,t9 u@!4 &D !t@1ss
hTA
@ q&nt rogfim0
m @ @&D
0111111t
@@ @94 @
61
l-|r-rrqnntrlrl[ti-ll--l Fis. 16.1
16.2 Operation Key operation can only be done when the CNC screen is displayed on the CRT display of the CRT/MDI panel. Address keys and numerical keys are independently arranged on 00-MB. However, inputting data is exactly the same as that of 0-l'IB. The page key t *, cursor key t *, and selection key <- + on the software Press the operatort s panel are of combined use wich the function k.y. page key, and key on the key for use key, cursor selection as a corresponding software operatorrs panel. Press the corresponding key while pressing the ttFUNC" key as the function key. Five keys on the righc half ten keys are effective for the varl-able section, and Ehe other five keys on the left half are effective for selecting position display data in the fixed section.
-333-
.t
-i
:t a
a
:l
I
.l
:
tt
,,.,,,
, -:i!# .::.1
IV
MAINTENANCE
I
{
i-
*
1.
FUSE CHECK AND REPLACEMENT
a fuse blows ln a part of the CNC unit, find and correct the cause of failure and replace the fuse. Fuses used in the CNC unit are as follows:
When
1.1
Specif ication
Fuses used
in
of
Fuses
CNC
unlt are as follows: Table
of unlt
Nrtne
Power supply
the
1.1
Parts svmbol F11, Fl2
Units mounting fuses and specifications of fuses
Capacity
5A
Speclf icat ions A60L-0001
-0194 #5.0 Fr3
3.2
L
A60L-0001
-a046 F14
5A
113.2
Use
For 200V AC lnput power supply
For 24V DC for rnpstslr option PCB, and CRT/MDI unit Not used
A60L-0001
-0046 #5.0
Additional I/O 81
Input unit
F5l
Fl,
F2
1.6
A
l0A
A60L-000r
Protection from an external defect of machlne side 24V DC line
A60r-0001 -0901
For 200V AC input power
-0046 llr.6
PCB
#P41C0H F3
0.3 A
A60L-000i -0r72 /iDMo3
1.2
Mounting Positions of Fuses
1.2.1
Power supply unit
3.2 A fuse
(Fl3)
5A fuse (Fl4)
5 Afuse
(Fll,Fl2)
-337-
supply
Fot' power
ON/OFF
control clrcuit
1.2.2 Additional l/O
81
I
1.6A fuse (F5l)
.
1
\
b
j
t
DI/DO connectors
1.2.3 InPut unit Input unit rcB
*:n ll+ll :\J l-l >n -'t'
For input unit
without
Y
q
servo
-l
F--l .-
=b
:L
rpz
0.3A
Fuse
(F3)
10A Fuse
(Fl, F2)
i
; G .;
-338-
€-_ *
s
t
T
t
f 2.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1
1)
General
the type of problem: In what mode is the controller? What is displayed on the CRT/MDI? What is the status dlsplay? Is there a posltioning error? If so, on whlch axis and by what amount? Is there a tool path error? If so, by what amount? Is the speed normal?
Check
Is the problem in an auxiliary function? What is the alarm nuuber? 2) Check the frequency of occurrence: When did the probleur occur? What is its frequency? (Was another machine also being operated?) What is the frequency on the same workpieces? What is the sequence number? Which program is it; Is the problem related to a specific mode? Is the problem related to tool replacement? Is the problen related to the feedrate? 3) For re-occurring problems: Go through the program tape where the error occurs rePeatedl-y. Check the numerical value in memory of NC and conpare it with the prograrlmed numerical value. Is the problem due to an external cause? Check the stored offset amount and the amount remaining after distribution. Check the response to override (decrease or increase the override amount). Ask the operator about details of the problem.
2.2
Checking Input Voltage, Peripheral Conditions, Operation, Programming, Drives, Machine and Interface Control .
l)
Check the lnput voltage: Are there fluctuations in the input voltage? Is there a drop in the i.nput voltage? Is front or rear door opened (door interlock)? Is there some other device using large amounts of current? Is there an electrlc discharge machine or welding nachine nearby? 2) Check perlpheral conditions: What is the temperature of the controller? Did the temperaEure change? it excessive? Is the fllter dlrty? Is the tape reader dirty? Is there oil or cutting fluid about? Are there any vibrations? Is the unlt in direct sunlight? 3) Check for any external causes: Has the machine recently been repalred or adjusted? Has the magnetics cabinet recently been repaired or adjusted? Has the NC unit recently been repaired or adjusted? Is there a source of noise nearby? (Example: Cranes, High-frequency machines, Electric dlscharge machines) Has a new machine been mounted nearby? Is there another NC with the same problern? Has the user adjusted the NC? Has the sarne problem occurred before?
-339-
Is
4) Check phases of operation: Has the operator been properly instructed? Has the operator been rePlaced? Is the operator familiar with the program? Does the program finish too early or vras lt lnterrupted? Does the program contain an incremental command? Is the tool compensation value correctly set? If the tool compensation value was changed, was it done correctly? Does the rnachine change to another mode of operation? Is the block skip function used correctly? Is the tape set correctly? Are there any tape coding errors? Has the machine tool been operated incorrectly. 5) Check punched tapes: Is there dirt on the tape? Are there any folds or wrinkles on the tape? Are joints normal? Did the program previously run norrnal1y? Was the tape copied from a Baster tape? Was it the punched tape? Was the tape correctly punched? Is the tape puncher normal? I{as the wrong tape used? Is the puncher in good condition? 6) Check the program Is the program new? Was the program cr€ated according to the OPEMTORTS UANUAL? Are addresses in the right order? Does the problem occur in any specific block? Does the problem occur in the sub-program? Was the list of tapes created for checking? 7) Check for changes in operation Has any change or adjustment been made in the operation procedure? Has a fuse been blown? Is the NC in the emergency stop state? Is the machine tool ready? Is the NC in the alarm status? Is the MODE SELECT switch set correctly? Is the switch on the tape reader set correctly? Is the override switch set to the zero position? Is the NC in the nachine lock status? Is the NC in the feed hold status? 8) Check the machine itself: Is the machine properly installed? Does vibration occur during operation? Is the tool tip normal? Is there ahy offset due to tool exchange? Is there sufficient backlash compensation? Are there distortions in any part of the machine due to temperature changes ? Was the workpiece measured correctly? (1 meter of steel Was the measurement nrade at a constant temperature? changes lOp in length at a temperature change of loC) Are the cables normal (bent, broken or damaged)? Are the signal lines and power lines separated?
':
r-
;
it 'z
s
-340-
*
9)
Check the lnterface control: Are power lines and NC cables nounted separately? Is the shield normal? Is a noise suppressor attached to the relay, solenoLd, and notor?
2.3 NC System Check (No tools required) 1)
control unit external conditions: there damage to the cabinet? the CRT/I"IDI panel normal? the filter clean? the reader clean? the door of the reader closed? Has operatlon nade with the door open? Check that chips accurnulated on the cabinet did not fall inside when the door
Check
Is Is Is Is Is
was opened.
2) Cheek inside the control unit: Is there dirt in the control unit? Is the fan motor normal? Is there corrosion? 3) Check the power unit: Is the unit correctly connected? Are all fuses OK? Is the circuit breaker normal? Is the voltage htithin the allowable
range?
Are the shield and cable duct grounded correctly? Is the wiring path OK? Are all terml-nals fully tightened?
.4) The grounding Is the grounding connectLon OK? Is the shield ground OK?
5)
Check
all
cables:
Are cable connectors fully pushed ln? Are there any abnormalities in internal cables? Are there any abnormalities in external cables? Are there any scratches, bends or breaks?
6) Check prlnted circult boards: Are all PCBs mounted properly? Is the plug connector OK? 7)
Are physlcal condltions normal (no distortlons, etc.)? What is the PCB editlon? Are connections between prlnted circuit boards good? Check the CRT/MDI unir: Do the push buttons operate norrnally? Is the tape cable nornal?
2.4
CNC Status Display
l-t seems that the CNC is executing nothing during cycle operatlng status, the current status of the CNC is displayed on CRT screen at the diagnostic number 700, 701 or 712 by pushing the DGNOS burton.
When
-341-
F'
Diagnostic llo. 0
CSCT
0
0
7
CITL
COVZ
CINP
CDWL
CMTI\
CFIN
a digit is 'rlr', the corresponding status ls effectlve. CFIN: The M, S, or T function is being executed. CMTN: A move command in the cycle operation is being executed. CDh{.: Dwell is being executed. CINP: An in-position check is belng executed. COVZ: Override is at 02. CITL: Interlock signal (STLK) is turned on. CSCT: Speed arrival signal of spindle i-s turned on. When
Diagnostl-c 0
No.
I
0
7
CRST
CRST: One of the followlng: The reset button on the MDI panel, energency stop, or remote reset is on.
Diagnostic
No. ,,
I
0
STP
REST
RSTB
EMS
Indicates automatic operation stop or feed hold states. troub leshooting STP : The flag which stops the pulse distribution.
EMS :
: CSU : RSTB
2.5
These are used for
This is set at the followcondition. External reset signal has been turned on. Emergency stop signal has been turned on. Feed hold signal has been turned on. Reset button on the CRT/IDI panel has been turned on. The mode has been changed to the manual node, such as JOG, HANDLE/ STEP, TEACH IN JOG, TEACH IN HANDLE. (f) Alarm has been generated. (Soure alarms may not set the flag.) This is set when one of the external reset, emergency stop, or reset button has been turned on. This is set when t.he emergency stop has been set on. This is set when the reset button i.s on. This is set when the emergency stop has been turned orlr or when the servo alarm has been generated.
ing (a) . (b) (c) (d) (e)
RESET:
CSU
Display of Position Deviation (DGNOS No. 800
Diagnostic
-
805)
No.
0
8
0
0
SVERRX
(X axis)
0
8
0
I
SVERRY
(Y axis)
0
8
0
2
SVERRZ
(Z axis)
-342-
Position deviation value of X, Y, Z l4th, 5th and 6th axes in order. Diagnostic
No.
0
8
0
J
SVERR4
(4th axis)
0
8
0
4
SVERR5
(5th axis)
0
8
0
5
SVERR6
(6th axis)
2.6 Display of Machine Position from Reference Point (DGNOS Diagnoscic
i;
No. 820
-
'
8251
No.
0
8
2
0
ABSMTX
(X axis)
0
B
2
1
ABSMTY
(Y axis)
0
8
2
2
ABSMTZ
(Z axis)
0
8
2
J
ABSMT4
(4th axis)
0
8
2
4
ABSMT5
(5th axis)
r
I
0
B
2
ABSMI6
5
(6th axis)
The machine position from the reference point can be displayed on the CRT screen as fol1ows. i'
PtlSITI0.t (RET.CTII€) x 19.868 Y -?.*t z -27.?L6 (FM{IF€) x 5.141 Y -48. LZ? z L. r73
@24 tWffi
mTLH_
t.
CABSA-UTE)
X Y Z
18.86A
-7.W
-27.7L6
(DISTFTG TO E])
X Y Z
O.qBB
A-zBB
A.@B
T;_ll;-l|;_]T**ll-___l The values displayed under "MACHINE'| are these value.
-343-
#
I
V
APPENDIXES
APPENDIX
,naracter I
1
TAPE CODE LIST
S0 code t'
7
o o o o
o
o o
o
6
o o
7
q
9
3 2
I
Character
EIA code 8
'l
0 o o
o o o o o o o o o o o o o
5
at
5
o
3 4
6
o
o
o
o o 3
o
o 4 o o 5 o 6 o o o 7
o o
8
o
9
o o o o
B
o o
o b o o d o E o f o c h o lo J o o k
o o
o o o o o o o o
F
I
o o o o
o
o K
o o o o o
T.
!1
o
o
P
o
I
R
o o o o
5
o
T
o o
U
o
Y
U
o o o o o o o o
o o
o o o o
o
ti
o
A I
DEL
o o
O
o
o o o o o
o
o o o o
0
o o o o o o
o o
o o o
r
o
q
or
NL
o o o o o o o o o o
o o o
o
o
]P
?
u
J
)
o
o
o
CR o
o
SP o ER
o
o o o
o
or
EOB
o o
o
?
(2-4-7
)
-347-
Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address
P Q
R S
T U
V l.rl
X Y Z
Delete (cancel an error punch). x Not punched. Can not be used in significant section in EIA code. * Back space * Tabulator End of block
Carriage return
:t Space
o o o o
5
x
Jr
o
(2-4-s)
o
o
o o o
?
o
o
BS
o
o
o o o o o o o o o o
v
o
o
o o o
o Tab
o o
c
o o o
o
u
o z o o o De1
o o
o
4
Nuneral
cant information section in ISO code. Assumed as program No. tn EIA code.
o o
Blank
BS
o o o o o c
o
n
x o t
o o
c
o o o o o o o o o o
t
o o
NUL
-F
o
Numeral
Numeral 6 Numeral 7 Numeral 8 Numeral 9 Address A Address B Address C Address D Address E Address F Address G Address H Address I Address J Address K Address L Address M Address N Not used at signifi-
o o c
o o o
o
Nuneral 2 Numeral 3
c o
o o
p o o o
Nurneral 0 Numeral I
o o o o o o o o
o o o
o 1 o m o o n o o o
o o o
Meaning
I I
o o o
0
o
o
E
2
o
o
a
3 0
L
A
D
4
6
o
o o
o
Absolute rewind stoD Control- out (a comment is started) Control in (the end of a conment)
IS0 code Uharacter
8
7
.-
6 5
q
o o o o o o o
o
o o
I
?
Characte
o o 1-
o
o
r
1
EIA code 8 7 6 5 o o o
3 z
Meani-ng
I
*
o
o o
o o o o o
o
{
Colon
o
o o
o o
I
Positive sien Neqative sign Optional block skip Period (A decinal
o
o
c
poinE )
&
o
o
o
o o o o o
o
*
o o o
,
o
o
o
o
,
o o o
o o o o o
o o o o o o
o
o
o
o o
* Ampersand * Apos t rophe * As teri sk >t
1t
o o o
o
o o
I
o
Comma
* Semicolon * Left angle bracket * Equal Rj-eht ansle bracket Js
o
*
Ouestion mark
o o o
*
o
*
Commercial Ouotat ion Left brace
o
o
G
o
o o
o o o
.?
, Dollar sien &
o
o
o o
o o
(Note
* Sharp
o o
It
at
mark
Risht brace
*: when read in the 'significant
information section, the codes are ignored. (Note 2) ?: when readr in the signi.ficant information section, an alarm is generated. However, it is stored in the meruory. (Note 3) Codes not in this table are ignored if their parity is correct. (Note 4) codes with incorrecc parity cause che TH alarm. But they are ignored without generating the TH alarrn when they are in the comment section. (Note 5) A character wi-th all eight holes punched does not generate TH alarm even in EIA code. 1)
i
*
t t
r -348-
APPENDIX
2
The symbols
FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST
in the list represent the followings.
IP_:X
Y
Z
A ...
As seen above, the format cons{sts of a combinatlon of arbitrary axis addresses among X, Y, Z, A, B, and C.
x: First basic axis (X usually) y: Second basl-c axis (Y usually) z: Third basic axis (Z usually) Functions
Illustrations
Positioning
Tape format GOO ]P
(c00) Start point
Linear interpolation
GOI]P
F
:
(c0r )
Start point
Circular inter polation (c02, c03)
c17
GI8
Gl8
Dwel1 (c04)
{:33}' f G02't
lco:l
x
}
'
{:33
{X
Exact stop
G04;
of offset value by
GIOP
Change
,- [=-_i'
,
Per second dwell co4
(c04)
' - {l - , _ }' _t
R
-
program (ClO)
-349-
- i'
-;
_t
-,{} - * _ i' -,
;#
Functlons
Cutter sation (c3e
-
compenB
-
o4t
/-\/
$lorz /'l'v
c42)
Cutter compensation C (c40
I 1lust rat ions
c42)
Itl
Tape format
rcrTl f c40'l 1c18flc41l lcl9J \c42)
P
H: Tool offset
Yo40
J
Tool length offset A (c43, G44, c49)
I
c43l 7 vl --"-'
[c44J
Jc43 \ lc44 J
"
H
H: Tool-'offset Cancel G49; Tool length offset B (c03, c44, c49)
{:ii}t:n}ii
No.
-
':,
{:[]t:n] H: Tool offset G49z Cancel
Inch input : GzO Metric input z G2l
Inch/metric conversion (G20, G21) Reference poin return check (G27 )
-t-/"
Start point
Reference point
G28 IP _; G30 IF _;
rerurn (G28)
2nd reference
point return (c30)
G29 rP
Return from reference point (c2e) lntermediate Doint
Skip function (c31)
i:Tl'-s*
-350-
_;
functions Custom acro (c55, c66, c67)
Illustrations General format R/i k; m : Specifles macro c6sHnP#IQ/ij
functlons with 01 ro 99 /11: Variable number
Tape fornat
c6s HnP/llQ/ljRi/k; Modal call G66 P
G67:
... -;
Cancel
c80 c73 c74 c76 c81
...
Cancel
of operatlon result
#j: Variable number used ln oPeratlon (or constant)
/lk: Variable number used in operatlon
(Meantng) lfi=llt @ #t +
Operatlon
IIm
Canned cycles
(c73, c74, c76,
c80
-
c89)
xYz
P_-a_R_F_K_;
c89
Absolute/incre-
G90
mentaL program-
G91 G90 _
ming (c90/c9l) Change
of
coordinate
work
G92 IP'
G91
-; -;
(ce2)
Initial point return/R point return (c98, c99)
;
I point
R
c98 c99
point -t
Z point
-351-
_;
Ab'solute rncremental Combined use
#i.
APPENDIX
3
RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE Table 1
(a)
Linear axis {in case of metric thread for feed screw and metric input)
Increment system lou
Standard
o. 1u
Least input
0.01
0.001
0.000r
Least
0.01
0. 001
0. 000 I
+999999.99
+99999.999
+9999.9999
240,000
100 , 000 rnrn/rnin
24,000 rnm/nin
increment
command
inerement
Max. programnable di,mension
Max. rapid
traverse
*l
Feedrate range
*l
Step feed
I -
urm/min
150,000 mn/urin
100,000 nrn/nln
0.01 , 0. 1, 1, l0rnm/ step
0
Tool compensation
0 - +999.99
0
Backlash compensation
0 - !2.55 m
0
Dwe1l time
rnm
99999.999 sec
001, 0.01, 0.1,
0 0001
mur/step
0
0l,
+999.999
0
-
*0. 255
0
- 10.255
nrn
99999.999 sec
-352-
12 , 000
,
nrn/urir
0.001
,
0.1 rnm/ step
999.9999
rnrn
urn
9999.9999 sec
Table 1
(b)
Linear axis (in case of metric thread for feed screw and inch input)
Increment svstem lou
Least input i-ncrement
Least
cornmand
increment
Max. programmable dimension
Max. rapid
traverse
*1
Feedrate range
*1
Step feed t{.
Standard
o. 1u
0.001 inch
0.0001 inch
0.00001 inch
0.01
0.001
0.0001
+99999.999 inches
+9999.9999 inches
-F393.70078 inch
240
'
000 n'n/min
0.01
100
-
6,000 inch/rnin
,000
rnm/min
0.01 - 4,000 inch/nin
0.001, 0.01, 0. 1 inch/step
0.000r,0.001, 0.01, 0. I lnch/srep
24'000 01
-
mm/min
480
inch/min
0 00001,0.0001 0 001 0 .01
,
inch/ step
Tool compensation Backlash compensation
Dwell tirne
0 - t99'.999 inches 0
-
+99.9999 inches
!2.ss
+0.255
99999.999 sec
99999.999 sec
l: p F' |:i
-3s3-
-
199 .99999
-
+0.255
inch
mn
9999.9999 sec
:FG
Table 1
(c)
Linear axis (in case of inch thread for feed screw and inch input)
Increment svstem Standard
Least input
0.00I inch
0.0001 inch
0.00001 inch
0.001 inch
0.000I inch
0.00001 inch
+99999.999 inches
+9999.9999 inches
+9999.9999 inch
9,600 inch/rnin
4,000 inch/rnin
960 inch/urin
0.01 - 6,000 inch/rnin
0.01 - 4,000 inch/rnin
0.01 - 480 inch/min
0.001,0.01,0.i, I inch/step
0.0001, 0.00I, 0.0I, 0.1 inch/step
0.00001,0.0001,
increment
Least
command
increment
Max. programmable dimension
Max. rapid
traverse
*l
Feedrate range
*1
Step feed
Tool compensation
-
Backlash
- 40.255 inch
+99.999 inches
0.00r,
0.01
inch/ steP
0 - t99.9999 inches 0 - +99.99999 -inch 0 - +0.0255 inch
0 - +0.0255 inch
0-
0-
comPensation
Dwell time
o-
99999.999 sec
-3s4-
99999.999 caa
9999.9999 sec
Table 1
(d)
Linear axis (in case of inch thread for feed screw and metric input)
Increment system I0u
Least input increment
Least
command
increment Max. programmsflg
Standard
0.0r
0.00r
0.000 l
0.001 inch
0.0001 inch
0.00001 inch
+999999.999
+99999.999
19999.9999
9,600 inch/urin
4,000 inch/urin
960 inch/min
di-mension
Max. rapid
traverse
*l
Feedrate range
*1
Step feed
o. 1u
-
-
I50,000 rrn/min
01, 0.1, 1,
10
mrn/ s t ep
0
I
-
100,000 rnm/uin
001, 0.01, 0. t, rnrn/ s
tep
0 0
12,000 mm/min
0001,0.001,
01, 0.I nm/
Tool compensation
+999.99
+999.999
uur
-
s
tep
999.9999 mm
Backlash comPensation
*0.255 inch
+0.0255 inch
Dwell tine
99999.999 see
99999.999 sec
-355-
- +0.0255 inch 9999.9999 sec
-!G
qF
Table 1
(e)
Rotation axis
Increment svstem Standard
0.0001
Least input increment
0.001
deg
0.0001
deg
Least
0.001
deg
0.0001
deg
command
increment
Max. prograromable dimension
+99999.999 deg
+9999.9999 deg
deg
Max. rapid traverse
*l
100,000 deg/min
24,000 deg/rnin
Feedrate range
*l
1 - 100,000 deg/rnin
L - L2,000 deg/min
0.001, 0.0I, 0.1,
0.0001, 0.001 , 0.01, 0. I
Step feed
deg/min
Backlash compensation
0 - +0.255
deg
1
deg/ scep
+0.255
deg
Note to Table f (a) - (e)
*l The feed rate range shown above are limitations depending on CNC interpolation capacity. When ragarded as a whole system, limitations depending on servo system must also be considered.
j
I
t i: ;
t Z
I
it t
-356.t
APPENDIX
1.
4
MONOGRAPHS
INCORRECT THREADED LENGTH
The leads of a thread are generally incorrect tn 61 and 62, as sholrn ln Fig, l, due to automatic acceleratlon and deceleration. Thus distance allowances must be made to the extent of d1 and 62 in the program.
.
Fig.
1
Incorrect threaded length
1) 62 is deternlned by cutting speed V (nn/sec) and time constant (T1) of the servo system as shown below. 62 = Tl . V (m) (1) ..... ..... where T1 i-s in sec., and V is in nrn/sec. v is determined by thread lead L and spindle speed R as shown below. V = R (rpm) t (urn)/60 L (run) Lead of thread R (rpn) ..... spindle-speed o Time constant T, (sec.) of the servo system: Usually 0.033 sec. 2) How 61 is determined The value of 61 is determined by cutting speed V in thread cuttlng, tlme constant T1 for the servo system, and thread accuractttatt as shown below. 6r = {t - Tr * T1 exp (- f')i v (mm) (2) , t. a = exP ,(3) , . . o. . . . . . Tt, The lead at the beglnning of thread cutting is shorter than the specified lead, L and the allowable lead error is AL. Then,
a=T AL when the value of rrarr is determlned, the time 1apse, t, until the thread accuracy is attained can be calculated by formula (3) r The tine "t" is substituted in (2) to determlne 61. Constants V and T1 are determined in the same eray as for 62. Since the calculation of 61 is rather complex, a nomography is provided on the following pages. Instructions on how to read the appropri.ate 6l value on the nomography is shown below.
-357-
F.
{G a
,tr (V = lgpp/sec
)
y: !Q6p/sec
y: dQ66/sec)
Tirne constant of servo system
First specify the cl4ss and the lead of a thread. The thread accuracy' a, will be obtained at C, and depending on the time constant of cuEting feed acceleration/dece1.r"iion, the 61 value when V = 10 urn/sec will be obtained at @. Then, depending^on the speed of thread cutting the approach distance O, witt be obtained ar @ for other speeds than 10 mm/sec. (Note) The equation of 6-1, 62 is for when the acceleration/deceleratlon ti-me constant for cutting feed ls 0. Simple Calculation oll Incorrect Thread Length
ffi
l) o, = 2)
o,
=#'.
to.) (-1-1na) =
6z
. (-1-lna)
An t'att indicates the error allowances.
L: Thread lead (rnm) R: Spindle speed (rprn) * I'Jhen time constant T of the servo system is 0.033 sec. And the "1-lna" follows as below.
f
i
1
; d
- 1- lna
0.005
4.298
0.01
3.. 60s
0.015
3.200
0 .02
2.9t2 T
T
(Exanple)
R = 350 rpn L=1trmt a = 0.01 350xI ^ =ffi Oz= = 0.194
6l= 62 x 3.605 =
-358-
nm
0.701
J tl
,.1
.l
o
6 a FI
-.t
6
E
E
€6 trc
O
6
{{
eo
dtr ;6 76 Y> oo tr>
&d
'F9
N-
@ N
o
^O
Aa
@
o
(o o (,
N @ .ri
o
.!
€
.3 !,
C'
o o
-€o d
,ui Gt
.9s E o
{3
6zl
2 EeeE 3 I
I
t-
1c;
; 3 :^ .!9s R g 4..^
6 .,o-
I
_q6
I I I
q)
q
I
:
I
l-
-;3
ld
Ei Ea
I I
>J: 'r
il'
I I
3? oq
I
I^
l.E
Ec
Ei:
E E
oh 3 ll
>J:r!
@
o
lo
l' I
6
N ll
-359i
o, .E
o (! gt
o E
o
=a >{r to .E
i""Ei' rEc{6 6: Jhh9d
Ec
3? d> Ei; R\ >::
Ea .9^ E
z
2.
TOOL PATH AT CORNER
I) Descriptfon
sLrvo system delay (by exponential acceleration/deceleration at cutting or caused by the positioning systern when a servo motor is used) is acconpanied by cornering, a slight deviation is produced between the tool path (too1 center path) and the prograrmed path as shovm in Figure 2 (a). Time constant T., of the exponential acceleration/deceleration is fixed to 0.
Inhen
Yz Programmed Path
Tool Path
",f'
Fig. 2
(a)
-
Tool patch at cornering
This tool path is deternined by the following parameters: a.) Feedrate (V r, .Yz) b) Corner angle Gi c) Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant (Tr) at cutting (Tr=0) d) Loop gain of positioning system e) Presence or ab-.ence of buffer register The above parameters are'used to theoretically analyze the tool path. Itlhen actualJy programming, the above items must be considered and programrning must be performed carefully so that the shape of the workpiece is within the desired precision. In other wo::ds, when the shape of the workpiece is not within the theoretical precision, the comrnands of the next block must not be read until the conrnanded feedrate becomes zero. The dwell function is then used to stop the machi-ne for the appropriate period
2) Analysis The tool path t ions
shor^m
in Fig. 2
(b) is analyzed based on the following condi-
l
* t ,{
t
i: t
t
* .
:
a) Feedrate is constant at the block before and afcer cornering.
* { i ,1
t t
t
t
{ ! tt
-360-
controller has a buffer reglster. error differs with the reading speed of characters of the next block, etc. )
b) The
(The
Fig.2
(b)
the tape reader, number of
Gommand
(Conditions exPressions) Vxl=V'cos,/1 Vyl=V'sin91 Vx2=V'cos92 Yyz= V. sin q2
n-(4r-{2)=o
(Description of synbol) V : Feedrate at the block before and after cornerlng Vx1: X-axis comPonent of feedrate of preeeding block , Vyr: Y-axis conPonent of feedrate of preeeding block Yx2: X-axis comPonent of feedrate of following block Vyit Y-axis comPonent of feedrate of followlng block . 0 : Cornerangle block and X-axis tt:. : Angle forned by comrnanded path dlrection of preceding block and X-axis following of path direction ,!; : Angle forned by connanded
-36r-
Initial value calculation -ttt" ittitial value at which cornering begins, that is, the X and Y coordinates at the end of command distribution of the controller, is determined by the feedrate and the positioning system time constant of the servo motor.
Fig. 2
(c)
Initial value
(I) Vx1 (Tl + T2) : Q) Y; vyi(r1 + 12) time eonstant. (=0) fi, Exponential acceleration/deceleration(Inverse of position loop gain) system positioning Tz2 Tj-me constant of Xs =
Tool path analYsis +thefeedratesforthecornersectioninX-axis Ttre equations below i.rePresent direction and Y-axis direction.
d,} t'l - rt' exp,t Vxr. , -Vx2L1-fr{r1 'exP(-r,i) - 12 ' exp (- i)) T1+T2 t. ttr. ""p (- d)l-tr.exp,-t'rr]+vyz vy(t) =ffi
vx(t) =
(Vx2
- vxr) t r - #h;
{rr'
exP CE
+ vx1
l
(3) (4)
Therefore, the coordinates of the tool path at time t are calculated from the following equations:
x(r) = /f, v"(t)dt -xu Vx^ - Vxt
Tt -
Tz
{r? . exp (\41
l'
Y(y) = ,ilU-Vv(t)dt VY^ - VYr {r? 'z
.
exp
t', - ta'
,- ,tJ - r?
exp
(-
+ ] - vx2 (r1
'exp (- + )
-362-
- vyz (rt
3.
RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCULAR CUTTING
a servo motor is used, the positionlng system causes an error betyeen lnput commands and outPut results. Since the tool advances along the cornnanded segment' an error ls not produced ln linear lnterpolation, but when especially high speed cutting is performed in circular interpolation, an error is produced in the radius dlrectlon. This error can be sumnarized as follows:
When
Ar: Maximum radius error (m) v: Feedrate (m/sec) r: Circle radlus (m) Tl: Exponentlal acceleration/deceleration time constant (sec) at cutting (=0) Tzi Time constant of posltlonlng system (sec). (Inverse of position loop gain)
^r=+ since the machining radlus r (m) and allowable error Ar (rm) of the workpiece ls given in actual machining, the allowable lirnit feedrate y (m/sec) ls determined by equation (1). Since the acceleratlon/deceleration time constant at cutting which ls set by this equipment varies with the machine tool, refer to the machine tool builder's i.nstruction manual.
-363-
'q
APPENDIX
5
TAPE JOINING
punched tape is to be rnade or tape is broken or in similar cases, sections tape must be joined. Join these tape sections as described below. two two tape sections and paste them together, placing the section on a) Butt the on the side which the tape is fed' on top of the other. joint at which the two tape sections overlap must be approx. 3 pitches. b) The
If a loop of
, _-lr
3 pitches
Less than 0.270 mm
Direction of feed
c) l'lake sure the punched holes of the overlapped cape sections at the joi-nt are correctly aligned. IIse special care with the feed holes.
fi-t.ll
I
o
I
\Jl-., F
Correct
Incorect
d) Trin both edges of the joint to smooth
them.
Trim
e) Ilake sure punched holes are not clogged up with the paste.
-364-
APPENDIX
6
STATUS WHEN TUR NING THE POWER ON, WHEN RESET
Parameter (No. 045,. CLER) sets whether clear condition by reset or reset condition.
:
o: The status is not changed or the movement is continued. x: The status is cancelled or the movement is interrupted. When on
I tem
serrinE Offset value data Data set by the MDI setting oPeration
Other data
turning
power
When reset
clear
When
o
o
o
o
o
o
Parameter
o
o
o
Programs in
o
o
o
Contents in the buffer storage
x
mode mode
x
Display of
x
o: MDI
x: Other o
(Note
1)
o (Note
1)
sequence number One
shot G code
M
Repetition
G
codes. (G20 and G21
are
noE
changed. )
Zero
F
x
Inirial
Initial G codes. (For G20 and G21 the one eftectivi before cutting off the power is effective.)
I"lodal G code
S, T,
x
X
o
Zeto
x
o
o
x
x
x
Zero
o
o
count
specification (K)
Work ccordinate value
Action oper-
ation
Movement
x
x
x
Dwe11
x
x
x
x
x
x
Issuance of and T codes
M,S
Tool length compensat
a
o: MDI mode
x
ion
Other
modes
depend on parameter "RS43".
i I
i
I
-365-
Depending on Parameter ttRS43tt
When on
Item
Cutter
Action
in
turning
power
When
x
o: MDI mode x: Other mode
x
x
o: MDI mode x: Other mode
compensation
oper-
Storing called
ation
clear
When reset
x (Note
2)
(Note)
output
I
Extinguishes if there is no cause for the alarm
ALM
signalsl
for
indicaEron
of
I
Extinguishes if there is no cause
for the alarm
Extingui shes
if there is no cause for the d!4lur
|
x
x
NOT READY
(Lights in
LEDs
Extinguishes
BUF
REFERENCE POINT
emergency stoP)
o: MDI
Extinguishes
mode mode
x: Other
x
(x:
RETURN COMPLE-
TION LED
(Llghts in
emergency stop)
Emergency
stop)
t
(x:
o
EmergencY
stop)
S, T and B codes
x
o
o
I'1 code
x
x
x
M,SandT strobe signals
x
x
x
Spindle revolution signal (S analog signal)
o
o
o
ON
o
o
CNC
ready signal
(MA)
Servo ready
signal CYCLE LED
.START
FEED I{OLD LED
0N (When other than servo alarm)
0N (When other than servo alarm)
A
x
X
x
ON (When other
than servo alarm) x
(Note 1) When heading is performed; the main Program number is displaYed. (Note 2) When a reset is performed during execution of a subprogram, execution returns to Ehe head of Ehe main program. Execution cannot be started . frsrn the middle of the subprogram.
-365-
t
ir 's.
APPENDIX
1.
7.
t:
I
PARAMETER LIST
PARAMETER DISPLAY
1) Press the "PARAM" k"y to select a parameter screen. 2) Key in Address No. 3) Press cursor key or page key to change the screen instead of Address
No;
too. Set parameters to 0 without fail,
if their usage is not specified in the following detailed description. Parameters dontt always function unless the CNC function (option) is provided, even if their usage is specified. Confirm which paraueter options 3re mounted in advance. Note) The name of parameters on upper side are used for only T series: f or__Tutning machine (0-TB,..-00-_TB) , the names of Parameters on are used for only M series: CNC for Machining center (0-l[B,
CNC
i
,l 'I
.{
-:1 e'.
1 I
l
I ,l
;l .l il
Parameter No.
Bit RDRN
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Remarks
No. 1:
0:
Dry run is effective for rapid traverse. Dry run is not effective for rapid traverse.
Declaration signal "1" in reference point retu;n indicates deceleration.
DECI
1:
oRc
1: Offset value becomes a radius designatlon. 0: Offset value becomes a diameter designation.
IOF
l: Offset value is input in incremental value. 0: Offset value is input in absolute value.
TOC
1: Offset is cancelled by reset button. 0: Offset it not cancelled by reset button.
RS43
1: Offset vectof in G43, G44 rernains in reset state. 0: Offset vector in G43, G44 is cleared in reset state.
DCS
1: Pushing the START button on the MDI panel directly actuate the CNC start without going through the machine side (MDI mode only) 0: Pushing the START button on the MDI panel issues the signal to the machine side. The CNC start is actuated when the CNC receives the start signal
ir E.
F i
i'
it I
from machine side.
I
\ t
't'
F'
-367-
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
PROD
Displays progranmed position in current value displaying for U and W. Displays actual posi-tion.
1:
0:
Less command increment is input in inch system. (Machine tool: inch 'systern) Less command ingrement is input in metric system. (Machine tool: mm system) If you want to change this parameter, turn off
1:
scI\I
Remarks
0:
power.
o
0
0
NFED
TJHD
NFED
TJHD
IiSLE
ASR33
PPD
STP2
2
l
Pi'OfY2
Ploryt
ASR33
PPD
STP2 )
Bir
T
No.
NFED
1:
0:
TJHD
t: O:
Feed is not output before and after progran is output by using the reader/puncher interface. (Sg.!_ "1" f or FANUC cassette. ) reEl*ii o"tp"t befd;;;"-a*"ii"r program is ourpur by using the reader/puncher interface. (Effectiver(rhen the setting parameter I/O is 0.) Handle feed in the TEACH IN JOG node by manual pulse generator is possible. Handle feed in the TEACH IN JOG mode by manual
pulse generator is not possible
the manual pulse generators are provided for two axis, the axis selecting signal is valid
When
HSLE
0:
(When the axis selecting signal is off, the manual pulse generators can not operate.) When the uianual pulse generators are provided for (The axis whose manual pulse generator is rotated is moved regardless of the axis selecting signal.)
(Note) PI'O(Y2, I
pulse generatgr is provided, set 0 to this parametei
When one manual
The shift direction in canned cycles G76, GBl . Pldff2
PlorYl
Shift direction
0
0
+x
0
i
-X
0
0
'1-
I
I
-Y
-368-
I
Ine Daucl rate is set with parame ter No. 0552.
, *J .i
T
I tt
T {
Parameter No.
I:
ARS33
I:
0
Bir PSG2,
0
PSG2
PSGl
HSLE
TLCP
OVRI.
zt{,4
zM3
ZI,4Z
ztfi.
OVRI
zyw
zlu
ZI,[Y
ztff.
3
No.
1
Gear
0:
2l
ratio of splndle and position coder. PSG2
PSGI
xl
0
0
x2
0
I
x4
1
0
x8
I
I
Magnification
l:
GST
s43
6
7
Magnification
I{SLE
M series)
In the reader/puncher interface, the stop bit is set by 2 bits In the reader/puncher i_nterfaee, the stop bit is set by I bit. (Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 0.)
1:
0:
0
:
Remarks
The relative coordinate value is preset when the coordinate system is set. The relative coordinate value is not preset when the coordinate system is set
0: STP2
Lower
The 2OmA current interface is used as the reader/ puncher interface. FANUC PPR, FANUC cassette, or portable tape reader are used as the reader/punch interface. (Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 0..)
0:
PPD
: T series,
Parameter (Upper
r=
Number.of position coder rotation
the manual pulse generators are provided for three axes, the axis selecting signal is valid. (When the axis selecting signal is off, the manual pulse generators can not operate.) When the manual pulse generators are provided for three axes, the axis selecting signal is invalid. (The axis whose manual pulse generator is rotated is moved regdrdless of the axis selegting signal.) (When one or two manual pulse generators are provided, see ttOtt to Ehis parameter. )
When
-369-
f
Parameter No.
TLCP I: 0:
t:
GST
0:
The tool length offset is perforrned in the axis
direction being normal to the plane specified by plane selection (G17, G1B, c19) (Tool length offset B). The tool length offset is performed in the Z axis irrespective of plane selection. (Too1 length offset A). Gear shift is performed by SOR signal when S analog is outputted. (Spindle speed is constant) Spindle orientation is performed by SOR signal when S analog is outputted. (Spindle speed is constant)
Setting values 0 and I can determine the direction in which the override value increase. See table 6 (a) in following page for details.
OVRI
21"ff, z\N
zl4z,
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
zl44
(0M)
The reference point return direction and the backlash initial direction at power on for X, Y, Z and 4th axis in order.
l: Mlnus 0: Plus
(Note) file Uactfash compensation is inirially performed when the axis moves in the opposite direction against the direction which is set by this parameter after the po\^rer is turned on.
zux,
zttz
ztq3,
zl{,4
(0r)
The reference poi-nt return direction and the backlash initial direction at power on for X, Z, 3rd and and 4th axis i-n order.
l: Minus 0: Plus
-370-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper
Pararneter No.
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Table 6 (a) Relationship between Overrlde Signals and Override Value
Contact status Machine side kov
Parameter OVRI=0 Over-
ride
I *ov2 *ov4 :tovt
o
10 20 30 40 50
o o
o
60
o
o
o tr J
J
t
tti
o
o
o
.o
o
1)
(Noce 2)
(Note
o o o
3)
Over-
ride
svstem sys ten
0
0
nm/
inchl
1507"
min 2.0 3.2 5.0
min 0. 0t 0.1
140 130
70
t2.6 20 30 50
continue feedrate Me tric Inch
0.2 0.3 0.5 0.8
L20
L.2
L2 6 0
50
nm/ min 790
inch/ min
500
30 20
320
L2
tl0
200
8.0
100 90 80
LZA
).u
79
3.0
50
JA
70
32 20
1')
o
120
320
o o o
130
500
20
30 20
12.6 7.9 5.0 3.2
140
790
30
t0
2.0
0.8 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0. 0i
150
r260
50
0
0
0
o
o
continue feedrate Metric Inch
z.o 3.0 5.0 8.0 t2
o o o
o
(Note
70
o
I'tanual
svstem svs t en 07"
o o
Parameter OVRI=l
Manual
on
80 90
79
I00.
r26
110
200
60 50 40
o indicates signal is open and blank indicates signal is closed. When the override switch is changed during axis movement, the axis moves at the new speed. Generally, this signal is designated by the override
switch. (Note 4) In the above table, the speed error is +32.
-
371
-
Remarks
Parameter No.
0
0
Bir
0
0
Bir
0
0
Bit
0
0
Bir
0
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
DMRX
GRDX
DMRX
GRDX
DMRZ
GRDZ
D},IRY
GRDY
Dl,lR3
GRD3
D},IRZ
GRDZ
D},IR4
GRD4
.+
No.
0
5
No.
0
6
No.
0
7
No.
-372-
Remarks
DMRX
to
Setting of detecrive mulriplier
DMR4
Setting
Detective rnultiplier
code
Digital servo
Analogue servo
654 0 0 0 0
0 0
0
r/2
I
I
0
1
2
t I
I
I I
2
0
0
3/2
s/2
0
I
I
I
I
0
I
I
GRDX
3 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
I
I
I I
5 7
4
/2 4
Capacity of reference counter Except for 0.lU 0. lU detector
code
Analogue servo
3210
I I I
I 3/2
to GRD4 Capacity of reference counrer Setting
I
r/2
0 0
0
1
0
I
I
I
0 0
0
I I
0
0 0 0 0
0 0
0
I
0
I
I
I
I
0 0
0
1
I
0
I I I 1
I
I
I
I I
detector for Digital servo 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000 I 1000 I 2000 I 3000 14000 15000 I 6000
2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 8000 10000
I I
-373-
for Digital servo 10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 7 0000 80000 90000
r00000 r 10000 I 20000 I 30000 140000 r 50000 t 60000
Relationship
Metric
among DMR, CMR and
GRD. (In case of System series
T)
system
l,loving distance
per I revolution of motor (Pulse coder) 12
Axis
Counting (de tec tion)
unit
Detect multiply
Command
ratio
nult iply ratio (cm1
(um) X
I
z
1
|
Capacity of
(DMR)
Pulse
Pulse
Pulse
2000
2500
3000
ference counter
re
/0.5
4
6000
I
4
6000
mm
,t I
r/0.5
X
10
10000
4
10000
Z
I
X
I
z
I
8mm
X
I r
/o.s
4
8000
4
8000
t
s
zl'+
6000
2
6000
Z
I
I
X
1i0.s
t
2/4
5000/ 10000
z
tI
I
2
5000
X
1/0.s
I
2/4
4000/8000
L
I
'|
2
4000
3
nrm
4mm
X
, X
2
|
/0.s I
1/0.s I
1
L.5 /3
r/2
3000 / 6000
I
1.5
I
3000
I
r/2 1
r
2000
2000 / 4000
ntm
Z
I
I
X
0.5
2/r
I
2000
X
0.5
2
I
2000
lmm
In thq above table, right side value is in diameter designati-on, and lett eiae value is in radius designation in X axis. ?\ Data in the above table is standard. Command and detect multiplY in that case there is limit for maximum but changed, ratio can be feedrate.
Note 1) Note
*I
-
374
T
*
F
'&
j
1
1/0.
6mm
3mm
*g 6
mn
5
.I
-
t*, Relationship among DMR, CMR, and GRD. (In case of series T)
Inch svstem ltoving distance per I revolu-
tion of motor
Count
Axis
(Pulse coder)
tion)
unit (
10-4)
Command
urultiply ratio (CMR)
Pulse
2000
2500
3000
2l+
6000
Z
I
t
3
2
6000
r
/o.s
I
Z
I
I
X
L/0.s
I
2/4
Z
I
I
2
x
r/0.s
I
L.s /3
z
I I
I
2/a
s000/ r0000
2
5000
4000/8000 4000
r/2 I
t\
3000/6000 3000
/O.s
I
r/2
5000
L
0.5
n L
2
5000
X
r/0.s
I
r/2
Z
I
t
I
X
0.5
2
I.5
I
3000
Z
0.5
2
1.5
t
3000
x
0.5
2
I
2000
7
0.5
2
I
2000
x
0.25 lnch
0.2 inch
L
0.15 inch
L)
Pu I SE
3
0.4 inch
Note
Pulse
Capacity of reference counfer
I
l\
Note r)
rario (DlR)
1/0. s
0.5 inch
0. I inch
Detect rnultiply
X
0.6 inch
0.3 inch
ing
(de tec
2000/4000 2000
In the above tab1e, right side value is in diameter designation, left side value is in radius designation in X axis. Data in the above table is standard. Conunand and detect nultiply ratio can be changed, but in that case there is limit for naximum feedrate.
-
375 '-
Relationship anong DMR, CMR and GRD. (In case of series
Metric
M)
system
oving distance er I revoluion of motor Pulse coder) 12
mm
l0
mm
Counting
(detection) unit (um)
Detect nultiply ratio (DMR)
Command
mult iply
rat io
Pulse
Pulse
(CMR)
2000
2500
Capaclty Pulse 3000
I
1,1
re f eretr1,1,
counter 6000
4
i
2
8mm
1
I
t
4
6mm
I
I
3
5mm
I
rI
4m-
I
I
2
3mm
I
I I
t.5
2mm
I
I
I
2000
lmm
0.5
L
.'
I
2000
r0000
4
8000 6000
2
5000
2
4000
I
3000
Note l) Data in the above table is standard. Command and detect multiply ratio can be changed, but in that case there is linit for maximuur feedrate.
Inch system Moving dj-stance
Counting
(detection) unit
0.6 inch
i
I
0. 5 inch
I
I
(
1o-+r;
0.4 inch
roult iply
ratio
Pulse
Pulse
Pu 1
(cl,IR)
2000
2500
3000
I
I
0.5
2
1
1
0. 15 inch
0.5
1
0. I inch
0.5
2
0.2 inch
ratio (DlR) 3
.
2
S€
Capacitv of reference counfer 6000 5000
I
0. 3 inch
0.25 inch
Detect rnultiply
Command
per I revolution of motor (Pulse coder)
4000
2 1
3000 5000
2
2000
I 1
3000 2000
Note 1) Data in the above table is standard. Comrand and detect mult ip lyratio can be changed, but in that case there is lirnit for maximun feedrate.
-
376
-
:'ij -. r:.-
.'.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No. E
F
l r
0
0
EILK I
F I
BiE
NOFC
ROVE
I4FPR
OTZN
ROVE
ADW2
8 ADWI
ADWO
No.
l: Interlock is
performed for each axis. L is necessary.) 0: Interlock is performed for all axes or for Z axis (it needs that No. 012 ZILK=I) on1y.
EILK
(FANUC PMC-MODEL
i
NOFC
l: Offset counter input is not used. 0: Offset counter input is used.
OTZN
I: Z axis sEored strok check is not done. 0: Z axis stored strok check is done.
ROVE
1: Rapid traverse override signal effective. (1002, Fo) 0: Rapid traverse override signal (
is
R0V2
is effective.
100%, 507., .257" Fo)
1: Manual synchronous feed is done. 0: Manual synchronous feed is not done.
}MPR
ADW2,
ROV2
ADI4I1
Name
of the 4th axis
ADWO
ADW2
ADWI
ADWO
Name
0
0
0
A
n
0
I
B
0
I
0
c
0
I
I t
U
I
0
0
V
1
0
I
w
t I
t
0
t\
t
I
I
A
-377 -
noE
Remarks
Parameter No.
0
0
Bit
0
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
TMF
TFIN
TMF
TFIN
9
l0
43,2
No.
TMF
Time from M, S, T code issue to MF, SF, TF issue. Setting range 16 to 256 msec. (16 msec increment)
TFIN
Time of reception width of FIN. Setting range 16 to 256 usec. (16 sec increment).
T code TF
FIN
LI
I
Fl! signal is ignored, TMF
because X < T FIN Parameter
TFIN
setting
msec
More than 16 msec
0
0
0
0
32 msec
More than 32 msec
0
,0
0
t
48 msec
More than 48 msec
0
0
I
0
64 msec
More than 64 msec
0
0
1
I
80 msec
More than 80 msec
0
I
0
0
96 msec
More than 96 msec
0
I
0
1
12 msec
More than l12 msec
0
I
I I
0
128 msec
Mcre than 128
0
t
I
I
144 msec
More than 144 msec
I
0
0
0
160 msec
More than 160 rnsec
1
0
0
II
I 76 msec
More than 176 rnsec
I
0
I
0
192 msec
More than 192 msec
I
0
t
l6
1
msec
-378-
I
Remarks
Parameter (Upper : T series; Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
0
I
More than 208 msec
I
I
0
0
224 msec
More than 224
rnsec
I
1
0
I
240 msec
More than 240 msec
I
I
I
0
256 rnsec
More than 256 msec
I
1
I
I
WSFT
DOFSI
I
PRG9
OFTVY EBCL
ISOT
PRG9
OFFVY EBCL
ISOT
0 APRS
Bir
setting
208 msec
APRS
0
Parameter
TFIN
TMF
No.
l:
setting is conducted return is performed. setting is not
APRS
Aut.omatic coordinat.e system when manual reference point 0: Automatic co.ordinate svstem conducted.
WSFT
I: The di-rect measured value input for tool offset is set in the work shift memory. 0: The work coordinate system is not shifted.
DOFSI
l: The direct measured value input for tool offset is effective. 0: The direct measured value input for tool offset is ineffeccive.
PRG9
1: The subprograms with program number 9000 to 9999 are protected. The following edit function are disabled.
(l) Deletion of
program
the deletion of all programs is specified, the programs with program 9000 to 9999 are nor delered.
When
(2)
Punch of program These subprograms
number
are not punched out when the punch of all programs is specified.
(3)
Program number search.
(4)
Edit of program after registration.
i
i I
t-I
-379-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper : T series ' Lo\iter : !1 series)
Parameter No.
llowever, the followings are possible.
(1) Registration of Program Registration by MDI key and through paper tape.
(2) Collation of program (Note) These programs are not normally indicated, because program number search is disabled in the EDIT rnode. However, it maY be indicdted when protected programs alone remain in the memory after deletion of al-l programs, for example, or when a protected subprogram is interrupted while it is running, by a single block stop and the EDIT rnode is set in. In such a case, the program edit is abled. The subprograms with program number 9000 to 9999 can also be dated.
0:
OFFVY
Servo afarm ls not actuated when VRDY is on before is output. Servo alarm is actuated when VRDY is on before PRDY is output.
1:
PRDY
n.
In the display of the nto*t"t stored in the memorlr the EOB code is indicated by * (asterisk). In the display of the program stored in the memorlr the EOB code is indicated by; (semicolon).
1:
EBCL
0:
Rapid traverse is effective even when reference point return is not conducted after turning the power on. Rapid traverse is invalid unless reference point return is conducted after turning the power on.
l.
ISOT
0:
MCINP
0
0
MCINP
Bit
SBKM
G0l
MCF
SBIO,I
ADNW
PMLI
ADLN
PML2
PMLl
2L0
543
No.
MCINP
PML2
I
I
1:
Program input
is started with
0:
Program input
is not started with the data input
external start signal
MINP.
external start signal
MINP.
-380-
the data input
Remarks
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
c0t
l: GOl mode when power is on. 0: G00 mode when power is on.
SBKM
1: Machine
Remarks
is stopped in single block skip by macro'
command.
0: Machine is not stopped in single block skip by macro command.
(usua1ly set rr0'f)
MCF
ADNW
l: EF (external operation slgnaL) is output when G8l positioning is completed. 0: EF (external operation signal) is not output when G81 positioning is not completed.
l: Select B type for feed rate. 0: Select A type for feed rate. (A type)
(1)
JoG feed rate
feed rate of additional axis is the that of basic axes.
JOG
same AS
(2) Cutting feed upper lirnit feed rate Tangential speed is clamped at. parameter value for a1l axis. (B type)
(1)
,
rate rates of basic axes and rotary axis can be set by different parameter (No. 565, 566). When an additional axis is moved with another axis in simultaneously 2 or more axes control, feed rate is the same as that of another axes. JOG feed JOG feed
(2) Cutting feed upper liurit feed rate When command linear interpolation including addit.ional axis, (G01), clamp each axis feed rate at smaller than the setting value j-n another parameter (No. 567). In circular interpolation, tangential speed i,s clamped at parameter value. (Sane as A type) (3) Minimum rapid traverse rate (Fo) 0n1y additional axis is set by another parameter. (No. 0568) (4) Low feedrate (FL) additional axis at reference point return is seE to another parameter. (No.0s69)
-38r-
parameter (upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
Remarks
1: 4th axis is used as a linear axis. 0: 4th axis is used as a rotary axis.
ADLN
4th axis is used as linear axis, there are following restrictions. 1) Circular interpolation including the 4th axis
When
cannot be performed.
2) Cutter compensation B/C in the 4th axis cannot.be applied. 3) Tool length compensation in the 4th axis cannot be applied.
Pitch error compensation magnification. The value, with this magni.fication multiplied to the set compensation value, is outDut.
PML2, t
PML2
0
X1
0
I
x2
I (Cornmon
0
Bir NFED
I
Fo
x4
I
X8
to all axes)
2
No. 1:
0:
G84S
Magnification
0
I
0
PMLl
Feed is not output before and after the progran is outPut by using the reader/puncher interface. (Set to "1" when FANUC is used.) """""tt" Feed is_ output before and after the program is by using rhe reader/puncher interface. 9::l"t (Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 1.) Type B is effective in canned cycle G74 and GB4 with S analog voltage output. Type A is effective in canned cycle G74 and Gg4 ' with S analog voltage output. (See connecting manual for type A/B.)
-382-
Baudrate
is set
by
parameter No. 0553.
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
I:
l:
l: o:
1:
Interlock is effective only for Z axis. Interlock is effective for all axes.
ZTLK
0:
0:
t
TCW,
TCW
CI.IM
ORCW
INHMN GOFC
TCW
CWM
ORCW
INHMN
No.008i
GOFU2
JHD
J}lD
No.
Output code at S analog output.
CWM
cI.]M
0
0
Plus ouEpuE for both M03 and
0
I
Minus output for both !103 and M04 Plus output for M03, uinus output for
I 1:
0:
Output code
TCI,J
I
M04.
Minus output
for
M04.
M03, plus output for
M04.
Minus output in orientation S analog output. Plus output in orientation S analog output.
-383-
w parameter
3
0
0Rct^l
GMOFS
Remarks
Relative
In the reader/puncher interface, the stop bit 1S set by 2 bits. In the reader/puncher interface, the stop bit ls set by I bit. (Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 1.)
1:
Bit
M series)
The 2OmA currerlt Lnterface ls used as the reader/ puncher interface. FANUC PRR, FANUC cassette, or portable tape reader are used as the reader/puncher interface. .(Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 1.)
ASR33
0
:
In canned cycle G74 or G84, spindte CH/CCW rotation is performed without M05 code output. In canned cycle G74 or G84, spindle CW/CCW rotation is performed afcer M05 signal output.
0:
0
Lower
In canned cycle G76 and G87, the oriented spindle stop is performed without outputting M05. In canned cycle G76 and G87, the oriented spindle stop is performed after outputting M05.
0: FXCS
: T series,
EILK..
is
.::,*
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No. INHMN
Remarks
The menu ls not indicated even r^rhen the menu a programrning option is provided. The menu is indicated when the menu programming
l: 0:
option is provided. The tool geometry offset is also cancelled with the designation of offset No. 0. 0: The tool geometry offset is not cancelled with the designation of offset No. 0. l:
GOFC
GMOFS
The tool geometry offset is cancelled with vector
1:
processing, i.e. tool movement. The tool geometry offset is conducted by the shifting of the coordinate system.
0:
l:
GOFU2
The geornetry offset number is designated by two high order digits of the T code. The geometry offset number is designated by the two low order digits of the T code.
0:
The manual pulse generator is valid in JOG mode. The manual pulse generator is invalid in JOG mode.
1: 0:
JHD
T2T4 0
i$i ':t1
0
I
vI
I\JA
OFSB
STDP
SMCL
T2D
4
Bit
No.
T2T4
I:
0:
3210 the T code is designated with a 2-digit value, it is regarded that the two high order digits are equal to the two low order digits and the T code is set to the 4-digit value. When the T code is designated with a 2-digit value, the two high order digits are regarded as 00, and the T code is set to the 4-digit value.
I,ltren
WIGA
1: Setting of the tool wear offset amount ls lirnited to incremental designation, and the setting of the tool geometry offset amount is lirnited to absolute de s ignation. 0;. The incremental and absolute designations are possible for both tool wear offset amount and tool geometry offset amount.
OFSB
1:
Parameter No. 014:
ir is e
ffec t ive
only
when
T2D=0
Tool offset is conducted tosether with axis movement.
o:
Tool offset is conducted by the T code block. (The tool geometry offset by the shifting of the coordinate system is conducted by the T code block regardless of this parameter.)
-384,i
Parameter No.
t:
STDP
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
The actual spindle speed and the
code are always
displayed.
The actual spindle speed and the
0:
always displayed.
code are not
Cancels the tool geometry offset vector by resetting.
1:
GMCL
T
not cancel the tool figure correction vector by resetting.
0:
Does
t: T code is specified in 2-digits.
T2D
T code is specified in 4-digits.
0:
0
0
Bit CPRD
I
REP
PRWD
MORB
CPRD
REP
PRWD
Lvt2
NWCH
SKPF
No. l.
0:
REP
CPRD
CBLNK
5
1:
RILK
CBLNK
2
Unit is set to mm, inch or sec. When the decimal point is omitted in the address for which the decinal point can be used. The least input increment is set when the decimal point is omitted in the address for which Ehe decimal point can be used. the program with same program nuuber in the is registered through interface, the altarm does not occur and the registered reader/puncher program is replaced. When the program with same program number in the memory is registered through reader/puncher interface, the alarm occurs. When
memory
n.
PRWD I: 0: MORB
'I .
Rewind signal is output by portable tape reader. Rewind signal is noE output by portable tape reader. The direct neasured value input for tool offset and work coordinate system shift is performed by retracting both 2 axes after cutting and pushing the RECORD
Lr42
button.
is necessary for this function.) button is not provided for direct measured value input. (FANUC PMC-L/M
n.
The
t:
Makes valid stroke limit 2 (EXrM2 Gr29.6). Makes invalid stroke limit (EXLM2 Gr29.6) .
0:
RECORD
switching signal 2 switching signal
-38s-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T serles, Lower :
Remarks
Dry run, overri-de and automatic acceleration/ deceleration is effective in skip function (G3l). Dry run, override and automatic acceleration/
1:
0:
deceleration is ineffective in skip function (G31).
1: Interlock processing is done at htgh speed. (FANUC PMC-MODEL L or M is necessary. ) 0: Normal interlock processing is done.
RILK
1: The character "W" is not displayed at the left side of the offset No. in wear offset value display. 0: The character "I'1" is displayed at the left side of the offset No. in wear offset value display.
NWCH
't. 0:
CBLNK
The cursor does not The cursor blinks.
blink.
I'{DEC
0
0
M series)
1
NPRD NPRD
Bir No. MDEC
NPRD
SUPM
RSTMB
RSTMA
r
0
6
7
6
5
4
3
1: M code is output in decode signal. 0: M code is ouEpur in BCD 2 digits.
SUPM
2
(not available)
1: Input and display with decimal point is ineffectlve. 0: Input and display with decimal point is effective. 1: Start-up B type is effective i-n cutEer compensation
I
V.
0: Start-up type is effective in cutter compensation C. For details of start-up, refer to operatorts manual. RST}ts
RSTMA
* *
1: B group decode M signal (M21A, 1422A) is cleared reset. (not. available) 0: A group decode M signal is not cleared by rest.
by
1.: A group decode M signal (MflA-Al38) is cleared by reset. (not available) 0: A group decode 11 signal is not cleared by reset.
-385-
Parameter No.
0
I
0
Bit
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lo\rer :
M series)
OPGT
OPG6
OPG5
OPG4
OPG3
OPG2
OPGI
OPGT
OPG6
OPG5
OPG4
OPG3
OPG2
OPGI
7
No.
OPGT I: 0:
Feed hold is effected with the software operatorrs pane1. Feed hold is not effected with the software
operaEorts panel.
OPG6 I: Protect key is actuated with the 0:
OPG5
1:
0:
OPG4
1:
0:
OPG3
1:
0:
software
operatorts panel Protect key is not actuated with the software operatort s panel. Optional block skip, single block, machine 1ock and dry run switches are actuated with the software operatorrs panel. The above switches are not actuated with the sofcrdare operatorf s pane1. Jog feed rate, override, and rapid traverse override switches are actuated with the software operatorts panel. The above switches are not actuated with the software operatorts panel .
Axis select (IIX, Hy, HZ) and magnification (x10, x100) switches for manual pulse generator are actuated with the software operatorts panel. The above switches are not actuated with the software3 operatorrs panel.
OPG2 I: Jog feed axis select and jog rapid traverse buttons are actuated with the software operatorrs panel. ' 0: The above buttons are not actuated with software operatorts panel.
OPGl
l: n.
the
select (MDl to MD4, ZRN) is conducted from the software operatorts panel. Mode select is not conducted from the software operatorrs panel. Mode
(Note) The above parameters are effective only when the optional software operatorts panel is selected.
-387-
Remarks
:{!l'eFfF
Parameter No.
0
0
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
EDITB
TVC
EDITB
TVC
7
6
Remarks
8
1
Bit No.
SQTYP
5
4
NZMP4 NZMP2 NYMP2 NXMP2
3
2
|
0
Editing on standard keyboard shal1 be editing oPeration B, 0: EdiEing operation shall be as specifie{ in standard specifications.
EDITB l:
I: TV check at the conment. 0: No TV check at the comment
TVC
1: The program restart method should be R type. (not available) 0: The program restart meEhod should be P or Q type.
SQTYP
1: Handle feed magnification xl00 is ineffective for X, Y, Z and 4th axes' resPectivelY. 0: Handlerfeed rnagnif icati-on x100 is ef fective for X, Y, Z and 4t.h axis' resPectivelY.
N)O{P2, NYI'IP2, NZMP2, NZMP4
(Note) The magnification of an axis whose rnagnification xl00 is ineffective becomes xl or x10 by signal MPI. MPI=1:x10 I MPl=0:x
I
n
0
Bit
1:
n.
l: 0:
MO2NR
NEOP l'102NR
DBCD
NEOP I,102NR SRGTP
XRC
DC4
DC3
I: O:
C4NG
}lHPGB
J
No,
DBCD
NEOP
DCZ
DBCD 9
In the diagnosis display' the timer counter data is displayed in decimal. The diagnosis display is d isplayed in binary as usual. M02, M30 and M99 command the end of registration into part program storage editing area. M02, M30 and M99 do not command the end of registration into part program storage editing area.
Return to the head of program after executing Do not return to the head of program after executing M02.
-388-
M02.
1' a
Parameter No.
Lower : M series)
G135.0 is used for the rigid tap selection signal. G123. I is used for the rigid tap selection signal.
l.
SRGTP
Parameter (Upper : T series
0:
0:
Diameter designated for Z axis (Disable). Radius designated for Z axis.
XRC
1: 0:
X-axis is rad.ius desi-gnati.on. X-axis is dianeter desi_gnation.
DC4
l. 0:
Diameter designated for 4th axis (Disable). Radius designated for 4th axis
1:
t: 4th axis neglect signal is valid
C4NG
DC3
0:
4th axis neglect signal is invalid.
t:
Diameter designated for 3rd axis (Disable). Radius designated for 3rd axis.
0:
I: Multi-handle function is specification
MHPGB
B.
Multi-handle function is specification A. (For specification A/B, see connecting manual.)
0:
NCIPS 0
0
0
2
SFOUT
Bir SFOUT
to
No. 1.
0: NCIPS
NCIPS BCD3
1:
0:
is output in S4/5 digit even if gear change is not performed. SF is output in S4/5 digit on changing a gear. SF
In deceleration, the control proceeds to Ehe next block after the specified speed has become zero. The control does not confirm that the machine position meets a specified position. (No inposition
checking) . The control proceeds to the next block after the spcified speed has become zero and confirms that the machine position has reached the specified position
in deceleration.
BCD3
l. 0:
(Inposition ckecking).
B code is 3-digit output. B code is 6-digir output.
i -389-
Remarks
.€re: l
ma
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
0
0
: T series, Lower :
APCZ
APCX
APCY
APCX
Remarks
I
2
APC4
Bit
M series)
APCZ
*
16
No.
APCX, 1: Y, Z, 0:
When When
absolute pulse coder detector is optioned. absolute oulse coder detector is not optioned
4
tt 3
.t
0
0
ABSZ
ABSX
ASSY
ABSX
2
2
ABS4
ABSZ
t f * a
Bit
No.
A3SX, l: Y, Z, 0: 4
0
I
Reference point position in absolute Pulse coder se
ttled
.
Referepce point position in absolute pulse coder is
; &
{
not settled. (It is automatically set to "1" when manual reference point return is executed. Do not change the setting without changing the detecEor') Set "0" without fail when primary field installation and adjustment and when position detector exchanging. And execute manual reference point return after Power on/off. DITA
DCHI
DFRN
DGRM
DJPN
DITA
DCHI
DFRN
DGRM
DJPN
L
Bir
5432
No.
I
I
DITA
CRT
screen ls displayed in Italian.
DCHI
CRT
screen is displayed in Chinese
DFRN
CRT
screen is displayed in French
DGRM
CRT
scteen is displayed in
DJPN
CRT
screen is displayed in JaPanese.
(ROC) -
German.
-390-
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
EDILK 0
0
2
QNI 'IEGWSF INOUT GNSR
SCTO
UWKZ
Bit
QNr
IGNPM(
LII
IGNP}I(
1O
765 Data format: Bit
No.
EDILK
scTo
.+
0:
Interlock signal per axis direction is va1id. Interlock signal per axis direction is invalid.
1:
Automatic selection of tool offset number is
1:
done
during offset writing Automatic selection of tool offset number is not done during offset writing mode. mode.
0:
0:
work shift amount is input in incremental system, sign is eonverted and input to memory. When work shift amount is input in incremental
I.
When
NEGWSF 1:
UWKZ
0:
When
systen, sign is not converted. (Usual)
the work zero point offset value is modified' absolute coordinate value is changed at once. (Not available) After modification, the absolute coordinate value is updated at the initial preProcessing. Outside of the 2nd stored stroke lirnit is set to the forbidden area. Inside of the 2nd stored stroke lirnit is set to the forbidden area.
1:
INOUT
0:
GNSR
SCTO
0:
position is drawn in graphic function. Actual position where tool nose radius compensation is thought in is dravm in graphic function.
1:
Spindle speed reach signal is checked. Spindle speed reach signal is not checked.
1:
,Progranmed
0:
LIIlO
Inputting/Outputting unit is 0.01 unn/O.001 inch. Inputting/Outputting unit is 0.001 mrn/0.0001 inch-
1:
0:
(Usua1)
Control by PMC is made ineffective. (Same as without PMC) 0: Control by PMC is made effective 1.
IGNPMC
t.'..F
I RSFT 0
0
L
)ACTF
]RCMSG PRCPOS
EXTS MMDL
)ACTF
?RCMSG
8 PSG2
Blr
EXTS MMDL
PSG
I
EXI
OD
No.
-
391
-
PRCPOS
Remarks
!F'
Paraneter PSGl,
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
No.
Remarks
Gear ratio of spindle and position coder
2
Scale factor
1:
RSFT
0:
EXlOD
1:
0: EXTS
1:
0:
DACTF
M}!DL
PSGI
xl
0
0
x2
0
I
x4
I
0
x8
I
I
value is entered with a radius value in work coordinate system shift. lD( value is entered with a diameter value in work coordinate system shift. (It is valid only when radius designation XRC=I.) l'fl(
External work coordinate svstem shift function: 1O times the input value to the "ttr""porrds value. external work zero point offset The inpu= value corresponds to the external work zero point offset value Search by external program No. search (01 to 0999 search) Search by external work No. search (01 to 015 search)
0:
Actual speed is displayed on the current position display screen and program check screen. Not displayed.
1: 0:
Modal status is displayed in MDI operation B. Modal status is not displayed in MDI operation B.
1:
PRCMSG 1:
0: PRCPOS
PSG2
I: 0:
the program check screen, a message fron is displayed. (not available) The remaining motion is displayed
On
On the program check screen, the absolute coordj-nates are displayed. The relative coordinates are displaved.
-392-
PMC
t
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
DSPSUI
0
0
2
ADRC
DSPSUi
Bit
G604
G6OZ
G6OY
G6OX
t: Displays 5th/6th axis current positions for Does
Use ttlil or tfKtr, not ttCtt for the address in chamfering and corner radius (R). For the addresses used for direct drawing dimension prograrnming, use tt,Ctt and ttrRtt (a eonma is put before C and R). For the address in chamfering, corner R, and direct drawing dimension programmingr use ttCtt and |tRtt as
1:
ADRC
axis
PMC
not display 5th/6th axis current positions for PMC axis. The axis name is in accordance with the parameters (No. 7130, 7131).
0:
0:
-
DSP3
No.
DSPSUB
c60x
DSP4
9
per the standard specification. (3rd axis cannot be used with address "C".) Specify the approach direction in the unidirectional positioning of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th in
4
sequence.
I: Minus direction 0: Plus direction DSP3
-
The current position of 3rd and 4th axes is displayed in sequence. l: The present position is displayed. 0: The present position is not displayed.
4
ADW4O
0
0
3
ADW3O
0
EACl
Bit
EACO
No.
ADW30, 40
The nane of 3rd and 4th axes is specified in sequence. 1: The name is C and the Y axis control is used. 0: The name is B.
-393-
Remarks
It, | ,,fr,, , l,/rr,tt
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
uoo .
",
t'ACl: Axis setting for EACl
"l,' Irtr
0
I
0
I
1
axis control
ConErolled axis
EACO
0 0
l,E
PMC
4th axis X axis Y axis Z axis
I
CNRST
ESFC
ADDCF RTCT
ILVL
TAPM
11o.
lllr1,, l.
n.
SDRT
SNRL
1
At the time of reference point return, Cf axis relative coordinate value is cleared. At the time of reference point return, Cf axis relatiye coordinate value is not cleared.
rll'r
l: o: Alt11,
,
t:
Even in the turning mode (signal COFF is closed) in Cf axis control, the feedback pulse from the position detector becomes effective. The feedback pulse in the turning mode in Cf axis control becomes invalid.
Signals DRN, GRl, PMC
l'ltl
GR2
are set to Gl23
(DGN
123) of
address.
tl.
Signals DRN, GRl, GR2 are set ro cl18 (standard specif ications) .
t;
In the deep hole drilling cycle (G83, c87), the tool returns to R point level in the course of (B type) drilling. In the deep hole drilling cycle (G83, G87), the tool returns by the retract amount in the course (Type A) of drilling.
t|: tt\,1
t. tl.
(DGN 118)
In the drilling
cycle, the init ia1 point level is
In the drilling
cycle,
updated by resetting.
updated by resetting.
no
init ial point level is
|
^l,ll
t. lt:
b=
In the tapping cyele, M05 is sent out first when the spindle rotates CW and CCW. In the tapping cycle, I'103 and M04 are sent out when the spindle rotates CW and CCW.
-394-
Reuarke
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
Lower
:
The spindle indexing direction by M conmand minus. The spindle indexing direction by M cornrnand
l.
SDRT
: T series,
0:
M series) IS IS
plus.
The spindle indexing rnode is released by resetting. The spindle indexing mode is not released by
l.
SNRL
n.
resetting.
BLIN
ROTiO 0
U
?NGMLK
LIN4
LIN3
a L
3
?NGMLK
Bit R0Tl0
No.
The parameter unit of JOG feed, cutting feed upper limit speed, rapid FO speed and FL speed for
1:
reference point return at the tine of inch output for Cs axis is I deg/min. The parameter unit is 0. I deg/urin.
0: .BLIN
For B8-digit input, the input unit when the decimal point is inputted is 1.000 (metric system) and 1.0000 (inch system) 1.000 regardless of the input unit.
l.
n. PNGMLK
In In
1:
n.
PMC axis PMC axis
control, machine l-oek shall be intalid. control, machine lock sha11 be valid.
Selection of linear /rotary axis for 3rd and 4th axls
LrN3,4
Linear axis
1: 0:
Rotary axis
ACMR
n
0
5
3
ACMR
Blr ACMR
LGCM
NDSP4 NDSPZ NDSPY NDSPX
LGCM
No.
l. 0:
Optional Optional
1:
Low-and high-speed gear changing speed rpm depends on parameter SPDWL (No. 585). l.Ihen gear 3-step is used, low- and medium-speed gears, and medium- and high-speed gears changing speed rpm dpend on parameter SPDIO(L (No.585) and SPDUCT (No.586). Gear changing speed rprn shall be the respective maximum gear speed rpm.
0:
CMR
Cl"fi.
is used. is not used.
-395-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (UPPer
:
T series, Lower : M series)
X, Y, Z and 4th Z, \, X, whether the current positions of axes are disPlaYed or not l: The current Position is not disPlaYed. 0: The eurrent Position is displaYed.
NDSP4,
0
0
o
3
Bir
I
No.
SCR
1:
be 0.001 . The scaling rnagnification incrernent sha1l be 0.0001. The scaling magnification increment shall
1:
type' Special G code system "1"11 be C B type' be shall system Special G code
n.
GSPC
0: SCLX, SCLY,
0
1:
0:
Each axis scaling is valid' Each axis scaling is invalid'
SCLZ
0
0
J
Bir No. PLCOI
SPTPX
to SPTP4
7
be used' 1: A pulse coder of 0'1u detection is to (Va1id for OG onlY) to be used' 0: A pulse coder of b'1u detection is not
TypesofpositiondetectoroftheX,Y(Z)'z(ct)andthe fturth axis in this order' as a 1: The separate tyPe pulse coder is to be used detector. be used as 0: The separate type pulse coder is not to a detector.
-396-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lohrer : M series)
Parameter No.
Remarks
In
case of the FOG with 0.1U pulse coder, set the following parameters in units of lU. (The set data is multiplied by ten within the CNC)
No.
Paraueter
0504
SERRX (X)
Limitation value of position deviation amount during movement of X axis.
0505
SERRY (Z)
Limitation value of position deviaEion amount during movement of Y(Z) axis.
0506
SERRZ (3)
Linitation value of position deviation amount during movement ot Z(3) axis.
0507
SERR4 (4)
Limitation value of position deviation amount during movement of 4th axis.
0508
GRDSX
(x)
Grid shift amount of the X-axis
0509
GRDSY
(Z)
Grid shift amount of the Y(Z)-axis.
r0
GRDSZ
(3)
Grid shift amount of the Z(3)-axis.
05
Contents
GRDS4 (4)
051i
Grid shift amount of the 4th axis.
Note) Above explanation is applied (No. 0037 bir 7) = 1.
when
the y'arameter "PLCOI" I
RSCMDl DEVFL 0
0
3
RSCMDl
Bir RSCMDl: DEVFL
1
RSCMD2:
DEVFL2
No.
I
RSCMD2 DEVFL2 FLKY RSCMD3
DEVFL3 DEC34
8
I
DEVFLI RSCMD2 DEVFL2 FLKY RSCMD3 DEVFL3 6
5
2
Setting r/o device of reader puncher interface t
channel
l-
Sett ing channel
rlo device of reader puncher interface 2
RSCMD
DEVFL
I/O device
0
0
Bubble cassette,
0
I
Floppy cassetEe
I
0
Paper tape reader
I
I
Paper tape reader, etc.
-397-
used PPR
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No. FLKY
t:
CRT/MDI
0:
CRT /},ID
return
deceleration signals for reference point
*DEC3/*DEC4 addresses DEC34
0
0
3
=
.
DEC34
0
=I
:IDEC3
xI9.7
x16.
*DEC4
xI9.
xI7 .7
5
7
9
M6TCD
Bit
M series)
keyboard uses a fuIl key I keyboard uses a standard key.
Changes
DEC34:
: T seriesl Lower :
IGIN
IGSK
GRST
TLSK
LCTM
GST2
GSTl
32
No.
Following is the setring for tool life management. te M6TCD
1:
0: IGIN
1:
0: IGSK
1:
Regards M06 and the tool group comrnand. Regards M06 and the
same
block T
code
as the next
same
block T
code
as backnumber.
Ignores tool backnumber. Does not ignore tool backnumber. Took skip signal is accepted only while the tool life tool is in use. Tool skip signal is always aceepted.
managed 0: GRST
1:
0:
TLSK
1:
0:
Clears all group executlon data at the tirne of tool reset signal input. (This is the same with when this operation is performed.) Clears execution data only for the group with the nurnber inputted from the outside at the time of tool reset signal input. (Only the group shown by the cursor positi-on when thj,s operation is performed from MDI.)
At the time of tool skip signal input, Group No. is also entered. At the time of tool skip signal input, the group eurrently being selected is skipped.
-398-
Remarks
Parameter
LCTM
Parameter (Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries)
No
Remarks
Designates the tool life by tirne. Designates the tool life by frequency.
1: 0:
Designate the number of registerable groups in tool group setting.
GSTI /GST2:
No. of groups
No. of tools/group
GST2
GSTl
0
0
r-
16
i-16
0
t
l-
32
l-
8
I
0
r-
64
r-
4
I
I
t -
128
1-
2
1
././.---*--.,--,^\ 0
n
4
J/
Bir No. LOCC 1: 0:
coMc t: 0: T},TCR
LOCC
coMc
TMCR
RWCNT
NAMPR
LOCC
COMC.
TMCR
RWCNT
NAMPR
0
1:
0:
.- RrtefrFl (i.i
*/-€/
0:
76
s4i,
2r0
'J <> 'i c) // Does not place 1oca1 variables (/tl to 33) in
.>
Does not place conmon varLables (#100
state during resetting.
i'"i
to 149) ln in
T code calling subprogram 09000 T code as a normal tool function Does not count the total number of parts machined and the number of parts machined even when U9?lyiA_erS_ :sessqed . Counts the total number of oarts machined and the
n"rb";-E-Darts rr"tritt.a "iffi ex_e_cuted
NAMPR I:
Displays the program name on the program directory display unit. 0: Does not display the program name on the prograu directory display unit.
W:
6:
-399-
i
':
Parameter
0
0
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
No
4
RIN
Bir
No.
RIN
2
the coordinate rotation angle by incremental command. Commands the coordinate ro t at i-on angle by absolute
1:
Commands
0:
command.
I
ASTCD
0
0
4
I
2
I
ASTCD I
I
EQCD
0
0
I
{+
EQCD I
I
SHPCD
0
n
I
q
4
SHPCD l
Bir No. ASTCD/EQCD/
SHPCD:
0
0
Bit HSIF
4
6
5
432
Set the hole parrern of *, =, /l EIA codes in sequence, using 8-bit data.
t f-
macro B
0
custom
HSIF
CLER
NUASS CCINP
RAL
RDL
HSIF
CLER
NUABS
RAL
RDL
5
No.
I: 0:
CLER
7
1:
0:
76543210 14/S/T/B code processing sha11 be a high-speed interface. l{/SlT/B code processing shal1 be a normal interface.
Selects clear conditions, using the reset button, external reset signal and emergency stop. Selects reset conditions, using the reset button, external si-gna1 and emergency stop.
-400-
Remarks
Parameter No. 1:
NUABS
0:
CCINP
1:
0:
RAI
Parameter (Upper
Lower
:
M series)
Remarks
Returns to the status when the coordinate system is ON with machine lock signal OFF. (Disable) Does not return to the status when the coordinate system is 0N with machine lock signal OFF.
In-position width between a feed block and a feed block is set by another parameter (No. 0609 to 0612) (Must not be used) In In-position width is set by nornal parameter.
I: Registers only puncher. 0:
: T series,
one program for reading in readerf
Registers all programs for reading in reader/ puncher.
l.
RDL
0:
Registers a program after all programs are erased for reading in reader puncher interface. The reading is the same as in normal specJ.fication in reader puncher interface.
GRPOS
0
0
Bit
IGNAL SBAB
RSTSW
4
No.
GRPOS
1:
0:
The actual position screen. The actual position screen.
I-S
displayed on the graphit
only
0TT
is not displayed on the graphic
IGNAL
1: Even when an alarm occurs on the other tool post, no feed hold status is reached. 0: When an alarm occurs on the other tool post, the feed hold status is selected
only
0TT
SBAB
l: Head 1 is upper on the conmon screen. 0: Head 2 is upper on the conrmon screen.
only
0TT
RSTSW
l:
only Ofi
0:
The reset key is valid only for the tool post se lec ted The reset key is valid for both tool posts.
-401-
,t
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
!13LMT
0
0
2SP
SEPH
SP2C
Remarks
TlST
7
Bir
No.
M3LU[
1:
only 0TT The range of the waiting M code is. (Parameter No. 243 value) x (100) to 999. The rane of the waiting 1"1 code is (parameter No. 243 value) x 100 to subsequent 100 pieces.
0:
0:
I:
SEPII
0:
0: TIST
only
The lst handle pulse of manual handle feed is sent to 1st tool post, and the 2nd handle pulse to the 2nd tool post. The handle pulse of manual handle feed is sent in parallel to both tool posts.
only
0TT
are drawn on a single screen for both posts. tool Graphics are drawn on a separate screen by both tool posts.
only
0TT
i
4
Tool post selecting signal is invalid (HEADI only). Tool post selecting signal is valid.
1:
0:
0TT t4,
GraphiqS;
1:
SP2C
spindle (Two spindle Two tool post) Single spindle (Single spindle Two tool post)
Two
1:
2SP
l .
* n
0
0
Bir
4
No.
IFE
8
76
ITO
IFM
FY1
TYO
,t
,I
;
'$
54
2
Set the parameter only to lst tool post
.!
ri' ti'
T
t
7 ! !,
E
t
?
+
-t
v E
-402-
Parameter No.
TYI 00
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
-1-
1 2nd tool post
TYO
lst tool post
TYI 0l
TYO
-d-t*'oot
not'
I
TYI l0
TYO
TYI tl
TYO
IFE
ITO
n.
the conditlons for tool post checking are established, no tool post interference is checked. I.lhen the conditioons for tool post checking are established, tool post interference is checked.
l:
When
[:
0:
Even when
Offset No. 0 is designated by T code, interference check ls contlnued according to the current Offset No. Wtren Offset No. 0 is deslgnated, using T code, tool post interference check 1s lnterrupted until offset No. other than 0 ls designated by the next T code.
-403-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
I:
IFM
Remarks
Tool post interference is checked in the manual mode Tool post interference is not checked in the mnaual mode.
€ FMLlO NPRV EFMLlO 0
0
9
FMLlO NPRV EFML I O
Bit
1:
The rapid traverse rate and cutting feed upper liurit speed parameter increment system shatl be l0 nun/min or I inch/min. ..g) For 100 m/min, the increment system shall be
n.
As per normal specifications.
1:
Even when no
10000.
position coder is provided, the per-revolution feed command sha1l be valid. (The per-revolution feed command is converted automatipally to the per-minute feed in CNC.) When no position coder is provided, the per-revolution feed command shall be invalid.
0: EFML
1O
DILK
No.
FML1O
NPRV
RDIK
The feedrate command (cutting feed) of control is used by I0 times. Standard specif ication.
1.
0: 1.
RDIK
pMC
axis
The high-speed interlock signal sha11 be invalid when the each directional interlock signal goes off. The high-speed interlock signal shall be always
0:
va1id.
The each directional interlock signal shatl be valid only in manual operation. The directional interlock slgnal shall be invalid.
l.
DILK
0:
0
0
0
0
Blt
5
5
NFED
RSASC]
>Lrz
NFED
RSASC]
STP2
NFED
RSASd
PARTY STP2
NFED
RSASC]
PARTY STP2
0
I
No.
-404-
Parameter Parame t
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lolrer : M series)
No
er Nos. 0050/0051 correspond to setting l/O=2 and 3. 1:
NFED
0: 1:
RSASCI
0:
l:
STP2
the reader puncher interface is used to output a program, no feed is output before and after that. When the reader puncher interface is used to output a program, feed is output before and after that.. the reader puncher interface is used to input a program, ASCII code is used. When the reader puncher interface is used to input a program, ISO/EIA code is used.
When
blt shall be 2 birs in rhe reader
interface.
0: Stop bit shall be I bit in the reader interface.
0
puncher
puncher
1: Parity bit shall be present. 0: Parity bit shall be absent.
PARTY
0
$'{
When
Stop
NODIC6 NODIC5 NODIC4
IIODIC3
NODIC6 NODIC5 NODIC4
\toDIcz
5
BirNo.
7
NODICX-NODIC6:
NODIC
1:
0:
6
5
4
3
2
'IODICY
NODICX
I
0
For increment systen 1/10, this sets wherfier the decimal point position of the current positLon display of each axis PMC axis control is made identi-cal to increment systen 1/I0 or not.
The current position display of PMC axLs control
sh.all be the same as in standard specifications, not in accordance with the decimal point position of increment systen 1/10 The current position display of PMC axis control is in accordance with the decinal point position of increment system 1i tO.
-405-
Remarks
\ L
5*e
p
{
Parameter
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
No
Remarks
LBLCD 0
0
I
3
5
LBLCD I
I
RBLCD
0
0
I
4
5
RBiCD I
Bit
No.
4
LBLCD /RBLCD:
3210
The hole pattern of [' ] in EIA code in custom macro B is set by 8-bit data in sequence.
t :
0
0
Bit PRORCA
ETX
ASCII
?ROTCA
ETX
ASCII
I: ao.
A
0:
B
0: ASCII
10
No.
1:
EXT
1:
0:
D
]ROTCA 5
D]C
protocol, protocol For "ororlication communication protocol, protocol
is is
used. used.
I
: I
l
End Code shall be I'ETXrr. End Code shall be "CR".
For all communj-cations except NC data, ASCII code is used For all cornmunications except NC data, ISO code is used.
il 7
"
u(\
$t'
tt 'b
-406-
.tt &-
*,
-_
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
Al-1 subsequent parameters are set in decirnal
.
CMRX
I
0
0
0 CMRX
CI,IRZ
0
I
0
I CMRY
cl'IR3 0
I
0
2 CI',IRZ
CMR4
0
I
0
3
cuR4
an optional comand nulttply (No. 0035 4CMR=1) is used, there are 2 types of setting methods as follows.
When
a corwmand.nultiply 7s I/2 to presetvalue=*+Ioo (Comand rnultiply)
1)
When
2)
$fben
|127z
a comand rnultiply is 2 to 48: Preset value = 2 x (Comnand urultiply)
Note 1) For (2) above, be sure !o set a value such that the coumand rnultiply should be always an integer. Note 2) Set the backlash compensation and pitch error compensation values with detection unit when an arbitrary conutrand rnultiply is used.
-407-
Remarks
Refer to parameter No. 00040007.
Parameter No.
Pararneter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
CMRY Cgmmand rnultiply
CMRX, CMRZ,
for
Remarks
Z and 4th axes, in turn.
X,
C},IR4
Setting
code
I'lultiplier
t
0.5
2
I
4
2
l0
5
20
10.
SPLOW
I
0
d SPLOW
For spifidle speed during constant speed spindle rotation. For spindle speed at gear shift (when parameter No. 0003, GST=I), set as Gear shift spindle speed __ ,^^ x 4095
SPLOW
Maxi-mum
*oaoffi
'
Setting range: 0 to 255 (unit:
rprn)
THDCH
0
I
THDCH
0
9
Width of chambering for thread cutting cycle in Setting range: 0 to I27 (unit : 0.1 lead)
G92.
4
I
ts
-408E
t'
.?
l
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series, Lower :
M series)
SCTTIM
l
t
0
n
SCTTIM
Set the delay timer for checking. the spindle speed reach signal. This sets the time required from execution of the S function to the beginning of checking the spindle speed reach signal. Setting range: 0 to 255 (unit: msec)
SCTTIM
Spindle speed reach signal.
J
distribution a
}{BUFl 0
I
t
I
}{BUFl
}{BUF2 0
I
I
2
I,IBUF2
MBUFI,2
codes which are not subjected to the next block can be set. for buffering M03 is not subjected to buffering is set' When 03 block. next for the
Up to two
14
-409-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
PSORGX
0
I
I
0
I
I
3
PSORGZ
Grid numbers at the reference point of X and Z axes, respectively. Setting range: o-255
PSORGX, PSORGZ
OFCMP
0
I
7
1
H4NO+HZNO
tt 0
I
I
TLCMP
8 NUMHG
OFMAX
0
I
I
9
TLMAX
0
I
OFCMP
TLCMD
2
0
Offset value compensation value setting value 0 - 32. Tool selection number compensation value Setting value: 0 - 99
NU}4HG
The number of manual pulse generators to be used
OFMAX
Maximum
TLMAX
Maximum
in multi-handle is set. Setting value z l/2/3 (unit)
value of offset number Setting valuez O - 32 value of tool setting Settingvalue: 0-99
-4r0-
number
,3
!j
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
Remarks
In case of multi-handle B specification, which manual pulse generator is used for the Z axis in
HZNO
ified. Setting value:
spec
1, 2 or
3
In case of rnulti-handle B specification, which manual pulse generator is used for the 4th axis
H4NO
specified, Setting valuei
l, 2 or
1S
3
settlng
method Second digit:
First digir :
H4NO
HZNo
(Exanple) When the 2nd manual pulse generator is used for the Z-axis and the 3rd manual' pulse generator is used for the 4th axis.
Setting value.
32
MOLHPG
0
t
2
I I
MOLHPG
Multiplier n of the manual handle feed Setting valuez L - 127 Uultiplier n when selection sighal MP2 for the manual hand feed move distance in on, set to 100 as a standard value.
},IOLHPG
OFSNO
0
I
2
2
.l I I
OFSNO
Setting of tool offset number Ln tool offset value direct input function B (at the setting of work coordinate system shift amount). Setting valuet | - 32
- 4II -
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M seri_es) GRPAX
0
I
2
3
Graphic coordinate system setting in graphic func t ion.
GRPAX
GRPAX=0
GRPAX=1
GRPAX=2
GRPAX=3
X
GRPAX=6
GRPAX=4
LrJ(fA
=/
(Note) The difference between GRpAX=0, lr 2 and GRPAX=3,4,5 is the difference that the work coordinate system zero point is at chuck side or not.
0
t
2
PSRNQI
0
1
L
5 PSRNQ2
0
2
6 PSRNQ3
-4L2-
Remarks
I I
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
I
0
2
: T series, Lower :
M series)
7
PSRNQ4
PSRNOI
-
Set the order of moving to the dry run restart position in program restart of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence. Sett.ing value: I - No. of axes (Moves in the order of 1, 2, 3 and 4)
4
(eg)
When setting to PSRNQ1=2, PSRNQ2=3, PSRNQ3=4 and PSRNQ4=l, the tool moves to the restart
position by one axis in the order of 4th -Y-2.
X
(Note) When all zero, the value out of the setting range or the same value is overlapped on the above parameter for setting, the setting is made automaticallv in the order of 4th - X -\-2. UPKY
I
0
0
3
UPKY a
DWNKY
0
I
J
I
DLINKY
RGTKY
0
t
3
) RGTKY
LFTKY 0
I
3
J
LFTKY
FWDKY
0
t
J FWDKY
-4r3-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
BACKY
I
0
3
5
BACKY
Specify the JOG move axis and direction on the software operatorts panel corresponding to keys.
KEEHHE Setting value: I to
6
Axis /Direc t ion
Setting Value
+x
I
-X
2
+z
3
-z
4
+;t
5
-5
6
(Exarnple)
when
serri"c
K
ro *x,
m qlro -X, FFI to +2,
f Trl +3 anal -t, . l*i1.. I ulto f-il
I
to -3, set as follows
UPKY=I, DWNKY=2, RGTKY=3, LFTKY=4, FI.IDKY=5, BACKY=6.
0
I
6
RTDKY
0
I
J
7
LTUKY
RTDKY=7, LTOKY=8
-4L4-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper:
Parameter No.
a) In
case
Tseries, Lower: Mseries)
of T series Sets the jog feed axes and directions on the software operatorts Danel corresponding to
UPKY, DWNKY,
trEHH;.'
RGTKY,
LFTKY
Axis, direction
Setting value
+X
t
-x
2
+Z
3
-z
4
(Examo 1e )
*"'
""..r",
E
to *x,
ro -x,
E
H.'
*2,
and
to -2, set as follows. UPKY=I,
b) In URKY LTUKY
-
case
DWNKY=2,
RGTKY=3, LFTKY=4.
of M series Set the jog feed axes and directions on the software operatorts Danel corresponding to teY?'
EEtrEtr Eil EE Axis, direction
Setting value
+X
I
_X
2
+Y
3
-Y
4
+z
5
-z
6
+4
1
-4
8
(Exanple) When
setting
to
to -X,
to *Y
+2, and
to -2,
to *X,
to -Y, set as follows.
UPKY=5, DWNKY=6, RGTKY=l, LFTKY=2, FWDKY=4, BACKY=3.
-4r5-
Remarks
Parameter No.
0
4
L
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
NSWI
I
NSWI
l
M series)
0
i
\ NSW88
0
2
0
J NSW88
The names of general purpose switches (SIGNAL 0 SIGNAL 7) on the software operatorts panel in the following figure are set as fo1lows. OPERATOR'S
SIGNAL0 SIGNALI SIGNAL 2 SIGN.trt 3 SIGNAL 4 SIGNAL 5 SIGNAL 6 SIGNAL 7
PANEL 02334 : : : : : : : :
N5678
ON IOFF OFF fON OFF ION ON IOFF ON IOFF I0FF ON 0N IOFF OFF ION
AUTO
Characters are set by codes in parameters 0140 to 0203 as follows:
-416-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
No.
140
Code (083) corresponding to character ttStt of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set.
PRM. No. 141
Code (073) corresponding to character ttltt
PRM.
of
SIGNAL
0 in the
above
figure is set.
PRM. No. t42
Code (071) corresponding to character ttGtt of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set.
PRM. No. 143
Code (078) corresponding to character ttNtt of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set.
PRM. No. 144
Code (065) corresponding to character ttAtt of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set.
PRM. No. 145
Code (076) corresponding to character ttlt' of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set.
PRM. No.
146
Code (032) corresponding to character tt of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set.
PRI"I. No.
L47
Code (048) corresponding to character ttort of SIGNAL 0 in the above figure is set.
tt
PRM. No. 0148-0155 Characters corresponding to SIGNAL I in the
above figure.
PRM.
No. 0156-0163
Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 2 {n the above figure.
PRM.
No.0164-0171
Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 3 in the above figure.
PRM.
No.
OL72-0179
Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 4 in the
PRM.
No. 0180-0187
Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 5 ln the
PRM.
No. 0188-0195 Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 5 in the above figure.
PRM.
No. 0196-0203 Characters corresponding to SIGNAL 7 in the above fisure.
above figure.
above figure.
For character codes, refer to the characters-to-codes table in the next page. Setting value 0 is a space.
-4I7-
Remarks
Character-to-codes Correspondence Table Character
Code
A
065
6
054
B
066
7
055
C
067
8
056
D
068
9
057
E
069
032
Space
F
070
033
Exclamation mark
G
071
tl
034
Quotation mark
H
072
tl
035
Sharp
I
073
$
036
Dollar
J
074
o/
037
Percent
K
075
&
038
Ampersand
L
076
039
Apostrophe
M
077
(
040
N
078
)
041
Left parenthesis Risht parenthesis
o
O79 F
042
Aster j-sk
P
080
043
Plus sien
0
081
044
Comma
R
082
045
S
083
046
T
084
047
Minus sisn Period Slash
U
085
0s8
Colon
086
0s9
Semi-co1on
!l
087
060
Y
088
061
Y
089
Left ansle bracket Sisn of equality Rieht anele bracket
Conment
Character
Code
Comment l i :
i t;
*
i i,
svmbol
.i I
+
062 ,|
Z
090
0
048
I
049
2
050
J
051
093
Yen srrmbol
4
052
094
Risht square bracket
0s3
095
Underline
G
UOJ
uo4
09r A
t 1
I
I
i
Question mark Commercial at mark Left square bracket
092
4 n
-4rB-
{ .: I
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series,
Lower
:
M series)
CCLMP
0
2
0
.+
POSTNi
0
2
0
5 POSTN2
0
2
0
6 POSTN3
0
2
0
7
POSTN4
0
2
I
2
I
INTPLN
0:
INTPLN
1:
2:
is selected with power on. is seleeted with power on. Gl9 is selected with power on.
G17 G18
M-code of clamp of C-axis in the drilling
CCLMP
Setting value 00 to
POSTN1
-
cycle
99
Approach amount for single directi-on posi-tioning of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axi-s and 4th axis
Setting value 0 to 255 Unit 0.0I m (rnetric output) setring value 0 ro 255 unit 0.001 inch (inch output) Note) In increment systern l/10, the uni-t is the same as above. But the Max. value is 163.
-419-
Remarks
Parameter No.
0
I
2
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
3 AO\IMDR
Mininum deceleration ratio of circular cutting speed inside the automatic override-
AOVMDR:
Setting range: I to 100% Standard preset value: I Set the mj-nimum deceleration ratio (lDR) when the inside circular cutting speed is changed.
0
2
I
4 AOVOR
Deceleration ratio of inside corner automatic override. Setting Jange: I to 1001l Standard preset value: 50 Set the inside corner override value.
AOVCR:
0
2
I
5
AOVTH
AOVTH:
'1
f 1 1
Inside judgement angle of automatic override at inside corner part. Setting range: I to 179" Standard preset value: 91
-420-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
0
I
2
: T series, Lower':
M series)
6
FIDN
Constant to find the feedrate variations when manual pulse generator is rot.at.ed one scale for Fl digit
FIDN:
command.
AF=
Fmax i 100n
Set n above. In other words, set the feedrate the manual pulse generator is rotated.
Fmax
when
Preset value
I to
I27
Frnax i in the above equatlon is the upper linit value of feedrate for Fl digit conmand: set it to parameter Nos. 0583/0584.
trhax Fmax
1: 2:
Upper Upper
linit linit
value of Fl to F4 feedrate value of F5 to F9 feedrate
MCDCNT
0
2
I
9 MCDCNT
the preset M*cgqg_ig executed, the total- number of machined parts and the number of machined parts are counted. Settlng value: l_tg 255 (0 is eguivalent to no setting. 98 and 99 cannot be set.)
I,Ih_en
MCDCNT:/
E F:
la
i]MGCDO
0
2
2
0 II}IGCDO
i
UMGCD9
0
2
2
9
----.-
UMGCD9
.-42L-
Remarks
Parameter (UPPer
No
Parameter
: T series'
Lower
Remarks
: M series)
macro' Set uP fo l0 G codes calling custom
calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code calling G code
U},IGCDO:
UMGCDI: UMGCD2: UMGCD3: UMGCD : UMGCD5: UI"IGCD6: UMGCDT: UMGCD8: U]'IGCD9:
custom macro bodY 090 10 custom macro bodY 0901r custom uacro bodY 090r2 custom macro bodY 090r3 custom macro bodY 090I4 custom macro bodY 090I5 custom macro bodY 0901 6 custom macro bodY 090i7 custom macro bodY 090r8 custom macro bodY 090r9
Setting value:
001 to 255 (with G00' no custom macro can be
called. Even when 0 is called' it is equivalent to no setting.
0
2
)
0
3
i
I
l I
0
2
9
3
Set up to 10 M codes calling custom macro' UM{CD5: UWCD6: UMMCDT: UMMCD8: iD,IMCDg:
UMMCDlO:
UMMCDIl: UI'IMCD 12 :
UMMCDI3:
code calling M code calling M code calling M code calling 1"1 code calling M code calling M code calling !1 code calling M code calling U cbde calling 1"1
UMMCD4: ,
Setting value:
custom macro bodY 09020 custom macro bodY 0902 I custom macro bodY 09022 custom macro bodY 09023 custom macro bodY 09024 custom macro bodY 090 2s custom macro bodY 09026 custom macro bodY 09027 custom macro bodY 09028 custom macro bodY 09029
006 to
255
(with M00' no
cuscom macro
can be
0 is set' called. to ic is equivalent no setting. Even when
-422-
)
*:,
't. Paranoe
ter
Parameter (Upper:
No.
Tserles, Lower: Mseries)
Remarks
UMMCDl
0
0
4
2
UMMCDl
UMMCD2
0
2
4
I UMI'TCD2
UMMCD3
0
2
4
2 UMMCD3
Set up
to
3
UMMCD1: UMMCD2: UMMCD3:
M codes 1.1
calling custom Dacro.
code calling custom macro body 09001 calling custom macro body 09002 calling custom macro body 09003
M code M code
Setting value: 003 to
255
(With M00, no custom Eacro can
be
cal1ed. Even when 0 is set, it is equivalent to no settipg.) WAITM
0
2
I.IAITM:
4
3
Setting of the mlnimum value of 3-diglt code which waiting M code (only OTT): Input the 3rd figure as a setting value. Up to 100 waiting M codes are available. becomes a
Exanple) When the setting value = 5, the lraiting M codes are 500 to 599.
-423-
only
OTT
i-{F
if€J+*F.+i-a4
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
BRATE2 0
L
0
5
BRATEz
.-
BMTE2:
Baud rate when the reader puncher interface is used (valid when setting parameEer Ilo is 2).
BRATE3:
Baud rate when remote buffer (va1id when setting paramete
F€*used
The correspondence between Secting No. and actual baud rate i-s as fol1ows.
SettiFg No.
Baud rate
t
50
2 3
r00 110
4
150
5
200 300 600
6 7 8.
0
2
5
POFF TPSUP
:
TPSUP:
Z-axis acceleration/deceleraEion type in fhe rigid tapping node Data type: Byte type Set value: 0: Exponenti-al acceleration/ decelerati-on Standard set value: 0
-424-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
0
5
2
: T series,
Lower
:
M series)
Remarks
5
BKL9
Spindle backlash
amount
Ln the
rigid talnin8 node
Data type: Byte type Set value: O - LZ7 : Detection unit Unit
.
Note) Power should be turned off whenever the parameter is ehanged.
0
2
5
6 MCODE
MCODE:
M-code
to specify the rigid tapping
mode
type: Byte tyPe Setvalue: 0-99
Data
Note) Power should bef,turned off whenever the pararneter ls changed.
Standard
rNPx 0
5
0
setting 20 (netric
0
INPX
outPut) 12 (lnch outPut)
INFZ 0
5
0
I INPY
INP3 0
5
INP3
0
2
INPZ 3rd axls Ln-posltion width Settlng value O to 32767 detection unit :.i
-425-
;
G
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
0
0
5
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
3
INP4
INPX, INPY In-position width INPZ, INP4 respectively.
Setting range:
0
for X, to
Y,
32767
Z, and 4th axis, (detection unit)
Position deflection
Next block
value
In-position width In position check is performed when the feed mode changes from rapid traverse to rapid traverse, rapid traverse to cutting feed , or cutting feed to rapid traverse. SERRX
0
5
0
4 SERRX
SERRZ
0
5
0
5 SERRY
SERR3
0
5
0
6 SERRZ
SERR3
3rd axis position deviation linit value Setting value 0 to 32767 detection unit
ril
-426-
{
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
0
0
5
: T series,
Lower
:
M
series)
7
r
SERR4
Lirnitation value of position deviation amount during movenent for X, Y, Z and 4th axis' resPectively. serring range: 0 to 32767 (detection unit)
SERRX,
SERRY, SERRZ, SERR4
(Exarnple) When the rapid traverse rate and the position gain is 30, calculated by:
is
10 n/nin. the error is
s=-IG
Conversion of 10 u/nin. into pulses/sec. with the detecEion unit of 1u/pulse gives 166,666 pulses/sec. Therefore, E = L66,665/30 - 5'555 pulses.
Multiply this value by a factor of 1.5' and set the obtained value 8333 as the paraueter.
GRDSX
0
0
5
8 GRDSX a
GRDSZ
0
5
0
9
GRDSY
.!
GRDS3 U
5
I
n GRDSZ
3rd axis grid shift Setting value O to
GRDS3
0
5
I
amount setting +32767 detecting
unit
I GRDS4
GRDSX, GRDSY,
GRDSZ, GRDS4
Setting of grid shift amount of X axis, Y axis, Z axis and 4th axis respectively. serring range 0 to +32767 (detect unit). Wtren the reference !'oint is shiftefiTte slgn of
this parameter is
necessary.
-427-
Remarks
<;;llP
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower :
Parameter No.
11
series)
Remarks
Reference point return procedure Select manual continuous feed mode, and turn signal ZRN on (connect it with +24V) ' When feed towards the reference poi-nt is designaEed with the manual feed button, the moving part of the machine Doves at rapid traverse. When the deceleration limit switch is operated and the contact of reference point return deceleration signal ttDCX, *DCY, i
(i)
electric grid position, feed stops, and reference point return completion signal ZPX, ZPY, ZPZ, ZP4 is outPut. The direction in which an axis is returned to reference point can be set for each axis. Once an axis is returned to reference point and the corresponding signal ZPX, ZPY' ZPZ ot Z{4 is output, jog feed for that axis is invalid until signal ZRN is turned off'
(2) Timing charE Lock condition ZRN (Reference Point return)
ffi---
+X (Reference point is reached with the
v
\
V
tr
pL
*
I
No.0534)
t
o
criollllllllllt
\
/ on) i (Set Darameter
\r
*DCX
(One.rotation signal)
I
/one rotation sisnal I / after *DCX is iurned \
\
'IDCX
ON
(Grid shift amount set bY parameter No. 0508 - 05f I
PX
(X axis plus return direction.)
'ii
-428-
{_ .i
Parameter (Upper : T series' Lower :
Parameter No.
series )
M
PSANGN I
6
I
0
PSANGN
S4/S5 digits control (Analog output)
PSANGN
Sets the data for adjusting the gain of constant surface speed control. (analog output) This seEs the data for gain adjustment in analog output' setting range: 700 to 1250 Standard setting value: 1000 (Adjusting nethod) (1)- Set the standard setting value 1000' (2) Designate the maximum S analog value (fOVl ' (3) Measure the outPut voltage. (4) Set this value according to the following formula.
i0
lfeasured voltage (V)
x
1000
= setting value
(5) After setting the Paramqter.' designate the maximum S analog value (10V) again, and make sure that the outPut voltage is 10V. LPGIN 0
I
5
a
LPGIN
Setting of servo loop gain in position control' Setting range: t to- 9i99 (unit: 0.01 sec-1) Note) To set a loop gain to each axis, set No' 5L7 to 0 and set a loop gain of X axis, Yaxis and so on. (The increment system is the same' )
LPGIN
RPDFX
0
)
1
8 RPDFX
RPDFZ
0
5
I
r.l
RPDFY
-429-
Standard
setting 3000
; ,{aE}F.
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T seriep, Lower : M series) RPDF3
0
0
5
RPDFZ
0
5
2
1
RPDF4
Rapid traverse rate of X, Y, Z and 4th axes in turn.
PPNFY
Setting 30 to 30 to Note i)
RPDFY,
range
24000 Unit mm/nin (mno output) 9600 Unit 0.1 inch/min (inch output) Set rrl'r to the FML10 of parameter No. 49 for the other seting values. Note 2) In increment system 1/10, the unit is the
RPDF/32, RPFD4
same.
I
0
2
'F
LINTX LINTX
LINTZ 0
5
2
LINTY
LINT3 0
5
L
4
LINTZ LINT3
3rd axis linear acceleration/deceleration time constant (for rapid traverse) Setting value 8 to 4000 Unit msec
-430-
Remarks
Par'ameter (Upper
Parameter No.
0
Lower
:
M series)
Remarks
5
2
5
: T series,
LINT4
Time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of X, Y, Z and 4th axes in turn during rapid
LINTX, LINTY, LINTZ, LINT4
traverse. Setting range: 8 to 4000 (unit:
msec.)
THRDT
0
2
5
The time constant value of X axis in thread cutting
THRDT
cycle (G92). Setting range: I to 4000 (unit: msec.) Set the most suitable value to this parameter in combination with the parameter THDFL (pararneter No. 0528) FEDIO(
0
5
a
7
FED}fl(
Upper speed of cutting feed (available for X, Y, z
FED}fl(
axes)
Setting range 6 to 15000 unit: 6 to 6000 unit:
rnn/rnin (m outPut)
0.I inch/nin (inch output)
Note 1) Set 'r1" to the FMLI0 of parameter No. 49 for the other cutting values. Note 2) In increment system the unit is the same. THDFL 0
5
THDFL
2
8
value (FL) of X axis acceleration/ deceleration in thread cutting cycle. (G92) Setting range 6 to i5000 unit: nm/rnin (rnm output) 6 to 6000 unit: 0.1 inch/nin (inch output) Set the most suitable value to this parameter in consideration of the parameter No. 0526.
The lower linit
Note 1) In incrernent systen the unit is the
-43r-
same.
See
parameter
No. 0526
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
Remarks
FFFDT 0
9
5
FEEDT
Time constant of the exponential acceleration/ deceleration in cutting feed and jog feed. 0 to 4000 unit: msec Setting range: Set this to tt0tt, when the exponential accelerati-on/ deceleration is not used.
FEEDT
FEDFL 5
0
0
3
FEDFL
The lor.rer lirnit of feed rate in exponential acceleration /deceleraE ion. SeEting range 6 to t5000 unit: mu,/min (nrn output)
FEDFL
6 to 6000 unit: 0.I inch/nin (inch output) Note)rIn increment system 1/10, the unit is the
r'.
! !
'1l/
same.
-,
;'-----SPALW
/ f--'1:--T--1
I
0
1
J
5
I
CYCR
Tolerance (g) at which the actual spindle speed is regarded to reach the command value in the detection
SPALW
of soindle function. Setting range: I to 100 (7") (For constant surface sPeed control) Setting of relief amount in canned cycle G73 (high speed peck drilling cYcle) Setting range: 0 to 32767 unit: 0.001 mn ., / (rnrn input) 0 to 3/767 unit: 0.0001 inch
CYCR
-J
trf,iii.-i;p'u11
Noce) In increment systern 1/10, the unit is the same. SPLMT 0
5
3
.,
CYCD
SPLMT
Spindle speed fluctuation (r) at which an alarm is
indicated in the detection of spindle fluctuation. Setting range: I to 100 (%) (For constant surface speed control)
-432-
speed
=:=
Parameter No.
Paraureter (Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries)
Setting of the cutting start point in canned cycle
CYCD
G73 (peck
drilling cycte)
Setting range: 0 to 32767 unir: 0.001 un (rnn
O
input)
to 32767 unit: 0.0001 inch
Note) In increment
(inch input)
system
L/IO, the unit is the
same. RPDFL 0
5
3
3 RPDFL
The least speed of rapid traverse override (Fo)
RPDFL
(Cornrnon to all axis) Setting range 6 to 15000 unit: mr/min (mr output) 6 to 6000 unir: 0.1 inch/nin (inch ourpur)
Note) In increment systern 1/10, the unit is the same.
ZRNFL 0
5
J
4 ZRNFL
I
Low feed speed at reference point return (FL) (Cornmon to all axes) Setting range 6 to 15000 unit: rmn/min (mr output)
ZRNFL
6 to 6000 unit:
0.1 inch/min (inch output)
Note) In increment systen l/10, the unit is the same.
BKLX 0
5
3
5
BKLX
BKLZ 0
5
J
6
BKLY
-433-
Rernarks
n+rq'
'ffi*ffftf*
Et,
Parameter
Parameter No.
(Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries)
Remarks
BKL3 0
5
5
1
BKLZ
0
5
J
8
BKL4 BKLX, I)I\LZ / I t
BKL3IZ BLK4
Backlash amount respect ively.
of X, Y, Z and 4th
Setting amount 0 to 2550 unit: 0 to 2550 unit:
0.001 nm
(rnm
axes,
output)
0.000I inch (lnch output) progranming, set the value of X axis In diameter (For T series) i-n diameter va1ue. Note I) Unit becomes l/tO in increment system LlL}. t
Setting M series spindle function 2-stage gear
3-stage gear
GRIO
Low
Low
GR2O GR3O
Hieh
l'liddle Hieh
Remarks
L0\{ : LOW Gear l"liddle: Middle Gear Hieh : Hieh Gear
Spindle motor rotation command (analog voltage output)
t.
i;
l0v Voltage (NC) corresponding to the upper limit of the spindle motor rPm
I
|
GR2O
(GR2q
Spindle rotation command
,x A 76t5
vmin
B
lBf V*""
*?ffi
(S code input)
c
Vmux
*?0ff
Designation included in parentheses is concerned with the 3-stage gear.
Note 2) Set a backlash compensation value with a detection unit when an arbitrary command
multiply is used.
-434-
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T seri-es,
Lower
:
M series)
Remarks
The following values are first. set in the parameters . Constant Vmax regarding the upper limit of the spindle motor rpm (parameter No. 542). This constant is obtained by the equation below. The upper Vmax
lirnit of
the
spindle motor rpm The spindle motor rpm when the command voltage is 10 V
= 4095 x
. Constant Vmin regarding the lower limit of the spindle motor rpm (parameter No. 543) Vglin = 4095
x
The lower linit of the soindle motor rDm The spindle motor rpm when the comrnand voltage is 10 V
. Spindle rpm A with low gear whei-the comnand vifltage is l0 V (parameter No. 541) . Spindle rpm B with high (or middle) gearwhen the corrnand voltage is 10 V (parameter No. 539) . Spindle rpm C with high gear when the command volEage is I0 V (parameter No. 555) (3-stage gear) (Note) If the sPecified voltage exceeds the allowable input voltage for the spindle drive system' rpu at l0 V is assumed by proportional calculation, and the resultant assumption should be used. From above, the spindlJ'motor rotation conrmand (0 - 10 V) and the gear selectj-on command (GR30, GR20, GRl0) are outPut for the specified S code, as shom in the Fig. above.
J TU
0
5
3
L\,
9
GRHYJ,\
SPDLC
GRH}IA.X
Sets the spindle speed offset compensation value, that is, compensation value of zero offset of spindle speed command voltage. (for constant surface speed control) Setting range: 0 to +8191 (unit: VELO)
spindle speed (for analog output with spindle funct,ion) at high gear (intermediate gear in case of 3-stage gear).
Maximum
(Spindle speed with spindle speed voltage of Setting range: I to 19999 (unit: rpm)
i I
10V)
In case ofonly one gear, set thi-s value to low gear
--'{'+Tc
e{4ilEF:
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lo\ter : M series) cRI'!(l
5
0
q
0 GRHMIN
GRI'fl(2
0
I
5
GRLMAX
GR}D{3
0
2
5
SPDMAX
GR}D(4 0
4
5
J
SPDMIN ae
GRI'D(I
-
4
GRHMIN
GRLMAX
SPDMAX
SPDI'TIN
*
The spindle speed corresponding to gears I to when the spindle speed command is lOV. (for constant surface speed control) Secting range: 1 to 19999 (unit: rpn) /
4
Setting of the lower limit of the spindle speed high speed gear. (Medium speed gear in 3-step gear selection) (for S analog output type B) (for S analog output) Setting range: I to L9999 (unit: rPn)
when using
Setting of the max. spindle speed at low speed gear (for S analog outPut). Set the spindle speed when the velocity command voltage is 10V. Setting range: 1 to 19999 (unit: rPm) Setting of the upper limit of output value to the spindle motor. (for S analog output) limit of spindle motor 4095 Setting value Upper llax. spindle motor speed x Setting range: I to 4095 Setting of the upper limit of output value to the spindle motor. (for S analog output) Setting value = Lower limit of spindle motor X +uY] Setting range: I ro 4095
-436-
Remarks
.{ Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series,
Lower
:
M series)
Rem:aft5
ii I
1
DRFT3 0
4
5
6
Set a compensation value for drift generated in the Cs-axis servo loop. Setting value 0 to +8191 Unit VELO The value of this parameter changes automatically during the automatic compensation.
DRFT3
JOGFL 0
5
(+
8
JOGFL
of jog feed in exponential acceleration/ deceleration (FL) Setting range 6 co 15000 unit: nrn/min (mm oucpur) 6 to 6000 unit: 0.1 inch/min (inch output)
The lower linit
JOGFL
Note) In increment systen 1/10, the unit is
Ehe
s€rme.
0
5
4
9
FINT
The cutting feedrate in
FINT
AUTO rnode
at turning
po\.rer
on.
Setting range 6 to 15000 unic: mn/rnin (uru input) 6 to 6000 unit: 0.1 inch/nin (inch input) (Generally, set ttO" to this parameter and change it by program command. When the feedrate i.s constant and it is not necessary to change, set the feedrate to this paraDeter. ) SEQINC 0
0 SEQINC
SEQINC
Number increment sequence No.
Setting range:
value in automatic insertion of 0 to
9999
-437-
,*rf,l|;F*
*
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
:
M series)
LOI^lSP
0
5
LOWSP
5
t
I
llj-nimum spindle .speed control mode (G96)
in constant surface
Setting range: 0 to 9999 (unit:
speed
rpm)
BRATEO BRATEO BRATEO
This sets the baud rate when the rea_d_e-{puncher interface is used. (Effective when the setting parameter I/O is 0. ) Relation between the setting value and the baud rate is as follows:
Settiff I 2 3
4 5 6 7 B
9
value
Baud rate 50 100 110
150 200 300 600 1 200
2400
480096 00
-438-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Remarks
BMTEl BMTEl
This sets the baud rate r^/hen the reader/puncher ,-\ interface is used. (Effective when the setting paraaeter I/O is i.;,/
BRATEl
Relation between the setting value and the baud rate is as follows:
Setting value I 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9
ln
l',.2 0
5
5
Baud rate
'k
1)
a
150 200 300 600 I 200
\
-24Sq
-<-jJgaq) f e600 \
5
GRTMAX
Setting of the max. spindle speed at high speed gear in 3-step gear selection (for S analog output) Setting range: I to 19999 (unir: rpm)
GRTMAX
SCLMP
0
5
6
GRTMIN SCLMP
GRTMIN
".t* |.?
50 100 110
Upper linit of spindle speed (for constant surface speed control) Setting range: I to f9999 (unlt: rpn) (Valid both in G96 and G97 rnodes.)
Setting of the'lower timit of.rhe spindle high speed gear in 3-step gear selection. (For S analog output type B) Setting range: I to 19999 (unir: rpm)
when using
-439-
speed
n/*
n
F,
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
Remarks
CRCDL
0
5
5
7
CRCDL
I{hen tool moves along the outside of an acute angle close to 90" during tool nose radius compensation (T-system) or cutEer compensation (M-system) limitations on ignoring a small movement
CRCDL
amount.
Setting range: 0 to 16383 unit: 0 to 16383 unit:
0.001 mrn (mrn input) 0:0001 inch (inch input)
Note) Unit becornes t/10 in increment system 1/f0'
z
(AY)
path after offset Programmed Path
If AX < CRCDL and AZ(AY) < CRCDL, the smal1 movement is ignored. This prevents the workpiece from being affected by sEopping the tool at the corner. ACALFL 0
5
ACAIFL
5
8
Feedrate during rneasuring in automatic tool
ebmpensation function (common for a1I axes) ' Setting range: 0 to 15000 unit: rnrn/min (mrn input) 0 to 6000 unit: 0. I inch/min (inch input)
Note) In increment systern l/10, the unit is the DdulE.
-440-
n :
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lotrer : M series)
Parameter No.
RPDJX 0
5
9
5
RPDJX
RPDJZ 0
0
o
5
RPDJY
RPDJ3 0
6
5
1
RPDJZ
0
o
2
RPDJ4
Rapid traverse rate in
RPDJX,
RPDJZ/Y, PFDJ3 /2, RPDJ4
4th axis in turn. Setting range: 30 to 24000 unit: 30 to 9600 unir: If 'r0rr is set to these of parameEer No. 0518,
JOG
node for X, Y, Z and
nm/min (nn output)
0. I inch/nin (inch output) parameters, the set vd.lues 0519' 0520 and 0521 are
used.
the FML10 of parameter No. 49 to I for the other setting values. In increment systern l/10, the unit is the
Note 1) Set Note 2)
same.
0
5
6
JOGF JOGF
feed rate when the rotary switch position is I0 in feed rate B specification: Setting value I to 2000 Unit mrn/rnin. deg/nin
JOG
(Metric ouEput) Setting value I to 800 Unir 0.1 inch/min deg/nin (Inch output) Note) In increment system 1/10, the unit is rhe same.
-44r-
Remarks
i6;aar*ii,'.
- .....*"crl|ff;F
Parameter (Upper : T series' Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
Remarks
(eg) When 200 is set to Parameter No. 565: Feed rate becomes geometrlcal series of 200 rnm/min (for rnetric output) or 20 inch/rnin (for inch output) in rotary SW position 10.
Rotarv
SW
hrhen parameter
When parameter
los iEion
Manual continuous feed rate
conditions
0VRI=0 *ov8 *ov4 *ov2 *ov
Metric output I *ov8 *ov4 *ov2 *ov1 Me tric Inch input
Inch output Inch Me tric input input input
mrn/
inch/
OVRI=
1
0
0 o
0
o
o
o
min.
I
o
2
o
3
o
4
o
5
o
6
o
7
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o o
o
o
o
o o
o
o
o
o
8
o
9
o
E
o
o
I1
o
o
L2
o
o
l3
o
o
L4
o
o
o
15
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o o
o
o
o o
o
0
rnn/
inch/
min.
min.
r0
0.4
25
t.0
t4
0.5
35
t.4
20
0.8
49
2.O
27
1.1
68
2.7
37
1.5
9s
3.7
52
2.0
t32
5.2
72
3.0
r83
7.2
250
t0.0 r4.0
100 140
5.0
3s0
@
8.0
490
270
rl.0
bdu
27 .O
370
15. 0
950
37.0
520
20. 0
r320
57.0
720
30. 0
I 830
7
r000
40. 0
2
500
2.0
100.0
(Note) O in the table above shows that the corresponding signal contact is open, and Ehe blank shows that it is closed.
-442-
Parameter No.
0
5
6
Parameter
(Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries)
5 JOGFAD
feed rate when rotary SW position is 10 for the additional axis (rotary shaft) in feed rate B specification Setting value 1 to 2000 unit: deg/nin (eg) When 200 is set to parameter No. 566: Feed rate becomes geometrical series of 200 deg/nin in rotary switch position 10. JOG
JOGFAD
Rotarv
SI.I
conditions
I{hen parameter Pos t_-
tion
OVRI=0
2
uous
feed *ov8 *0v4 *0v2 *ovi *ov8 *ov4 *0v2 *ovl rate
o
1
Note
contin
When parameter OVRI=I
0
(Note l)
Manual
2
o
3
o
4
o
5
o
6
o
o
7
o
o
o
o
8
o
9
o
tr
o
ll
o
L2
o
o
l3
o
o
l4
o
o
o
l5
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
10 o
o
o
o
o
ro
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
r00 140
o
@ ?7i
o o
o
52 72
o
o
27 37
o
o
L4
20
o
o
0
deg/nir
o
370 520
o
o
720 r000
o
O in the table above shows that the corresponding signal contact Ls open , and the blank shows that it is closed. In increment s stem I 10, unit is the same.
-443-
Remarks
Parameter
0
6
5
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
No
7
FEDMAD
Upper lirnit of feed rate of all axes in case of feed rate B specification. Setting range: 6 to 15000 unit: deg/rnin (rotary axis) 6 to 15000 unit: mm/rnin (mrn outPut) 6 to 15000 unit: inch/min (inch output)
FEDMAD
Note) In increment systen i/10, unit is the
0
8
o
5
same.
RPDFLAD
of rapid traverse override for the in case of feed rate B specificaaxis additional F tion. Setting range: 6 to 15000 unit: deg/min
Low speed (Fo)
RPDFLAD
Note) In increment systen t/tO, unit is the
6
0
same'
o
ZRNFLAD
at reference point return of the additional axis in case of feed rate B sPecification. Setting range: 6 to 15000 unit: deg/nin
Low feed raEe (FL)
ZRNFLAD
Note) In incremeht svstem 1/10' uniE ls the
0
5
same.
7
SPDLC
SPDLC
Set the spindle control Setting
compensaEion value for zeto offset of speed command voltage (for 54l55 digits
option)
range: 0 - +8191 unit:
-444-
VELO
Remarks
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series,
Lower
:
M series)
Remarks
SLPG},I1
0
0
8
5
AOVLE
End point deceleration distance of automatic
AOVLE:
override at inside corner Part. serting range: I to 3999 Unit: 0.1rnn - Metric inPut 0.01 inch - Inch inPut Set the oPerating range Le.
I
i
!
SLPGM2
I
5
0
I
AOVLS
End point deceleration distance of automatic
AOVLS:
override at inside eorner. Setting range: 1 to 3999 Unit: 0.1 rnur'- Metric inch 0.01 inch - Inch inPut Set the oPerating range Ls.
SLPGI'13 I
0
5
R
2
SLPGM4 0
5
8
3
F1DMAXl
SLPGIN 0
5
8
4
F1DMAX2
FIDMAX1
/
Upper lirnit of Fl digit command feedrate
FID}4AX2:
FIDT'IAXI: FID}(AX2:
linit of Fl to F4 feedrate Upper limit of F5 to F9 feedrate
Upper
-445-
!G
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Setting value: 0 to 15000 unit I mrn/min (Metric output) I to 6000 unit 0.1 inch/rnin (Inch output) For deviation, refer to parameter No. SLPGM
{i
216.
Servo loop gain rnultiplier of spindle for gears I to
i
-4
4 in sequence. Setting value = 2048 x (E/L) x a x 1000 where: E = Voltage when spi-ndle motor is rotating at 1000 rpro (V) L = Angle per spindle motor rotation (normally 360) s = Detecting unit (deg)
SLPGIN
Spindle loop gain Setting value I to 9999 Unit 0.01 (l/sec) SRPDFL
0
5
8
) SPDI"DI
of spindle rapid feed override Setting value 660 to 15000 Unit deg/nin
SRPDFL:
Minimum speed
SPD}fiL:
Sets the spindle speed rpm when low- and high-speed gears are changed over. Or set the spindle speed rpm when 1or.r- and medium-gears (3-step gears are used) are changed over Set Spindle changing speed Spindle max. speed
Setting value: 1 to
4095
-446-
x
4095
Remarks
(FO)
t.''-_ _i
ii
: M serles)
Parameter (Upper : T series '
Parameter No.
Remarks
SZRNFL 0
-t-
i
6
8
5
5. ll tt It I I
SPD}O(H 1
FL speed at spindle orientation Setting value 660 to 15000 Unit deglmin
SZRNFL:
I
Sets the spindle motor speed rpn at the time of medium- and high-speed gear change when 3-s tep gears are used.
I
s,q
Set Spindle changing sp_eed rpm x Spindle nax. sPeed
F-fl
r-.
Setting value: 1 to
F"t
'i
4095
4095
'* MORT
+l
i.a
0
8
5
7
t
t
i
;
*
Spindle orientation M-code Set ting value 06 to 97
MORT
I1 $
MSRES -I
8
0
8
1'
Splndle indexing reset M-code Setting value 06 to 97
MSRES
G F:.'E
\I
t
I G',1'
MSINDX n
8
9
I'
M-code inlrial
MSINDX
value for M-code lndexlng
Setting value 06 to
$:
92
# MSDEG
0
{9.
5
MSDEG
9
0
Baslc rotatlon angle for M-code lndexlng Settlng value I to 60 Unlt deg
*l t.i
fG
-447-
itffie:'
#
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
PDWEL
0
5
I
9
Dwell time at the tiure of C-axis unclamp the drilling cycle Setting value 0 to 32767 Unit msec
PDWEL
command
in
PECKC
0
5
9
2
Setting of return amount (d) for peck drilling in the drilling cycle Setting value O to 32767 Unit 0.001 uun (l'le tric input) Setting value O to 32767 Unit 0.0001 inch (Inch input)
PECKC
Note) Ifiit b.cor""
1/ 10
in increment system 1/10. STPEX
n
5
9
J
STPEX
STPEZ
0
5
9
STPEY
0
5
9
5
0
5
9
6
STPE4 STPE4 qTDFY
Z, 3,
Y, 4
Position error i inrit rral-ue during X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, 3rd axis and 4th axis stop in seqr-re;:ce Setting value 0 to 32767 Detecting unit
h'
& t
-448-
---*
t
;
:
t-
I I
I
I
-t.
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
J
: T series, Lower :
M
series)
Remarks
PCHK 0
5
8
9
Minimum value of Progran No. used posts I and 2.
PCI{K:
0
9
5
in
coruron i.n tool
9
TLCNEC
Tool life management ignore Setcing value 0 to 9999
TLCNEG:
No.
PARTRQ
0
o
0
0 PARTRQ
9eqs--llrg number
PARTRQ:
Setting value
of
0_ rg_
machined 99pj
parts required.
PEXPJX 0
6
0
I l-
PEXPJX
PEXPJZ 0
o
n
2
PEXPJY
n
PEXPJ3 6
0
J
PEXPJZ
-449-
I
oply
0TT
I;rF
Parameter No.
Pararneter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
PEXPJ4 0
0
6
4
PEXPJ4
Sets exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant sequentially in manual feed. Setting value 0 to 4000 Unit: msec When no exponential acceleration/deceleration is used, set them to 0.
PEXPJX-
PEXPJ4:
PFLJGX 0
0
o
5
PFLJGX
PFLJGZ 0
0
6
6
PFLJGY
PFLJG3 0
6
0
PFLJGZ
PFLJG4 0
6
0
8
PFLJG4
Sets exponential acceleration/deceleration rate sequenti-ally in manual feed.
PFLJGXPFLJG4:
Setting value 6 ro i5000 Serting value 6 to 6000 Usuallv set them to 0.
Unit: Unir:
INPDX 0
q
6
INPDX
INPDZ 0
o
I
0
INPDY
-4so-
rn/min
inch/min
Remarks
Parameter (Upper
ParameEer No.
: T series,
Lower
:
M series)
Rem:rks
INPD3 0
6
I
I INPDZ
INPD4 0
6
I
2
INPD4
Sets the in-position width between a feed block a feed block. (Must not be used) (Valid when parameter No. 45 CCINP=l)
INPDZ
to INPD4
0
6
I
3
and
POFF
TPFDT
Time constants of spindle and Z-axis aeceleration/ decelerati-on in Ehe tapping in the rigid mode
TPFDT:
(Exponential/linear type is selected by TPSUP.) The threading accuracy is affeeted when the time constant is either too long or too short. ' Data type: Word type Setvalue: 0-4000 : msec UniE Standard setting: 200 - 150
0
I
4
POFF
TPFFL
TPFFL:
(valid only when TPSUP = 0) at exponential acceleration/deceleration of the spindle and Z-axis in the rigid tapping. When this is increased, lact time is reduced, but the threading accuracy is affected. Data Eype: Word type Setvalue: 6-15000 : rnm/min Unit
Lower speed linit
Srandard
settlng:
30
-
10
-45r-
ttPoFFtt means that power should be
turned off
whenever the parameter is changed.
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
0
I
6
: T series, Lower :
M series)
ttPOFF" means that power should be
POFF
5
TPLPG
0
turned off
Spindle and Z-axis Position control loop gain in the rigid tapping. This has a large influence uPon the threading accuracy. Make fine adjustment to obtain the optimurn value by perforrning the cutEing test and matching wiEh the loop gain multiplier. Data type: Word tYPe Set value: I - 9999 -l : 0.01 msec Unit value: 1500 - 3000 set Standard
TPLPG:
1
o
L
o
Remarks
whenever the parameter is changed.
POFF LPGM9
LPGM9:
of the spindle in the rigid tapping for the high speed range. This has a large influence upon the thread accuracy. Make fine adjustment Eo obtain the optimum value by peiforming the cutEing test and natching with the loop gain. Data type: Word tYPe Setvalue: I-32767 Calculation = 2048 * E/L * G * 1000' E = Speed comrnand voltage at 1000 rpn L = Spindle rotation angle per spindle motor rotation G = Detection uniE Calculation example: trr4ren the configuration is as shown Position in the left drawing: coder E = 1.667 [V]
Loop gg,in nultiplier
(motor
L =
SPINDLE
of
6000 rpm
at 10 tvl)
360"
(Spindle is rotated one turn bY one spindle motor rotacion. ) p = la/4096 = 720" 14096 = 0.17578'
I\'lOTOR
l:l;2
La = 720" (Spindle must make two rotations = 360o * 2 for rot.ating the position coder one turn. ) 4096 = Detection pulse per position coder rotation
-452-
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower :
Parameter No. Gea
r ratio
cod er
I I I I
M
serie s )
between the spindle and the position
I ... 0. 2 ... 0. 4 ...0. 8 ... 0.
0 8 7 8 9 deg I 7 5 7 8 deg 3 5 I 5 6 deg 7 0 3 I 3 deg
Therefore, the loop gain nultiplier = 2048 x L.667 /360
x
0.17578
x
= L667
1000
Note) Do not ml-ss to set the gear ratio parameter (No. 0028) between the spindle and the position coder. Decide the detection uniE based on thi-s parameter.
0
6
I
POFF
TPS}'( Maximum
TPSMX:
allowable speed of the spindle in the rigid
tapping. Data type: Word type Set value: spindle: position coder gear ratio 1: t 0 - 7400
l:2 1:4
,\"
t..
1:8
: PRM Standard setting:
Unit
1r'
0
6
I
000-
9999 9999 9999
3600
8
TPIPZ
TPIPZ:
Z-axis in-position width in the rigid tapping
Data type: Word type
Setvalue:
l-32767
Unit : DetecEion unit Standard setting: 2O
-453-
ttPoFFtt means that po\ter should be
turned off
whenever the parameter is changed.
G.*96
4{
,fi
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks .: t I
0
6
I
* 9
.x
I
I
INP9
I
t Spindle in-position width in the rigid tapping I,'{ren this is too much increased, the threading accuracy is affected. Data type: I^lord type SeEvalue: 0-32767 Unit : DeEection unit Standard setting: 20
INP9:
$
:
.n
€
t
:I
: *
0
2
0 TPERZ
TPERZ:
Linit value of position deviation during Z axis in the rigid tapping rnode Data type: Word type Setvalue: 0-32767 Unit
:
DetecEion
unlt
movement
a one-tenth resolution det.ector is used, the unit becomes Een times the detection unit. When
-4s4-
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
0
6
: T series,
Lower
:
M series)
Remarks
I
2
TPER9 t
Limit value of position deviation during novement of the spindle (5th axis) in the rigid mode tapping
TPER9:
Data type: Word type Set. value: o - 32767 Calculation = S x 360/60 Maximum
S:
rigid
G: G:
Spindle:
x l/G x l/G x
s . ..
3600 3000
@...
0.17578
(Gear
ratio
coder l: 2)
0
o
2
1.5
I : I ... 0. 0 8789deg I : 2 ...0. I 7578deg 1 : 4 ... 0. 3 5156deg I : 8... 0.
TPER5 =
x
tapping (Value of paraneter No. 0517) Axis loop gain in the rigid node tapping (Value of parameter No. 06f5) Detection type Position coder Gear ratio
Calculation example: G ...
100
spindle speed to perform the
7
0313deg
between spindle and position
x 360) ldo x I/3000 x 1/0.17578 x . 100x1.5=6144
(3600
2
TPESZ
TPESZ:
Limit value of posiEion deviation during stop of Z axis in the rigid node tapping Data type: Word type Setvalue: 0-32767 Unit : Detection unit Standard
setting:
500
ril
.ll
if;
.t
jl il
'l I
-45s-
I
FF?9.8!{4S':.
q Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
0
6
2
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
3
TPES9
LimiE value of position deviation during stop of the spindle in the rigid mode tapping Data type: Word type
TPES9:
Setvalue:
0-32767
Unit : Detection unit Standard value: 500
0
6
L
4
ttPoFFtt means that power should be
POFF LGM9M
LGM9M:
SPINDLE MOTOR
turned off
Spindle loop gain rnultiplier in the rigid rnode tapping for rniddle gear. (Set when one or more gears are used). Data type: Word type l-32767 setvalufi Calculation = 2048 x E/L x G x 1000 E = Speed command voltage at 1000 rpra L = Spindle rotation angle per spindle motor rotation G = Detection unit Calculation example: trrlhen the configuration is as shown
in the left drawi-ng: E = 1.667 [V] (motor of 6000 rpm ar 10 [v]) L = 720"
G= T^ Ld-
-
(Spindle makes two rotaEions when spindle motor rotates one turn. )
La/ 4096 720" 14096 7
2A"
= 0.17578"
(Spindle must make two rotations=360"x2for rotating the position coder one turn. ) 4096 = Detection pulse per position coder rotation Loop gain multiplier = 2048 * * 1.667 |TZO x 0. 17578 * 1000 = 833
-456-
-whenever the parameter is changed.
-t i
D
*
J
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
:
M series)
J i
0
o
2
5
Remarks
ttPoFFtt means that power should be
POFF LGM9H
turned off
Spindle loop gain nultiplier for high speed gear in the rigid tapping. (Used for 3-srage gear).Data type : Word type Setring value: I to 32767 (Note) Refer to parameter formula.
0
6
L
No
. 0624 for calculation
7
ERR9
Spindle position deviation value in the rigid tapping. (Used for diagnosis) Data type: Word type Unit : DeEection unit
ERR9:
0
6
z
8
IPL9
IPL9:
t
Spindle distribution amount in the rigid tapping. (Used for diagnosis) Data type: Word type Unit : Detection unit
-457-
whenever the parameter is ctianged.
a=,$*8*.
i'+'
il Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
LTIXl 0
7
0
0
LTlXI 1
,.
LTTZI 0
0
I
I ; i
1
LTiYI
)
I
.t
d
0
0
.,
LTIZl
0
7
0
J
a
LTI41
LTlX2 0
0
4
LT 1X2
LTIZ2 0
7
0
LTlY2
0
7
0
6
LTLZ2
0
7
0
I
LTI42
-4s8-
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
Lrlnll TI-
I
: T series,
Lower
:
M series)
t
I
nth top in
axis
square zone (see figure)
.)v
)-t 2
Set stroke lirnit mentioned above. Serring amount 0 to *999ggggg (unit: 0.001 rnrn in mm output or 0.000I Tnch in inch outpuL) Set with the distance from the reference poLnt. In the case of diameter designation, set the X axis with the diameter designation value. (For OT) The outside of the boundary set with the Parameter is set as the inhibited region. Normally, set at the max. stroke of the machine.
the axis enters the inhibited region' overtravel alarm is indicated. A margin should be provided with respect. to the stroke to cope wi-th ' the fluctuation in the detecting operation. As a rule, in the case of metric designation, multiply the rapid traverse by a factor of 1/5 and set it as the margin. When
(Example) Rapid traverse 10 m/rnin.
10x115=2nm
The actual position of the machine slightly
a
differs from the position stored in the CNC unit after the power is turned on, emergency stop is reset' or servo alarm is reset. Therefore, before starting operation, be sure to return Ehe axes to reference point. Otherwise, overtravel detecting position deviates by the value corresponding to the above-described deviation in the position. LTI
Axis (Exarnple) LTIZI =
-1
and LTIZZ
the Z axis stroke
=
name
L
becomes
infinite.
(Note 1) For the axis whose stroke is infinite, the incremental command can be specified. If the absolute co-mand is specified, the absolute register may overflow and it is not operated normallY. (Note 2) These parameters cannot be set for the rotary axis. (Note 3) Unlt becomes 1/10 tn increment system 1/10.
-459-
Remarks
d Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lorver : M series)
I Remarks
f
'+
T
{ 0
7
0
PRSX
c
PRSX
0
'1
PRSZ
0
9
PRSY
PRS3
0
7
I
0 PRSZ
0
1
PRSX, PRSY,
PRSZ, PRS4
I
AC
PRS4
These set the coordinate values of the reference point of the X, y, Z and 4th axes when automatic coordinate system setting is conducted, respec tive ly. Setting range: 0 to +99999999 unir: 0.001 rnrn (mm inpur) unit: 0.0001 inch (inch inpur) Note) Unit becornes 1/10 in incremenr systen 1/lO.
I
-460-
sfs
Pararneter No.
0
1
I
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lourer : M series)
SPTIME 2
PECINTX
PSGRDX
t
U
3
PECINTY
n
-
PSGRDZ I
4
PECINTZ
0
1
I
5
PECINT4 SPTIME
Tine (P) when starting rhe spindle speed fluctuation after the comanded speed is not reached a certain time. Serting range: 0 to ggggggg (unit: r"".)'
PECINTX,
Pitch error compensation Lnterval for each axis Setting range 8000 to 99999999 unir: 0.001 m (m inpur) 4000 to 99999999 unir: 0.000f inch (inch inpur)
PEXINTY, PECINTZ, PECINT4
Note 1) It zero is set, no compensation is done. Note 2) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system t/iO. PSGRDX, PSGRDZ
Grid width of X and Z axes, respectively. Setting range: 0 ro 99999999 unit: 0.001 nn unit:
(run output) 0.001 inch (inch ourpur)
No position signal is output vhen the setting value is 0.
In order to output the position signal securely without any skip when each axis moves at the maximum setting value 24 m/min of the rapid traverse speed, the grid width must be set to be more than 6400.
Note) Unit
becomes 1/10
in increment sysrem 1/10.
-461-
Remarks
F.
rr
I t
t rt [, I
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
MRCCD 1
I
7
U
Depth of eut in multiPle Setting range:
MRCCD
I to 99999999 unit: L to 99999999 unit:
repetitive cycle G7l'
G72.
0.001 mn (rm input) 0.0001 inch (inch input)
Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system l/10. MRCDT
0
7
6
t
Relief amount in multiPle repetitive cycle G7l' Gl2. Setting range: I to 99999999 unit: 0. 001 rnm (rnetric input) | 6 9v999999 unit: 0.0001 ineh (inch input)
MRCDT
Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system l/10. PESCX
0
1
0
2
q
PESCZ
DFC'Y PESCZ
0
Relief values in X and Z directions in rnultiple repetitive cycle G73, respectively. Setting range: I to *99999999 unit: 0.001 nn (mm input) 1 ro 1999 99999 uni-t : 0 . 0001 inch (inch input) Note) Unit becomes t/t0 in increment system 1/10.
'462-
Remarks
Parameter No.
0
7
2
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
PATIM
I
of div.isions in urultiole repetitive Setting range: I to 99999999
Number G73.
PATIM
cyc1e.'
GROVE
0
7
2
2
Return amount in multiple repetitive cycle G74,
GROVE
Setting range: 0 to 99999999 unir: O to 99999999 unir:
C75
0.001 m (nn input) 0.000i inch (inch inpur)
Note) Unit becornes I/10 in increment system t/10. THRPT
0
2
3 t
of repetitions of final finishing in multiple repetitive cycle G76. Setting range: I to gggggggg Number
THRPT
0
THANG 7
TIIANG
2
4
Tool nose angle in nultiple repetitive cycle Setting value: 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, g0
-453-
G76.
Remarks
F. f.r
ti
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
THCLM
0
5
2
l"linimum G76.
THCLM
depth of cut in multiple repetitive cYcle
Setting range: 0to 99999999 unit: 0to 99999999 unit: Note)
Unit
becornes 1/ 10
0.001 nnn (nmr input) 0.0001 inch (inch inPut)
in increment system 1/10. THDFN
0
7
2
6
Finishing allowance in multiple repetitive cycle
TT{DFN
c76.
Setting ?.ttg"
t
O to 99999999 unit: 0 to 99999999 unit:
Note) Unit
becornes 1/10
nrm (uur input) 0.0001 inch (inch inPut)
0.00I
in increment system 1/10. WIMAX
0
l
I{IMAX
2
8
Sets the tolerance value of tool wear offset incremental input. Setting range: I to 999999 unit: 0.001 run (nur input) unit: 0.0001 inch (inch inPut) Note)
Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system 1/10.
-464-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series) WOMAX
0
o
L
7
Sets the uaximum of the tool wear offset value. Setting range: I to 9999999 unlt: o.ool m (m inPut) unit: 0.0001 inch (inch input) (Check together with pararneter No. 0728 in the case of incremental input)
WOMAX
Note) Unit becones l/10 in increment system 1/10. I,IIRSS 0
7
3
0 PROTAG
Used for mirror image for opposite tool post. This parameter sets the distance between the tool posts in the shifting of coordinate system. Setting range: I to 9999999 unit: 0.001 m (m output)
MIRSS
unit:
0.000I inch (inch output)
Sets with a radius value.
Note) Unit becornes 1/10 in increment syster ,rr0. Parameter of angle vilue used when no angle
PROTAG:
is present at coordinate rotation. Setting value: unlt: 0.00I deg. -360000 to 360000 CANMAX
0
1
3
I PSCRT
GANMAZ
0
3
2
-465-
command
Remarks
Parameter No.
Pararneter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Remarks
The value of e on the X ar.d Z axes in the automatic tool compensation function' respectively. Setting range: I to 99999999 unit: 0.001 uun (mn output) I to 99999999 unit: 0.0001 inch (inch output) The X axis value should be set with a radius value.
GAN]"IAX, GANMAZ
Note) Unit becomes l/10 in increment system 1/10. Parameter of magnifLcation value used when no rnagnification command is present in scaling. Setting value: I to 999999 (Unit depends on parameter) Unit: x0.001, x0.00001
PSCRT:
EPCX
0
7
J
3
0
7
3
4
EPCZ
The value of e on the X and Z axes, in the autornatic tool compensation functi-on, respectively. Setting range: L to 99999999 unit: 0.001 nun (urn output) I to 99999999 unit: 0.0001 inch (inch output) The X axis value should be set with a radius value.
EPCX, EPCZ
Note) Unit becomes 1/lO in increment system 1/10. REF2X 0
3
5
REF2X
REF2Z 0
l
3
o
REF2Y
-465-
q
GF
Parameter No.
0
1
3
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
T
REF2Z
0
7
3
8
REF24
Distance from the reference polnt to the 2nd reference point for X, Y, Z, and 4th axes, respectively. Setting range: 0 to +99999999 unit: 0.001 rnm (mm ourpur) O to Tgggggggg unir: 0.0001 inch (incir output) 0 to ;9999999 unit: 0.001 deg (rotary a*il)
REF2X, REF2Y,
REFZZ, REF24
Note) Unit becornes 1/10 in increment system l/10. ABSXP 0
9
7
ABSXP
a
ABSZP 0
4
0 ABSYP
l€
F,
0
7
4
I ABSZP
0
7
4
2
ABS4P ABSXP, ABSYP,
ABSZP, ABS4P
Counter data at the reference point when the
absolute pulse coder is used. These parameters are automatically set when the tool has ret.urned co the reference point. So it is not necessary to set values to these paiameters.
-467-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower : TLSXP
n
3
7
LT2X1
TLSXY 0
7
4
4
LT2YI
TLSZP 0
7
{+
5
LT2ZI
TLSZM 0
7
q
6
LT24I
LT2Xl 0
7
LT2X2
LT2ZI 0
d
1
LT2Y2
0
9
7
LT2Z2
0
1
5
0
LT242
0
l
LT2X2 5
I EXOFS
-468-
I
M series)
Remarks
1
;l
1
j
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
LT222 0
5
a
EXOFS2
LT2
FF T
'
of square area Represents the axis Set the stroke limit represented above. Setting value 0 to +99999999 Unit 0.001
Apex No.
Setting value
0
to +99999999 Unir
urn
(l"letric output)
0.0001 inch (Inch output)
Set the stroke lirnit by the distance from the reference point. For the designation of dianeter, set X-axis sith the diameter.designated value. Use parameter INOUT (No. 24) to set the forbidden area to the inside or outside. Note) Unit becoines l/t0 in increment system l/10. TLSXP
X axis * distance to contaet surface (Xp)
TLS)O{
X axis - distance to contact surface
TLSZP
Z axis * d.istance to contact surface (Zp)
TLSZM
Z axis - distance to contact surface
(Xm) |
(Zrn)
Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system 1/10. Set the distance from the measurement standard polnt to each contact surface (with sign). For the diameter designated axis, set in diameter
value.
X axis
surface
Z axis
X axis
,_1)
,J
contact surface
-469-
Remarks
T I T
,
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Check stroke lirnit using these parameters, not parameter Nos. 0700 to 0707 when EXLM2 (G129.6) LT242: (M series) signal is ON.
LT2XI
Note) Valid only when parameter No. 0I5 1
0
LM2=1
J
5
EXOFS3
0
4
5
7
EXOFS4
EXOFSI
_
External work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and th-axis in sequence. Setting value 0 to +7999 Unit 0. 001 rmn (Metric output) serring lalue 0 to +7999 Unit 0.0001 inch (Inch output)
4
Note) Unit becoures 1/10 in incrernent system 1/10. This parameter sets the zero-point position of work coordinate system (G54 to G59). The work zeropoint offset amount is different for every work coordinate system, but this parameter sets the offset amount colnmon to all work coordinate systems. Normal1y, machine-side input (external data input) is used for automatic settl-ng.
0
-
5
5
ZOFlSl
PECINTX U
7
5
6
ZOFlS2
PECINTZ 0
7
ZOF
1
-470-
S3
Remarks
,?
f
j .,t ;
Parameter (Upper : T series' Lovter :
Parameter No.
M
series)
PECINT3 0
7
8
5
zoFls4
PECINT4 0
7
5
9
ZOF2S
0
o
I
0
zoE2s2
0
7
o
t zoF2s3
0
6
z
zoF2s4
zoFlsl
-4
1st work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence. (cs4)
Setting value 0 to +99999999 Unit 0.001 mm (Metric output) setting value 0 ro +99999999 unit 0.0001 inch (Inch output) Normally, data are inputted from the work coordinate system setting screen. Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system t/10.
-47r-
3 Q
Parameter
Compensation intervals at pitch error compensation of each axis.
PECINTX, PECINTZ, PECINT3, PECINT4:
ZOF2S
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
No.
Setting value: hrlren the radius is designated 8000 - 99999999 (Metric outPut) 4000 - 99999999 (Inch outPut) Ilowever' set in diameter value for the diameter designated axis. hhen the diameter is designated I6000 - 99999999 (Metric outPut) 8000 - 99999999 (Inch orrtPut) 2nd work zero-point offset amount of X-axis' Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence.
I
-4
(css )
Setting value
0
to
+99999999
Setting value
0
to
+99999999
unir 0.001 rmr
(Metric output) Unit 0.0001 inch
(Inch output) Nornally, data are inputted from the work coordinate system setting screen. Note) Unit becornes l/10 in increment system 1/10.
0
l
6
3
z0F3s
I
4
0
ZOF3S2
b
0
5
ZOF3S3
o
0
6
ZOF3S4
ZOF35
-4
1
3rd work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence. (cs6)
Unit 0.001 unt (Metric input) unir 0.000I inch Set t ing value 0 to +99999999 (Inch input) Normally' data are input from the work coordinate system setting screen. Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system 1/10'
Setting value 0 to !99999999
-472-
Remarks
d
*
1it
.
*
...tr
I
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
0
-
o
Remarks
7
zoF4s
t
IDSTX 0
6
8
zoE4s2
IDSTZ 0
6
7
9
zoF4s3
0
7
0
ZOF4S4
z0F4s
1
-t+
4th work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence. (cs 7)
Serring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.001 ffi (Metric input) Setring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.0001 inch (Inch input) work coordinate Normally, data are input from the system setting screen. Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system 1/10. IDSTX:
Distance from the first. tool head standard point the 2nd tool head standard point on the X axis.
t.o
only
0TT
IDSTZ:
Distance from the first tool head standard point to the 2nd tool head standard point on the Z axis. Setring 0 ro +99999999 Unit:0.001 umr (mn output) 0.0001 inch (Inch output)
only
0TT
-473-
's
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
M series)
Remarks
-j
q t
0
I
7
ZOF5S
1
0 ZOF5S2
0
l
7
n
a
a
J
zoF5s3
4
ZOF5S4
5th work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis , Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence. (cs8) Serring value 0 to +99999999 Unit 0.001 rm (Metric output) serring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.0001 inch (Inch output) Norma11y, data are input frorn the work coordinate system setting screen.
I
zoF5s
-4
Note) Unit becomes 1/10 in increment system i/10.
0
I
7
5
ZOF6S
0
7
1
I
6
ZOE632
-
474
-
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series,
Lower
:
M series)
0
zoF6s3
0
8
7
ZOF6S4 ZOF6S
6th work zero-point offset amount of X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis and 4th axis in sequence.
1
-4
(cse)
serring value 0 ro +99999999 Unit 0.001 urn (Metric output) Setting value 0 to +99999999 Unir 0.0001 inch Normalty, data are inpur from the system setting screen.
ri:1":":::il:1"
Note) Unit becones l/I0 in increment system. PARTAL
PARTAI
{g=-sl-eaqb+leq parts in total Setting value 0 to ggggYggg -: REF3X 0
7
8
0 REF3X
-475-
a
Parameter (Upper
Parameter No.
: T series,
Lower
:
M series)
REF3Z 0
I
B
REF3Y
REF33 0
d
7
2 I(-L.r
JZ
REF34 0
1
8
3
REF34
Sets distance of 3rd reference point on X axis to 4th axis from lst reference point sequentially.
REF3X REF34:
ing;rralue o - +99999999 Unit: o - iggsggggg Unit:
Set t
0.00f rnrn (Metric output) 0.0001 inch (Inch ourpur) REF4X
0
7
8
4
REF4X
REF4Z 0
7
tJ
5
REF4Y
REF43 n
7
8
o
REF4Z
-
476
-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
:
M
series
)
Remarks
REF44 1
0
8
7
REF44
Sets distance of 4th reference point on X axis to 4th axis froro lst reference point sequentially.
REF4X REF44:
Setting value 0 - +99999999 Unit: O -1SSSSSSSS Unir:
0
7
8
0.001 rnm (Merric ourpur) 0.0001 inch (rnch oulput)
8
FIDFl
0
1
8
9 F
IDF2
I
0
9
0
FlDF3
0
0
9
-,
9
I
F
IDF4
F
1DF5
2
IH
|[
iii
il
ii
tl
rl
-477-
ll
-
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
0
9
7
J F
IDF6
o
0
FIDFT
l
0
9 F
0
6
9
?
FlDFI,2,
3, 4, 5,
7,8,
IDFS
FIDF9
Feedrate for Fl digit
6, Setting value
0 - 15000 Unit: 0 - 6000 Unit:
9:
coflrmands
FI to F9 in
sequence
0.1 nrar/min (Metric output) 0.1 inch/min (Inch output)
the manual pulse generator is rotated to change the feedrate for Fl digit comnand, the value of this parameter changes accordingly. This parameter can be set even in setting.
When
0
7
9
9
A3S9 ABS9:
Spindle distribution cumulative value for the rigid tapping. (Used for diagnosis) data type: 2-word type Unit : Detection unit
-
478
-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper: Tseries, Lower: Mseries)
PECORGX I
0
I
0
0
PECORGX
X axis zero point of pitch error compensation. Setting range 0 to 127
PECORGX
1
0
0
I I
I
I
2
8
2
0
0
n
Setting of pitch error compensation amount for Z axLs. Setting range 0 to +7
PECORGZ PECORGY
PECORGY
Y axis zero point of pitch error compensation.. Setting range 0 to 127
PECORGZ
Z axis zero point of pitch error'compensation. | setting range 0 to 127
2
0
0
I
to 2
I
2
8
3
0
0
0
Setting of pitch error compensation amount for Y axis (for M series), Z axis (for T series). Setting range 0 to +7
PECORG3 PECORGZ
'
PECORGZ
Z axis zero point of pitch error compensation. setting range 0 to I27
PECORG3
3rd axis zero point of pitch error compensation. serting range 0 to 127
-479-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper i T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
0
.)
0
Setting of picch error compensation amount for Z axis (for M series), 3rd axis (for T series). Setting range 0 to +7
to 3
I
4
0
8
PECORG4
0
0
PECORG4
4th axis zero point of pitch error compensation. Setting range 0 to L27
PECORG4
0
4
1
0
I
Setting of pitch error compensation amount for 4th axis. Setting range 0 to +7
to q
I
5
0
8
PECORG5
0
0 PECORG5
5th axis pitch error origin Setting range 0 r^ -Ll 17
PECORG5
5
n
0
I <
t 5
I
6
0
t+'
axis pitch error offset setting 0 to +7
Set ting range 8
PECORG6
0
0. PECORG6
PECORG6
6th axis pitch error origin Setting range 0 to +127
-480-
Remarks
Pararneter (Upper
Parameter No.
0
0
6
I
6th axis pitch error offset setting Setting range 0to*7 z
8
0
0
7
M series)
1
)
o
: T series, Lower :
Blr
DECIS
SCWS
DECIS
SCI^IS
I
76543210
No.
DECIS
Machine decelerates when deceleration signal is I
1:
reference point return. l'lachine decelerates when deceleration signal is reference point return.
0:
scws l:
1n
0 1n
Miniuum comand.increment is the inch system (Machine inch system). Minimum cowtand increment is the metric system (Machine metric systeur) .
0:
PPDS
0
7
0
2 PPDS
Bir
43
No.
PPDS
Relative coordinate setting. Relative coordinate setting.
1: 0:
7
0
0
zr0
IS
also preset by coordinate
l-s
not preset by coordinate
ZYL6
zt't5
ZIT6
ZYL1
J
Bit No.
7
6
543210
5th/6th axes reference Point return direction and backlash initial directlon at Power 0N in the order of ZM5 and ZM61: Minus direction 0: Plus direction 1
Ii
I I
-48r-
t"
.ry'
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
'l
0
D!{R5
GRD5
DMR5
GRD6
0
Bit
32t0
654
No.
Detection mult iplier for 5th/6th axes in the order of GRD6
DMR6
GRD6
Bir
43
765
No.
Reference counter capacity and 6.
0
t
Bir
APRSS
OFFVYS
APRSS
)FFVYS
76543210 Sets automatic coordinate system at reference point reEurn. Does not set automatic coordinate system at
1:
0: OFFVYS
GRD5
0
No.
APRSS
2L0
for 5th/6th axes in the order of
g
reference point return.
Servo alarm d.oes not occur even when VRDI is ON before outputting PRDY. Servo alarm occurs when VRDY is ON before outputting
l.
0:
PRDY.
U
7
BiI APC5/ APC 6
SUB
I
APC6
APC5
SUB
1
APC6
APC5
I
z
NO
1: l,ihen the absolute pulse coder detector is rnounted. 0: When the absolute pulse coder detector is not mounted.
SUB
I
APC5, APC6
l: 0:
PMC PMC
axis control is the 5th axls. axis control is the 5th/6th axes.
: Absolute pulse coder provided. 0: Absolute pulse coder not provided.
.1
t' : : :
6
0
0
l
D}G.6
and
DMR5
-482-
Remarks
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower
Parameter No.
0
A3S5
ABS6
ABS5
No.
ABS5,
1:
Reference point position in absolute pulse coder is
0:
Reference point position in absolute corder is
defined.
ABS6
0
7
ABS6 2
2
Bir
series)
:
PNGMLK
ROT6
ROT5
PNGMLK
ROT6
ROT5
2
3
Bit
not defined. (The signal becomes r'1r' automatlcally if the reference point return is performed by Pl'tC axis control. Do not change setting by the time the detector is replaced.) When installing the CNC or replacing the position detector, always set these Parameter to 0, turn off and on the power then perforn manual reference point return.
No.
signal is invalid for the 5th/5th axes. MLK signal is valid for the 5th/6th axes. ROT5,6 1 : The 5th/6th axes is a rotary axis. 0: The 5th/6th axes is a linear axis
PNGULK 1: 0:
MLK
CMR5
0
I
0 CMR5
CMR6 7
t
0
1
CMR6
Comnand
multiplier
for 5th/6th axes in the order of
Cl,lR6.
7
t
3
DSPSUB
I
DSPSUB
I
0
-483-
CMR5 and
ii:
F-
#'
ilt?
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Parameter No.
DSPSUB2
t
t
J
DSPSUB2
DSPSUBl,
Set the axis names of the 5th/6th axes in sequence. The setting code shall be in accordance with the general switch code on the operatorrs panel.
2z
Usable characters:
(x, Y, z, u, V, w, A, B, C, H, 0 - 9, O, N, D, -, .)
Note)
displaying the 5/6th axis posi-tions, the run hour, for example, is displayed on the overall position display screen.
When
INP5 0
5
INP5
u 7
5
0
rNp6
I INP6
In-position width for 5th/6th axes in the order of INP5 and INP6. SERR5 1
0
5LKK]
SERR6 5
0
5
SERR6
Lirnit val-ue of rnoving position deviation for 5th/6th axes in the order of -'SnnnS and SERR6. GRDS5 7
5
0
8 GRDS5
-484-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series,
Lower
:
M series)
GRDS6
0
5
7
9
GRDS6
Grid shift amount for 5th/6th axes in the order of
GRDS5 and
GRDS6.
LPGINS 5
7
LPGINS
Settlng of position control loop gain (5th/6th axes Ln co-.on). RPDF5 7
5
I
8
RPDF5
RPDF6 1
5
t
9
RPDF6
5th/6th axis rapid traverse rate in the order of
a
.
RpDF5 and RpDF6.
LINT5 5
a
2
LINT5
LINT6 7
5
2
3
LINT6
Time constant of linear acceleration and deceLeration for 5th/6th axes in the order of LINT5 and LINT6.
!
1
;
i
I
I I
I
-485-
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper
: T series, Lower :
l'1
series)
FEEDTS 9
2
7
FEEDTS
Time constant of cutting feed exponent ial accel-eration/
deceleration (5th/6Eh axes in
common).
FEDFLS 0
5
7
FEDFLS
Lower lirnit speed of cutting feed exponential acceleration and deceleration (FL) (5th/6th axes in common). Usuallv set this parameter to 0. ZRNFLS 3
5
4 ZRNFLS
Low feedrate common)
at reference point return (FL) (5th/6th axes
l-n
.
BKL5 1
5
3
5
BKL5
DT\LO 7
5
3
6
t-*
Backlash amounc for 5th/6th axes in the order of BKL5 and
STPE5 7
5
9
3
STPE5
-486-
BKL6.
Remarks
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lorrer : M series)
STPE6 5
4
9
STPE6
Linit value of positional deviatlon for 5th and 6th axes at stop in the order of STPE5 and STPE6. PSANGNS
I
5
6 PSANGNS
Subspindle 54/55 digit control (Analog output). Analog output gain adjusting data. (Set the data for gain adjustment at analog output.) The setting range, etc. is the sarne as with the main spindle parameter (No. 5f5).
PSAI{GNS
SPDLCS 1
5
3
9 SPDLCS
Set Ehe subspinble speed offset compensated valuel the zero offset compensation value of subspindle speed corumand voltage.
SPDLCS
LTI5 I 7
0
0
LTI5 I
LTI6l 1
0
I
LTI6I
LT152 7
1
0
4
LT152
-487-
.
Remarks
1q*[ *!flprr{pee
! I
.i
Parameter No.
Parameter (Upper : T series, Lower : M series)
Remarks
_"-
I
LTI62 7
0
7
5
LTI62
LT151, 161, L52, r52 Stored st.roke lirnit of 5th and 6th axes.
PRS5 1
7
0
8 PRS5
1
0
PRS6
q
PRS6
PRS5,
PRSS
?
Coordinate value of 5th and 6th axes reference point.
8
5
0
0
6
5
6
5
B
o
0
0
I
6
Parameters related to dlgital
servo for 5th axis.
Parameters related to digital
servo for 6th axis. i
6
I
-488-
Ttre parameters of each axis for the digital following:
The
servo
Axis
Parameter No.
Product
-
OT/OG
X axis
OM
X axis
or/oc
Z axis
OM
Y axis
lst axis
8100
The 2nd axis
8200
The 3rd axi-s
8300
-
8165
8265
8365
Cf axis, PMC axis Z axis Cf axis, PMC axis The fourth axis
OT/OG OM
The 3rd axi-s
8400
-
8465
are
OT/OG OM
In the followingr par€rmeter numbers of each axis are to be indicated by *. Parameter No.
Data
sBoo
DGPRM
BirNo.
7
6
5
2
I
0
While the power is turned orlr the standard values of parameters related to Digital Servo are ' 0: to be set l: noE to be set When this parameter is set to 0 after seEting the motor tyPe' the standard values which have been set corresponding to the motor type of the parameter 8 * 20 are automatically set and this parameter becomes ttltt.
DGPRM
Data
Parameter No.
8Eo
3
4
l
AMR5
Bit
No.
-489-
AMR4
AMR3
AMR2
AMRI
AMRO
_r'
,'d AMRO
-
AMR5
&
No. of pulses/pulse coder rotation(p/r)
Motor type
2-0, 1-0: 0, 5,
10,
AMR
5
q
3
2
I
0
2000
0
I
I
i
I
I
2500
0
I
I
0
I
0
3000
0
1
I
0
0
0
I
2000
0
i
0
1
l.
0
I
1000
0
t
0
0
0
0
I 2500
0
0
0
0
0
I
20000
I
I
t I
I
I
I
25000
I
t
f
0
I
0
20,20M,30,30R
4-0,
3-0
5-0
2-O, l-0, 0, 5, 10, 20, 20M, 30, 30R
1
Data
Parameter No.
8E oz Btr No.
7
6s
t
Since the set value has been fixed as in the following, never change lt. setting value of the PSSEL is 1, While that of the VFSEL is
The
Data.
Parameter No.
8Bo3 Bit
No.
Data
Parameter No.
sEo4 Bit
No.
Setting data related to Digital Servo. Nore) I^Ihen phrameter No. 8 * 00 bit 1 (DGPRM) is set to 0, the standard values of these parameEers are auturatically set. Normally' never change these values.
-490-
Parameter No.
Data
8E2o
t'totor type
Parameter input Data type : Word axls type Data unit : Data range: L to 32767
i )
1 I :
The standard values of the parameters related to the Digital Servo are stored in the menory of the NC corresponding to each motor type. Set them for each
axis.
this parameter is 0 or less or an unavailable value is set, an-alarn results.
When
Motor type
Parameter No.
sIz
o
5-0
4-0
3-0
2-O
t-0
3
4
5
6
7
Motor type
Parameter No.
eflz
o
0
5
t0
20M
20
8
9
i0
11
L2
Motor type
Parameter No.
aIz
o
30
30R
13
L4
Parameter No.
sEzL
I
Data
Load l-nertia ratio (LDINT)
Parameter input Data type : I^Iord axis type Data unit : Data range: L to 32767
Digital Servo is to be used, calculate the inertia ratio of the load inertia and motor rotor inertia according to the following expression and set lt for each axis. Load inertla ratio = load ir-rerti+ x 256 Rotor lnertra
When
I
l
:
-491\'-
I
Paraueter
-sE
Data
No.
22
Rotating direction of motor
(DIRCTL)
Parameter input
Data type : Word axis type
Set the rotating direction of a motor. The motor rotares in the positive direction (Viewed from the motor llI: shaft side, it rotates in the CCW direction.) -111: The motor rotates in the negative direction (Viewed from the motor shaft side, it rotates in the CW direction. If a value exceDt the aobve has been set, an alarm results. Data
Parameter No.
8Ez3
Digital Servo related
(PULCO)
Parameter input
Data type : Word axis type Data unit : PULSE/REV Dara range: I to 32167
Digical Servo is to be used, set the number of pulses per rotation of the motor of the detector to be used for the velocity feedback. Perform calculaEion supposing-ttrat there are four pulses per pulse cycle phases A and
When B.
However, when a pulse coder of 0.lu is to be used, set l/10 data. If this parameter is 0 or less, an alarm results. Data
Parameter No.
BEz4
Digital Servo related
(PPLS)
Parameter input Data type : Word axis type Data unit : PULSE/REV Data range: I to 32767
Digital Servo is to be usedr s€t the number of pulses per one rotation of t.he motor of the detecEor to be used for the position feedback. Perform calculation supposing that there are hour pulses per pulse cycle of phases A and B. (Exarnple, 2,000 x 4 = 8,000 for a pulse coder of 2,000 p/r.) However,whenapulsecoderof0.liristobeused,Set1/l0data If this parameter is 0 or less, an alarm results.
When
-492-
Parameter No.
Data
8E 40 a $50
Parameters related to Digital Servo
s
Parameter input Data type : Word axis type Data unit : Data range: Parameters related to Digital Servo
Note) I{hen parameter No. 8 * 0O bit I (DGPRM) is set to 0 and rhe moror type is set to parameter No. 8 * 20, the standard value is autonatically set. Norma11y, it is not necessry to change this parameter. Parameters which can be determined by the motor to be applied. (Data type: Word axis rye) (l) AC servo
Parameter No. 5-0
4-0
uotor 3-0
co
be applied
t-0
2-O
0
a[+
o
241
460
669
322
469
828
pa
r
-527
-L467
-2I26
-1 103
-1625
-2782
[+ z a[+: a[a + a[a s a[a o
-i873
-2373
-237 4
-2488
-2503
-2457
80
r04
96
267
2I7
226
-300
-517
7
-1330
- 1082
-1t27
0
0
0
0
0
0
L
-1647 |
-1647 I
L
-1647 r
z
U
0
0
22556
r 3582
4t73
a
0
0
0
ra24
ro24
LO24
s
0
0
0
22552
13679
4t7 2
o
2607
2607
2607
2607
2607
2607
r
5560
5560
5560
5560
5560
5s60
0
0
0
0
0
0
2T
2L
2L
2I
2T
2l
3787
3787
3787
3787
3787
3787
319
319
319
319
3r9
319
0
0
0
0
0
0
a
s
afla afl+
fla afls
a
aEs
a[s z a fls r s[s + a[s s a
ps
e
-1647
-47
-493-
-1547
L
I
-1647
Falxlrr: -'r{.i6*r.tdffir"
AC servo motor
Parameter
s[s e[s e[s a
flo
Co
be applied
No
z
5-0
4-0
3-0
2-O
1-0
2330
2330
2330
2330
2330
2330
57
(7
57
57
57
0
0
0
U
0
0
282
7282
7282
7282
7282
a e
o
7
0
7
282
a[o
r
32256
32256
32256
32256
32256
32256
af,o
z
325t4
32543
3257 6
32507
325r9
327
:
317 3
28t7
2401
3265
3Lt2
706
+
85
225
475
853
28
5440
s
9437
83 75
136
97 L3
9256
2094
a[e e[o s[o
7
L7
t2
Pararueters which can be determined by the motor to be applied, (Data type: Word axis type) (2) AC servo motor fo be applied
Parameter No.
l0
5
afl+ o
s[+
i
e[+ z a[+: aIa a a[+ s a[+ o sfln
2..
aIa a sIa eIs o a[s r aIs z e
I
20
20r4
30R
30 I
t,<)
t7 20
Y44
-27 8r
-3532
-307
4
-3682
-557
-30s
2
-2622
-2649
-2646
-2665
-2669
3s9
654
824
535
s05
674
-L7 89
-3259
-4103
-2666
-25L6
0
0
0
0
0
L
-1647 r
t 941
835
491
49r
348
348
l024
LO24
t024
1024
1024
L024
L94L
834
49r
49r
348
348
-1647
808
-t647
L
970
-1647
L
-t647
6
r
705
-27
16
-JJ)O 0
-r647
L
2607
/-6U
T
zou I
2607
2607
2607
55 60
55 60
55 60
5560
5560
5560
0
0
U
0
0
0
-494-
{
I
I
i {
j
AC servo aot.or t,o be applied
Parameter
i
No 10
5
a[s r a[s eIs s aIs aIs z aIs e aIs s aIo o a[o r aIo z aIo r eIs sIo s +
2l
2L
2L
3787
3787
30
2I
30R 2L
l
2L
3787
3781
3787
3r9
319
319
319
3r9
319
0
0
0
0
0
0
t
2330
2330
2330
2330
2330
2330
57
57
57
57
57
57
0
0
0
0
0
0
7282
7282
7282
6918
6918
6554
32256
32256
32256
32256
32256
32256
32645
32645
32r55
32509
32452
324L9
r
539
3796
6s9
3242
3947
4366
7
312
9410
r2705
95s6
29250
21926
4567
11299
22907
9644
LL752
r3005
i
7
r
for each motor model (Data type: bit axls type) DaEa
Parameter No. It7
It6
aPo:
0
0
sSo
0
0
a
i
t
Note 1) The parameters marked by * are not used currently. Note 2) Wtren a pulse coder of 0.1u is used, the values of the paraneters marked by /l are to be changed to 1/10. Co'nnon parameters
I1 t
3787
o
+
20
201.1
tt\
#4
#3
ll2
tfL
ll0
0
0
0
0
0
I
0
I
I
0
I
0
-495-
APPENDIX
8
CODES USED IN PROGRAM Character-to-codes correspondence table
Character
Code
A
u65 066 o67 068 069 070
6
071
tt
B D E
Comment
Character
I J
K
8
054 055 056
9
05
7
H
tl
c
073 414 075
&
P
076 077 078 079 080
+
O
081
t
D
082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 048 o49 050
L M N
0
S
T U
\/ w X I
Z
0
I 3
051
4
052 053
Code
)
r-
032 033
034 035
Left oarenthesis Rieht parenthesis As teri sk Plus sien
041
043
044
Percent Ampersand
Aoostrophe
Conma
045
|linus sign
046
Period
047 058
Co
059
Semi-colon
G
063 .064
t
091
l
Sharp
030
uol 062
t\
Exclamation mark Ouotation mark
Dollar svmbol
060
?
Space
036 o37 038 039
o42
/
Comment
SIash
lon
Left ansle bracket Sien of eaualitv Rieht angle braeket 0uestion mark Coumercial at mark Left square bracket
092 093 094 095 000
Yen svmbol
Rieht square bracket Underline Space
')
-496-
<-4rn
3a&a APPENDIX 9
1)
Program
ERROR CODE LIST
errors (p/S alarm) Contents
A parameter which requires the power
off power.
off
was
input,
curn
alarn (A character with incorrect parity was input). Correct the tape.
TH
TV alarrn (The nunber of characters in block is odd). This alarm will be generared oniy when a the TV check is effective. Correct the tape.
Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits was input. (Refer to the item of max. prograrnnabie dimensions. )
A nuueral or the sign tt-tt eras input without an address at the beginning of a b1ock. The address was noE followed by Ehe appropriate data but was followed by another address or EOB cod.e.
sign rt-tt i-nput error (sign tt-tt was i-nput af Eer an address with which i.t cannot be used. Or two or more,r_r, were input. ) "1rrr"-Decinal point tt.,t input error (A decinal point was. after an address with which it ean not be used. Orinput two decimal points were input.) Unusable character was
An unusable G code
input in significant area.
was
Feedrate was not cornmanded to a cutting feed or the feedrate was inadequate.
In variable lead threading, the lead incremental and decremental outputted by idd.""" K exceed the maximum
command value or a conmand such that the lead negative value is given.
T only
becomes
A synchronous feed is specified without t.he option for threading /synchronous feed. The nunber of the corqmanded axes exceeded that bf simultaneously controlled axes An axis not included in the selected plane (by using GI7, Gl8, Gt9) was commanded in ci-reular interDolation.
In circular interpolation bv radius designation, negative value was corr-andei for address R. Note) ttTtt is a general term for OT-B and OOT-8. ttMtt is a general term for OM-B and OOM-B.
-497-
M only
|;;rF.# ,e.& ;
! i,
Contents
Number
029
030
offset value specified by
Remarks
is
Eoo large.
M only
The offset value specified by T code is too large.
T only
The offset number specified by H code for tool length offset only or cutter compensation is too large.
M only
The offset number in T function specified for tool
T only
The
H code
offset is too large
03r
In setting an offset arnount by G10' the offset number following address P was excessive or it was not specified.
032
In setting an offset amount by GIO, the offset
amount
\itaS eXceSSive. 033
A poinf of intersection cannot be determined for cuEter comDensation C.
M only
A point of intersection cannot be determined for tool nose
T only
The start up ror cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03 rnode in cutter comPensation C.
M only
The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03 mode in tool nose radius compensation.
T only
radius comDensation.
034
035
G39
is
commanded
in cutter comPensation B cancel mode or
M only
on the plane other than offset plane
Skip cutting (C:t) was specified in tool nose radius
T only
compensaEion mode. 036
Skip cutting (G31) was specified in cutter compensation
M only
mode. 037
G40 (offset cancel) is commanded at the plane other than offset plane in cutter compensation B. The plane selected by using GI7, G18 or G19 is changed in cutter compensati-on C mode.
M only
038
Over.outting will occur in cutter compensation C because the arc start point or end ooint coincides with the arc center.
M only
0vercuttlng will occur in tool nose radius compensation because the arc start point or end point coincides wi-th the arc center.
T only
Chamfering or corner R was specified with a start-up, a chncel, or switching between G41 and G42 in tool nose radius compensation. The program may cause overcutting to occur in chamfering or corner R.
T only
039
-498-
Number
ConEents
Remarks
040
overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation in a canned cycle G90 or G94.
T only
041
Overcutting vill
M only
occur in cutter compensation
C.
Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation.
of
is
o44
One
046
Other than P2, P3 and P4 are comnanded for 2nd, 3rd 4th reference point return command.
050
The chanfering or a corner R was specified in a block which includes a thread cutting command.
T only
051
The block after a block containing a chamfering or corner R specification e/as not a GOl cornmand.
T only
052
The nove direction or the move amount in a block following chaufering or a corner R command was not adequate.
T only
053
2 or more of IrKandRare directed in chamfering and corner radius R corrmand or C or R does not come after a con-a (, ) in direct drawing dimension programming.
T only
054
A block in which the chamfering or the corner R was
T only
G27 t.o G30
conmanded i"n canned
specified includes a taper
055
0s6
t i
a
commanded
0s8
to X-axis (Z-axis) in
T only
chamferin=g
Block end point ls not calculated correctly in direct
T only
Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing
T only
progranning. 059
The program wlth the selected number 1n external program number search.
060
Cormranded sequence number was
number search. 061
T only
R.
dlmension drawing programming.
'--i i
and
Both end point and angle are not designated in the next block comrnand of the angle designation block (A ).
I (K) is
-i
'M only
mode.
The uove distance in the block which includes the chamfering or the corner R specification is sualler than
command.
057
cycle
corrmand.
the chamfering aaount or the corner
I
T only
cannot be searched,
not found
in the
sequence
Address P or Q is not specified in G70, G7I, G7Z, or command
-499-
G73
T only
nGY
Content s
Number
062
o The depth of cut in G7l or
G72
Remarks
is zero or negative
T only
value.
o The repetitive count in G73 is zero or negative value. o The negative value is specified to Ai or Ak in G74 or G75. o A value other than zero is specified to address U or W, though Ai or Ak is zero in G74 or G75. A o negative value is specified to Ad, though the relief direction in G74 or G75 is determined. o Zero on a negative value is specified to Ehe height of thread or depth of cut of lst time in G76. o The specified minimum depth of cut in G76 is greater than the height of thread. o An unusable angle of tool tip is specified in G76. The sequence number specified by address P in G70, G7L, G72, or G73 command cannot be searched.
T only
065
o G00 or GOl is not
at the block with the sequence number which is specified by address P in G71, G72, or G73 command. o Address Z(W) or X(U) was commanded in the block with a sequence number which is specified by address P in G71 or G72, rejlpectively.
T only
066
An unallowable G code was comxnanded between two blocks specified by address P and Q in G7l, G72 or G73.
T only
067
G70, G7I, G72, or G73 command with address P and Q was
T only
069
The final move command in fhe blocks specified by P and Q of G70, G7l, G72 and G73 ended with chamfering or
T only
063
commanded
specified in MDI mode.
corner
R.
070
The memory area is insufficient.
07r
The address to be searched was not found. Or the program with specified program number was not found in progran number search.
072
The number of programs to be sEored exceeded 63 or I25
073
The commanded program number has already been used.
074
The'program number is oEher than I to 9999.
076
Address P was not commanded in the block which includes an M98 command or a G65 command. -
077
The subprogram was called in three or five folds.
(option).
-500-
.l
.*
(r :ia 1;
Number
078
Contents
Remarks I
A prograu number or a sequence number which was specified by address P in the block which includes an M98, M99 or G56 was not found.
t I
I
i
079
The contents of the program stored in the memory did not agree r^'ith that in tape in collation.
080
In the area specified by parameter e, the ueasuring posicion reach signal does, not come on. (Autornatic tool compensation function)
T only
08I
Autonatic tool compensation was specified wlthout a code. (Automatic tool compensation function)
T only
082
T code and automatic tool compensation were specified in the same block. (Automatic tool compensation function)
T only
In automatic tool compensation, an invalid axis was specified or the command is incremental. (Automatic tool compensation function)
T only
083
T
085
entering data in the meuory by using ASR or Reader/ Puncher interface, an overrun, parity or framing error lras generated. The number of bits of input data or setting of baud rate is incorrect.
086
When
087
When
t
entering data in the memory by using Reader/Puncher interface, the ready signal (DR) of reader/puncher was turned off'. I
entering data in the memory by using Reader/puncher interface, though the read terninaEe command is specified, lnput is not interrupted after 10 characters
read.
*t
090
The reference point return cannot be performed normally because the reference point return start point is too close to the reference point or the speed is too slow.
092
The commanded axis by G27 (Reference point did not return to the reference point.
094
P type cannot be specified when the program is re-started. (After program interruption, the coordinate system setting operation was perforned.)
M only
095
P type cannot be specified when the program is re-started. (After program interruption, the external work offset amount changed.)
M only
096
P type cannot be specified when che program
M only
is re-started. (After prograrr lnterrupti-on, the work offset amount changed.)
-501-
i I
When
return
t
check)
ffi
Contents
Remarks
097
P type cannot be'directed when the prograrn is re-started. (After power 0N, after emergency stop or P/S 94 to 97 reset, no autonatic operation is performed.)
M only
098
A command of the program re-start was specified without the reference point return operation after power 0N and emergency stop, and G28 was found during search.
M only
099
After completion of search in program re-start, command is given with MDI.
I"1
100
Setting data the system.
101
The power r{tas turned off while the memory in the part program operation. I{hen this alarm is setting data PWE to I and turn pushing the DELET to clear the
Number
PWE
a
move
t:
only
is set to 1. Turn it to 0 and reset rewriting the contents of storage & editing generated, set the on the po\rer while memory.
110
The absolute value of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the allowable ranse.
111
The calculatlsn result of macro instruction exceeds the allowable range Gzsz to 232-1).
Lt2
Division by Zero was specified.
1r3
A function which cannot be used in custom macro is
(including tan 90")
commanded.
1i4
An undefined H code is designated in G65 block.
For custom l"lacro
A
There is an error in other formats than
A value not defined as a variable number is deslgnated.
ti6
The variable number designated with P is forbidden for assignment.
For custom macro
A
The left side of substitution statement is a variable whose substitution is inhibited.
rl8
The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper limit
iI9
The argurnent of SQRT or BCD is negative.
(quintuple)
For custom Macro
SQRT argument 1s negative. Or BCD argument is negative, and other values chan 0 to 9 are preserlt eAch line of BIN argument.
The
-502-
on
A
Number
Contents
Rem:rks
specified in double
M only
L22
The macro rnodal call
L23
Macro
t24
DO-END
L25
126
In
t27
NC and macro conrmands
128
The sequence number specified in the branch not 0 to 9999. Or, it cannot be searched.
lzg
An addres3dni"n is nor allowed in
r30
In 3rd axis control-, a 3rd axis control command was n given by PMC during Cf control. On the contrary, an attenpt was made for Cf control fron PMC during axis contro l.
i31
control
l_s
cornmand
is
used.
does not corresporid to 1: I
DOn,
lcn<3is
is
erroneous.
not established. are confused. comrnand rras
T only
Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm message.
L32
133
No alarm No. concerned exists in external alarm message
clear.
Snall section data is erroneous in external alarn or external operator message.
message 135
Without any spindle orientatloD, an attempE was made for spindle indexj-ng.
T only
136
A move command of other axes was specified to the block as spindle indexing addresses C, H.
same
T only
t37
A move command of other axes was specified to che block as M-code related to spindle indexing.
same
T only
141
G51 (Scaling ON) is commanded in the tool offset mode.
M only
t42
Scaling uagnif i.cat ion
M only
1S
commanded
L-999999.
in other than
143
The scaling results, move distance, coordinate value and circular radius exceed the maximum conmand value.
M only
144
The coordinate rotatlon plane and arc or tool offset plane differ from each other.
M only
148
AutomatLc override deceleration is out of the settable range of judgernent angle. Check parameter No. O2l3'
02L4,02I5.
-503-
C
M only
*{H*.
s * Contents
Number
Remarks
r50
Tool Group No. exceeds the
151
The tool group commanded in the rnachining program i-s not
M only
t52
The number of tools within one group exceeds the
M only
153
The program setting the tool group is not entered in block to store T code.
t
When the group commanded.
maxi-mum
M only
a11owable va1ue.
set.
<,/,
value registerable.
is not
commanded, H99
maxi-mum
a
or D99 was
M only M only
i55
In the machining program, M06 and T code in the block do not correspond to the group in use.
156
P and L commands are missing at the head of program in which the tool group is set.
M only
r57
The number of tool groups to be set exceeds the maxinum a1lowab1e va1ue.
M only
158
The tool life
M only
M only
same
to be set is too excessive.
159 | During setting program executionr power was OFF. 160
Different M code is
commanded
M only
in Heads I and 2 as waiting
0TT only
M code. r65
An attempt was made to execute a program of an even number in Head I or an odd program number in Head 2.
199
Special word which cannot be used is
200
In the rigid tap, an S value is out of the range or is not specified. (programming error)
20r
commanded.
In the rigid tap, no F value is specified.
error
(progranming
)
202
In the rigid tap, spindle distribution value is too large. (system error)
203
In the rigid tap, position for incorrect .
204 205
0TT only
1429
or an S command is
In the rigid tap' an axis rnovement is specified blocks. (programrning error)
between
M29 and G84 (G74)
In the rigid tap, no rigid desoite M29 is specified.
mode
DI signal is turned
-504-
on
2) Alarms on the absolute pulse coder
Contents
Number 310
(APC)
is required for the
Manual reference point return
X-axis.
311
X-axis
APC communication
Renaiks
Failure in data
error
transmissi-on 312
X-axis
APC
overtime error
Failu-re in data transmisslon
313
X-axis
APC
framing error
Failure in data transmission
314
X-axis
APC
parity error
Failure in data transmi-ssion
X-axis
316
X-axis APC battery voltage has decreased to level so that the date cannot be held.
317
APC
alarm
APC
alarn
X-axis APC battery voltage ac a level where the battery must be renewed.
APC
alarm
318
X-axis APC battery voltage has reached a level where the batterv musE be renewed (including when por./er is OFF) .
APC
alarm
320
Manual reference point return is required for the Z-axis (T) or Y-axis (M).
321
Z-axis
APC communication
error (T)
Y-axis
APC communication
error
Z-axis
APC
overtirne
error
(T)
Y-axis
APC
overtine error
(M)
Z-axis
APC
framing error (T)
Y-axis
APC
framing error (l{)
Z-axis
APC
paritv error
(T)
Y-axis
APC
parity error
(U)
Z-axis
APC
pulse miss alann (T)
Y-axis
APC
pulse miss alarn
I
-l I
I
pulse miss alarm
3r5
APC
a
low
I
I { I
322
I
323
324
325
326
Failure in data transmission
:
(M)
Failure in data transmi-s
s
ion
Failure in data transmission
Failure in data transmiss ion APC
alarm
(M)
Y-axis APC battery voltage has decreased to a lott level so that the date cannot be held.
-505-
APC alarm
{
Contents
Number
Remarks
327
Y-axis APC battery voltage at a level where the batterv must be renewed.
APC alarm
328
Y-axis APC battery volcage has reached a level where the batterv must be renewed (including when
APC
porder 330
is
alarm
OFF) .
Manual reference point return is required for the
Z-axis. Z-axis
33L
(M)
error
APC communication
Failure in data
(I'1)
transmission
Z-axis
332
APC
overtime error
Fai-lure in data
(M)
t
Z-axis
333
APC
framing error
ransmission
Failure in data
(M)
transmission J
Z-axis
Jc+
APC
parity error
Failure in data
(M)
transmi-ssion 335
Z-axis
JJO
Z-axis APC bfttery voltage has decreased to level so that the date eannot be held.
337 | Z-axis I
338
APC
APC
pulse miss alarrn
APC alarm
(M) a Iow
battery voltage at a level where the
APC
alarm
APC
alarm
baccerv must be renewed.
Z-axis APC battery voltage has reached a level the battery must be renev/ed (including when power is OFF).
APC alarm
wherej
340
341
Manual reference ooint return is required for the
4th-axis. 4th-axis
(M)
error
APC communication
(M)
Failure in data transmiss ion
342
4th-axis
APC
overtime error
Failure in data
(M)
transmission
343
344
4th-axis
4th-axis
APC
APC
frarning
error
parity error
Failure in data
(I'1)
t ransmis s ion
Failure in data
(l'1)
transmission
345 346
th-axis
APC
pulse miss alarm
(M)
4th-axis APC battery voltage has decreased to a low level so that the data cannot be held.
APC alarm APC
alarm
-506I
#
Contents
Number
Renarks
347
4th-axis APC battery voltage at a level where the battery must be renewed.
APC a1-arm
348
4th-axis APC batLery voltage has reached a leve1 where the battery must be renewed.
APC
(including when
por^rer
is
alarm
OFF.)
3) Servo alarms Contents
Number
Remarks
400
The lst,
2nd-axis overload signal turns on.
401
The lst,
2nd-axis velocity control
402
The
403
The
404
Position control READY signal (READY) turns off, while velocity control READY signal (VRDY) does not turn off, or velocity control READY signal (VRDY) turns on' although READY signal (PRDY) is not turned on yet when turning on the power supply.
405
A position control system error. A reference point return failure due to a trouble in CNC or servo systtem.
READY
turns off.
3rd, 4th-axis overload signal turns
3rd, 4th-axis velocity control turns off.
Start operation with the
manual
signal
(VRDY)
on.
READY
signal
(VRDY)
reference point return
again. 410
(Note)
In X-axis, the position deviation amount during stop is greater than the setting value.
In X-axis, the position deviation amount during stop is greater than the setting va1ue. 411
The position deviation amount is larger than the set value during move in X-axis.
413
The content.s of the X-axis error register exceed "32767,
4r4
An
or the velocity command value of DA converter is outside a range of -8192 - +8191. This error is usually caused by various setting failures.
error has occurred in the Digital Servo system of the X-axis. Details of the error are output to the DGN0S No. 720.
-507-
T
M
F*.
""i-w
Contents
Number
415
Remarks
An attempt \.ras made to specify a velocity of exceediirg 5f1875 detection unit/sec in X-axis. This error is usually caused by a CIIR setting failure.
4t6
An error in the position detection system of X-axis pulse coder (break alarm)
417
When
I
the X-axis enters any of the conditions shovm in the following, this alarm results.
;
1) A value which is out of the specified range has been set to the parameter 8120 for motor type. .;
2) A proper value (l1I or -I1I) has not been set to the parameter 8122 for the rotating direction of the
it
,};
motor.
fg
,::
'i
.!
3) An inproper data such as 0 or less has b..n set to parameter 8123 for the number of velocity feedback pulses per rotation of. the motor
i
i a
{
4) An improper data such as 0 or less has been set to parameter 8124 for Ehe number of positi-on feedback pulses pef rotation of motor. /,') i
(Note )
In Z-axis; the position deviation amount during scop is greater than the setting value In Y-axis" the position deviation amount during stop is greater than the setting value.
421 | The position deviation amount is larger than the set I value during move in Y-axis (M) or Z-axis (T). 423
424
14
25
4LO
The position deviation amount exceeds "32767 in Y-axis
(M) or Z-axis (T), or the velocity couunand value of DA converter is outside a range of -8192 - +8191. This error is usually caused by various setting failures. An error has occurred in Ehe DigiLaI Servo system of rhe X(0II) or Z(OT) axis. o The details of the error are output to the DGNOS 721.
An attempt was made to specify a velocity of exceeding 511875 detection unit/sec in Y-axis (M) or Z-axi-s (T). This error is caused by a CMR setting failure.
error of the position deEection system of Y-axis pulse coder (M) or Z-axls pulse coder (T) (break alarrn) An
-508-
€^
4, g,
T
M
Number Lal
Contents
Remarks
Y-axis (01,I) or Z axis (0T) encers any of the conditions shorsn in the following, this alarm results.
When-the
1) A value which is out of the specified range has been ' set to the parameter 8220 for motor type. 2) A proper value (lI1 or -fll) has not been ser ro the parameter 8222 for the rotating direction of the moE.or.
3) An improper data such as 0 or less has been sec to paraueter 8223 for the number of velocity feedback pulses per rotation of the motor 4) en improper data such as 0 or less has been set to parameter 8224 for the nuuber of position feedback pulses per rotation of motor. 430 (No te )
In 3rd axis, the position deviation is greater than the setting va1ue.
amount
during stop
T
In Z-axis, the position deviation amount during stop is greater than the setting va1ue.
M
431
Position deviation amount is larger than the set value during move in Z-axis.
M only
433
The position dqvi.ation amount exceeds "32767 in Z-axis
M only
or the velocity command value af DA converter is outside a range of -8L92 - +8191. This error is usuallv caused by various setting failures. 434
An error has occurred in the Digital Servo system of Ehe Z(oM) or 3rd (OT) axis. The details of the error are
output to the
DGNOS 722.
435
An attenpt was made to specify a velocity.of exceeding 51 18 75 detection unit/sec i.n Z-axis. This error l-s caused by a CMR setting failure.
436
An error of the position detection system of Z-axis pulse coder (break alarrn).
-509-
M
only
M only
roFF
Contents
Nurnber 437
When
Remarks
the Z (0M) or the third (OT) axis becomes any of the shown in the following, this alarm results.
conditi-ons
1) A value which is out of the specified range has been set to the parameter 8320 for motor type. 2) A proper value (111 or -I11) has not been set to the parameter'8322 for the rotating direction of the motor.
inproper data such as 0 or less has been Set to parameter 8323 for the number of velocity feedback pulses per rotation of Ehe motor.
3) An
data such as 0 or less has been set to parameter 8324 for the number of position feedback pulses per rotation of the motor.
4) An improper
440
(Note)
In 4th axis, the position deviation amount during stop is greater than the setting value.
T
In 4th axis, the position deviation amount during stop ts greater than the setting va1ue.
M
44L
Position devfition amount is larger than the set value during move in the 4th-axis.
M only
443
The position deviation aurount exceeds !32767 in the
M only
444
An error has occurred in the Digital
445
An attempt was made to specify a velocity of exceeding 511875 detection unit/sec in the Ath-axis.
I'1
446
An error of the position detection system of the 4th-axis pulse coder (break alarm)
M only
4th-axis or the velocity command value of DA converter is outside a range of -8L92 - +8191. This error is usually caused by various setting faj.lures.. Servo system of the fourth axis. Details of the error are output to the DGNOS No. 723.
-510-
only
Number
447
Content s
Remarks
the fourth axis enters any of the conditions in the following, this alarm results
When
shown
1) A value whieh is out of the specified range has set to the parameter 8420 for motor type.
been
2) A proper value (1ll or -tll) has not been ser ro the parameter 8422 for the rotating direction of the motor
3) An improper data such as 0 or 1es6 has been set to the parameEer 8423 for the number of velocity feedback pulses per rotation of the motor. 4) en improper data such as 0 or less has been set to parameter 8424 f.or the number of position feedback pulses per rotation of motor. 4) Overtravel alarms Contents
Number
Remarks
510
Overtravel to exceed the (+) stroke l_init of X-axis.
511
Overtravel to exceed the (-) stroke limit of X-axis.
5r2
2nd stroke
513
2nd stroke liurit at - side of X-axis was exceeded.
linit at * side of X-axis was exceeded.
T T
a
520
Overtravel to exceed the (+) stroke lfuoit of y-axis or Z-axis (T).
(M)
521
Overtravel to exceed the (-) stroke linit or Z-axis (T).
of y-axis
(M)
522
2nd stroke linit
523
2nd stroke lirnit aE - side of X-axis was exceeded.
530
Overtravel to exceed the (+) stroke linit
of Z-axis.
M only
531
Overtravel Eo exceed the (-) stroke liurit of Z-axis.
M only
540
Overtravel to exceed the (+) srroke limit of the
M only
Overtravel to exceed the (-) stroke linit
M only
at * side of Z-axis was exceeded.
4th-axis.
541
4th-axis.
- 5lr -
of the
T
T.
:,# r!
5) Alarm in
FANUC PMC MODEL I,/M
Contents
Number
Remarks
600
Interruption by illegal
60r
PMC RAM
602
PMC
serial transmission error is
603
PMC
watch dog error is occurred
604
PMC ROM
605
LADDER
is occurred
command
Parity error is occurred occurred
Parity error is occurred.
Contents which can be stored in
PMC
is exceeded.
5) Overheat alarm Contents
Number 700
704
Remarks
Master PCB is overheated. Spindle overheat is detected by spindle flactuation
detection.
7> System
alarm
F Contents
Number
Remarks
9r0
RAII
parity error (1ow byte).
911
RAM
parity error (high byte).
9t2
Parity error of shared
RAM
with digital servo
(LOW).
913
Parity error of shared
RAM
with digital servo
(HIGH)
9t4
Parity error of 1ocal
920
Watch dog alarrn.
930
CPU
940
This alarm results when any of the following conditions is encountered:
RAM
Replace master
PCB
Replace master
PCB.
of digital servo.
Reolace master
error (abnormal interrupt).
PCB.
Replace master
PCB.
1) A PCB used for Digital Servo system is malfunctioning.
2) Evel when there are more than two control axes, the third axis (the third/fourth-axes) control printedcircuit board is not mounted. Example) The Z-axis of the 0M becomes the Chird. :) fhe master printed-clrcuit servo is in use.
board for the analog
-5L2-
t
Number
Content
Remarks
s
950
Fuse disconnection alarm. Replace the +24E: Fx14 Fuse.
998
ROM
paritv error.
8) Background edit alarm
(BP/S)
Contents
Number 't?2
Remarks
BP/S alarm ls produced with the same nunber as P/S alarur taking place in normal program editing. (070, 071, 072,
073, 074, etc.)
t l
140
An attempt lras made to select or delete a program being selected in foreground.
Note) An alarm on background editing is displayed on the key input line of background editing screen, not on a normal alarm screen. It is possible to reset it by some following MDI key operation.
The details of Digital Serv.o system alarm No. 4t 4 are indicated at the diagnosis numbers 72O,721,722, and 723 in order for the X, Y(Z), Z(C and PMC) , and the fourth (Y and PMC) axis. DGNOS No.
w;4
OVL
LV
0vc
HCAL
HVAL
FBAL
DCAI, I
OFAL: An overflow alarm has occurred. FBAL: A wire disconnection alarm has occurred. DCAL: An alarm of regenerative discharge circuit HVAL: An overvoltage alarm has occurred. I{CAL: An improper current alann has occurred. OVC : An excessive current alarm has occurred.
LV : A voltage shortage alarm has occurred. OVL : An overload alarn has occurred.
-513-
has occurred
OFAL
i:{r;:=lifi {q*e**itidbeil *a*f rL*sra
{
APPENDIX
10
LIST OF OPERATION
Class i f icat ion
Func t i on
Mernory
Clear
Key
SETTING
switch
PI,JE=l
all
Mode
swi rch
button
o
Power
0N
o
Power
ON
o
Power
ON
Func ! i on but ton
Operation and
clear Cleari.ng
I DFeFT
I
Parameter
Clearing s
to red
Program
Data InPut from TaPe
o
Parameter
(Tape
Program inPut
from
I
PARA}I
EDIT
OFSET
firlpUrl
EDIT/AUTO
PRGRM
flNPUfl
MDI
PARAM
MemorY)
Offset value
Data InPut
I Tf,lDIIT
IT
ED
o
Parameter
+ Parameter No.
MDI
1:t ?
PWE=0+ OFSET
Offset value
+ of fser
11e.
+ Offset data
Search
PARAU
MDI
Setting data
Tape Punch
+
EDIT
PARAM
I ETADT
Offset value
ED
1T
OFSET
fsTFR-f]
A1l program
EDIT
PRGRM
Io
One Prograrn
LUII
PRGR}I
El .
Program No. eearch
ED
PRGRM
[-1-l
Add res s
AUTO
IT i AUTO
PRGR}4
sequence
+
+ Data
+0-
Parameter
I
-9999 + | srARr
l.
I
P.ogram No. + | START
*
-
Program
xo. *
I
fII TE=unson)
Program No. search * l-I--l + Sequence ,.'o. * fll
(cuRSoR)
number search
IT
PRCRM
EDIT
PRGRM
IT
PRCRM
ED
Address r,rord search Address search
Deletion of all Programs
* FfrFffl
o
ED
-5r4-
Searching address and data input + l-Il (cunson) Searching address
*
l-T-l (CURSOR)
[-b-l
-
-eeee *
rcE
ET]
t
Classif icat ion Prograo Edir ing
Func t
lon
SETTING
switch
PI.JE
= I
Mode
Func t
switch but ton
ion
0pera t ion
but ton PRGRM
I U I r rrogram No. +l ur,Lt r
EDIT
PRGRM
[-N-l
o
EDIT
PRGRM
f-mfr-l
Deletion of a word
o
EDIT
PRGRM
Alternation of a word
o
Deletion of
o
ED1T
o
Deletion of a block
a
.
I
progran
Deletion of seve ral b
+ sequence No. * l-SEiEfl
locks
'
l-5ErET-l
Search the word to be
deleted EDIT
PRGRM
'
I-bEIEfl
Search the word to be
deleted+Addtess+Data
*
lnserti.on of a word CoIIation
Key
EDIT
o
Collacion in
I
PRGRM
|-TITEE-I
Search the word before the pLace in the program + Address + Dara * fTfrSItl
f ilreur
EDIT/AUTO
PRGRM
EDIT/AUTO
PRGRM
EDIT
PRGRM
I-o]. -nrrg *l-srARr-l
EDI,T
PRGRM
ffl i
EDIT/AUTO
PRGRM
f-ilI + File No. or
I
menory with taPe
Input / Output
with
Progran input
o
Cassette
Output all prograB
outPut
one
Program
Searching
a head of
ior
Deletion of f ile CoIIation in file with
o
EDIT
ED
IT /AUTO
taPe
I t
I
---l
. FIFFI
etog.am No.
_eee8 + rTfrPtri-l
a
file
I
File tqo.
FANUC
-515-
* I-sreETl -9999 or
PRGRI.l
El* rtr. r.ro. * l-3Te.fl*l
PRGRM
E
File No. * [-r]iFuE
/..r*#*.;".
"
;.d!e*l,
-r1*q
.g
.l APPENDIX
11
LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
f;
*; Function included in other optional items
Optional
o;t
3 axes (X, Y' Z) * 4 axes (4th axis/PMC axis) * 5 axes (PMC axis) * 6 axes (PMC axis)
Concrolled axis
rr-2 rr-2. i
2 axes
Simultaneously
controlled axes fi
3
axes
4
axes
* Controlled (3 axes Max.)
Axis control bY PllC
0.00t
Least input increment
is required
Reference itern
Specification
Name
PMC
mm/O.0001 inch
o
rr-2.1 Appendix
3
Appendix
3
*0.0001 run/0.00001 inch
Least command
?
increment
0.001 mm/O.0001 inch x0.0001 rnm/0.00001 inch
r/r0
Max. Programmable
Tr-2.2
Provided
Increment system +8
Appendix
digi ts
dimension
Rapid traverse rate
100 m/min, 4000 inch/min
I
I-5
1
x24 mlmin, 960 inch/rnin
Rapid traverse override Feedrate range
Perminutefeed
Fo, 25, 50,
I -
1002
100000 mrn/min
TT-5.3.2 Tr-5 .2.3
0.01 - 4000 inch/min
*1 -
12000 mm/min
i - 480 inch/rnin * o.ol - 5oo.oo mm/rev 0 .0
Per-
revolution
0.000L
-
rr-5 .2.4
9.9999 inch/rev
feed
Automatic ac ce 1 erat ion /
rr-5.4
Provided
deceleration
-516-
3
# PMC
Ref,erence
Specification
Name
is required
itern
Feedrate override
0-
Jog override
* Provided
o
Override cancel
Provided
o
Manual continuous feed
Simultaneous 1-axis
Manual synchronous feed
*Provided
Positioning
Provided
rr-4. i
Single direction positioning
:t Provided
Tr-4.2
Interpolation
Linear/circular
rr-4.3 rr-4.4
Thread cutting/ synchronous feed
* Provided
Helical cutting
*' Provided
rr-4.5
Fl-digit
* Provided
rr-5
Reference point
Provided
II-6. I
Reference point
Provided
rr-6.2
2nd reference
Provided
o
3rd/4th reference point return
* Provided
o
CRT/MDI (sma11)
9tt
rr-5 .3. 1
1502
,
feed
return
return check point return
CRT/MDr (small)
monochrome
. 2. 5
rr-6.3
III-2
9tt color
IIT-2
CRT/MDI
(ful1 key)
9tt monochrome
III-2
CRT/MDI
(full key)
9tt color
III-2
MDI
soft
key
I"lanual handle feed
*'5 + 2 pcs.
I
TTI-4.2
rIr-2.
1.1
III-4 .4
I unit
2 units 3 units
-517-
ffi *iil
o;,
Manual handle feed
xl,xI0,xM
Handle interrupt
*
Job and handle in
Provided
magnifying factor
the
is required
Reference
Specification
Name
PMC
item
III-5
Provided
.6
same mode
Incremental feed
x 1, x 10, x 100, x
Rigid tap
* Provided
Program restart
*'Provided
Reader puncher
* Reader puncher interface (1st channel)/ASR33 interface
inEerface
1000
III_5 .5
o
*' Reader puncher interfaee (2nd channel)
Dwe1l time
t
(every seeond)
rr-5 .6
Provided
Each axis interlock
Provided
Machine lock
A11 axes
Stored stroke check 1
Provided
Stroke limit external
* Provided
o
Z-axis
Provided
o
qpf|-ino
command cancel
Additional axls
o
III-6.
1
Provided
ignored
Mechanical handle feed * Provided
o
III-I5
Skip function
Provided
rr-i5.1
Exact stop
Provided
rr-5
mode
Exact stop
Provided
o
ervo-of f
Provided
o
Provided
o
S
Manual absolute
ON/OFF
Stored pitch error compensat ldn
* Provided
-518-
.5 .2
rr-5.
5.
I
rrr-10.
5
*3* ?o;,
is required
Reference
Soecification
Name
PMC
i teirn
III-II.9
Clock function
*
MDI ooeration
Provided
III-5.1.I
*
rrr-5
MDI operation
B
Provided
Provided
0rder-made macro
* Provided (64K8/128K8)
Reset
Provided
Optional
CMR
.
I .3
rrr-5. 4.5
Provided
Rapid traversing
Provided
Dry run
Provided
III-6
Single block
Provided
III-6.7
Program protect signal
Provided
Self-diagnosis function
Provided
Emergency stop
Provided
St.atus output.
CNC
o
signal output.
III-7 . I
ready signal, servo ready signal, alarm signal' distribution end signal, automatic operating signal, automatic operation starting signal,feed hold larnp signalr power supply ready signal and resetting signal
Battery alaru signal Position coder
F F
It
6000
rpur
External dimensions
560(W) nn
Power supply
I
x 400(n)
5O Hzl6O
t-
or
I
I
I. 1,
:
rolo
Fz +t
phase 220 V AC +102, 60 Hz *l Hz
Connection servo motor
FANUC
AC servo motor
Connectable spindle notor
FANUC
AC spindle
I
I
rl
200(D) nn
-L57"
ttz -157"
motor, etc.
i
,l
x
phase 200 V AC +102,
F:'
t:
o
*'4000 rpn
t
.6
-519-
F
o:t
. I"lachine Operatorrs ?anel
Reference
Specification
Name
i i6m
* Provided
o
Software oPeratorr s panel general Purpose
* Provided
o
Machine oPeratorr panel
* Provided
o
Software oPeratorr panel
s
s
Specification
Name
Incremental Pulse coder interface
ITT_2
LLL-L.L
,
. Position Detector
is required
PMC
PMC
is required
Reference itern
Provided
Provided Absolute Pulse coder i-nterf ace , PMC
Speci
*
3000 stePs
* * * *
3000 5ooo 8000 12000
fi cation
steps steps steps steps
No. of DI/DO
* *
-520-
required
.
o:t
Program Inpu
is
required
Reference
Speci f icat ion
Name
PMC
item
Coordinate system setEing
Provided
rr-7. I
Automatic coordinate system setting
Provided
rr-7 . I .2
[,Iork coordinate svstem ;t Provided
rr-7.1.I
Decimal point
Provided
rr-8.3
Provided
rr-8.3
programming
Pocket calculator type decimal point programming
Program input of offset data
* Provided
Custom macro
:k Provided
II-I6
* Provided
II-
Custom B format )
(F10/fl
rr-8.2
Inch/uretric conversion | * Provided
I
I i
I7
Cutter compensat.ion
B
* Provided
II-T4.2
Cutter comDensation
C
* Provided
rr-14.3
Canned cvcle
rY Provided
rr-13. I
Playback
* Provided
Circular interpolation by R programming
Provided
EIA/ISO automatic discriuinat ion
* Provided
Mirror
Provided
1
I
image
o
Automatic corner override
*' Provided
Scaling
rt Provided
rr-14.5
Coordinate rotation
* Provided
rr-14.5
I'lenu programming
:Y Provided
rrr-9.
Ff0/ffl
* Provided
II-18
tape format
i
I
'l
-
;| I
-
.521
-
14
o:t
Pattern data input
* Provided
Conversational
*'Provided
programming with
Reference
Soecification
Name
is required
PMC
item
graphic Conversational
programming with graph for machining
*'Provided
center
Ilacro execucer
r rt. Auxiliary
*
64KB/*i28KB
o;,
lunction
Auxiliary function
Auxiliary function lock
rr-11.1
M2
digits
M3
digits
o
86 digits
o
2nd auxiliarv funcEion
Provided
. Soindle Function
Spindle function
,
rr-9.1. i
s4ls5 dlgirs
* Provided
Spindle overr.ide
t, 50 -
Analog voltage control
Provided
o
l2O%
o
PMC
-522-
s requlre
item
S2 digits
*
PMC
.3
Reference
Specification
Spindle analog output
by
III-6
o
Name
is required
Reference item
Specification
Name
PMC
. Tool Function
memory
item
II-10
T2
T4
Tool offset
requ
Reference
Specification
Name
Tool function
s
t
o
*6 di-gits x 32 * 64 nemories f 99 memories * 200 nemories
Tool length
rr-14. I
Provided
comoensation
Tool length measureuent
Tool life
* Provided
management
* Provided
o
External tool offset
*'Provided
o
o;,
Edi lo , Edit/Operation
length
No. of programs registered
PMC
is required
Reference
Specification
Name
Part program storage
rr-10.2
item
rrr-9. l8
10n *.20 n
*40u *80rn rt 120 n *320n * 63 programs * 125 programs g 200 programs
rrr-9.
l7
Program name display
Provided
rrr-1 I . 2
Sequence No. search
Provided
III-9.9
Program No. search
Provided
III-9.4
Optional block skip
I block
rr-13 .4.4
9 blocks Sequence No.
o
* Provided
comparison and stop
-523-
rr-I3.4.4
o: Speci
Name
External work
PMC
is required
Reference item
fication
Provided (15)
No.
search Program protect
Provided
Background edit
* Provided
rrr-9. I 3
. Dlspl.a Di
req u ired
, PMC 1S
Speci
Name
English Japanese (Chinese characters)
Languages
* * * *
German/French Chinese
Italian
Run tine/No. of parts
'. t
display
Reference ltem
fication
III_I
Provided -:
I .6
.j
Graphic display
* Provided
III-14
Actual speed display
Provided
rrr-1 1 .4
Floppy cassette directory display
* Provided
rrr-13.7
. External Data Dat rnput/uutpu /o,t
o:,
External key i,nput
*'Provided
o
External tool offset
* Provided
o
External
*' Provided
o
External dafa inDut
* Provided
o,
External work No.
15 works
message
search Remote
buffer
High-speed remote
buffer
':t Provided
* Provided
A
-524-
is required
Reference item
Specification
Name
PMC
is required Name
High-speed remote
buffer
Sp
Reference
ecifi cation
item
* Provided
B
I/0 device external control
* Provided
o
-525-
&:
a'
{
n1
l
,.t
-l
II
I
i) i I
o O
uJl
sl (Y)
l
o
Ig Jl
It -t
o (l, I
cc
fl zl
EI I
o u, (D
chl E.
o
6
cc uJ
G
o co
= o o o I
irA
2o> o
F.
F
po o! !o o6 CD 6ko
l+' lrt
:!
i, I
t'
i_
1
(J
=qlltrF-:#.;.'
""*r{fff
I
'ir S.t
lf,'-c-:.,{41 :
'i:,
\*'
^.\
\\.
\rI\
i.
ut
\ 't
i
. l/o fart af this mnnunl may be refiroduced in any form.
*
. All specifications and desigrs are subject to cltnnge without notice.
ii 'a
.* ;:i
ll#+-;r-€ieK;ll.*,
-\l-./t#
\ '.:,. '.
.,
G
'tt
